From bf9d0ddceb0e0f296e5cad03d2bccf462033a166 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Wed, 21 Jul 2021 16:41:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH] Replace single line breaks with double line breaks in NT (except Acts and James) (#1929) Acts and James are being edited Co-authored-by: Larry Sallee Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/1929 Co-authored-by: Larry Sallee Co-committed-by: Larry Sallee --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 26 +++++++++++++------------- en_tn_42-MRK.tsv | 20 ++++++++++---------- en_tn_43-LUK.tsv | 10 +++++----- en_tn_44-JHN.tsv | 26 +++++++++++++------------- en_tn_46-ROM.tsv | 30 +++++++++++++++--------------- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 28 ++++++++++++++-------------- en_tn_48-2CO.tsv | 24 ++++++++++++------------ en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 12 ++++++------ en_tn_50-EPH.tsv | 10 +++++----- en_tn_51-PHP.tsv | 10 +++++----- en_tn_52-COL.tsv | 10 +++++----- en_tn_53-1TH.tsv | 12 ++++++------ en_tn_54-2TH.tsv | 6 +++--- en_tn_55-1TI.tsv | 6 +++--- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 4 ++-- en_tn_59-HEB.tsv | 6 +++--- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 4 ++-- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 8 ++++---- en_tn_63-1JN.tsv | 4 ++-- en_tn_64-2JN.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_66-JUD.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_67-REV.tsv | 24 ++++++++++++------------ 22 files changed, 142 insertions(+), 142 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 2aa0ac6b6c..2aecded463 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -MAT front intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Matthew

1. The birth of Jesus Christ and the beginning of his ministry (1:1-4:25)
1. Jesus’ Sermon on the Mount (5:1-7:28)
1. Jesus illustrates the kingdom of God through acts of healing (8:1-9:34)
1. Jesus’ teaching about mission and the kingdom (9:35-10:42)
1. Jesus’ teaching about the gospel of the kingdom of God. The beginning of opposition to Jesus. (11:1-12:50)
1. Jesus’ parables about the kingdom of God (13:1-52)
1. Further opposition to Jesus and misunderstanding of the kingdom of God (13:53-17:57)
1. Jesus’ teaching about life in the kingdom of God (18:1-35)
1. Jesus ministers in Judea (19:1-22:46)
1. Jesus’ teaching about the final judgment and salvation (23:1-25:46)
1. The crucifixion of Jesus, his death and resurrection (26:1-28:19)

### What is the book of Matthew about?

The Gospel of Matthew is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Matthew showed that Jesus was the Messiah, and God would save Israel through him. Matthew often explained that Jesus fulfilled the Old Testament prophecies about the Messiah. This may indicate that he expected most of his first readers to be Jewish. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Matthew,” or “The Gospel according to Matthew.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Matthew wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Book of Matthew?

The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was the Apostle Matthew.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the “kingdom of heaven?”

Matthew spoke of the kingdom of heaven in the same way that other gospel writers spoke of the kingdom of God. The kingdom of heaven represents God ruling over all people and all creation everywhere. Those whom God accepts into his kingdom will be blessed. They will live with God forever.

### What were Jesus’ teaching methods?

The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in similar ways as other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. He often told parables. Parables are stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”

The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” It is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a “son of man.” That means the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to the son of man to rule over the nations forever. And all the people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. Therefore, Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Matthew?

The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions:

* “Bless those who curse you, do good to those who hate you” (5:44)
* “For yours is the kingdom and the power and the glory forever. Amen” (6:13)
* “But this kind of demon does not go out except with prayer and fasting” (17:21)
* “For the Son of Man came to save that which was lost” (18:11)
* “Many are called, but few are chosen” (20:16)
* “Woe to you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites! for you devour widows’ houses, while you make a show of long prayers. You will therefore receive greater condemnation.” (23:14)

Translators are advised not to include these passages. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these passages, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Matthew’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +MAT front intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Matthew

1. The birth of Jesus Christ and the beginning of his ministry (1:1-4:25)
1. Jesus’ Sermon on the Mount (5:1-7:28)
1. Jesus illustrates the kingdom of God through acts of healing (8:1-9:34)
1. Jesus’ teaching about mission and the kingdom (9:35-10:42)
1. Jesus’ teaching about the gospel of the kingdom of God. The beginning of opposition to Jesus. (11:1-12:50)
1. Jesus’ parables about the kingdom of God (13:1-52)
1. Further opposition to Jesus and misunderstanding of the kingdom of God (13:53-17:57)
1. Jesus’ teaching about life in the kingdom of God (18:1-35)
1. Jesus ministers in Judea (19:1-22:46)
1. Jesus’ teaching about the final judgment and salvation (23:1-25:46)
1. The crucifixion of Jesus, his death and resurrection (26:1-28:19)

### What is the book of Matthew about?

The Gospel of Matthew is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Matthew showed that Jesus was the Messiah, and God would save Israel through him. Matthew often explained that Jesus fulfilled the Old Testament prophecies about the Messiah. This may indicate that he expected most of his first readers to be Jewish. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Matthew,” or “The Gospel according to Matthew.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Matthew wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Book of Matthew?

The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was the Apostle Matthew.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the “kingdom of heaven?”

Matthew spoke of the kingdom of heaven in the same way that other gospel writers spoke of the kingdom of God. The kingdom of heaven represents God ruling over all people and all creation everywhere. Those whom God accepts into his kingdom will be blessed. They will live with God forever.

### What were Jesus’ teaching methods?

The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in similar ways as other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. He often told parables. Parables are stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”

The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” It is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a “son of man.” That means the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to the son of man to rule over the nations forever. And all the people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. Therefore, Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Matthew?

The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions:
* “Bless those who curse you, do good to those who hate you” (5:44)
* “For yours is the kingdom and the power and the glory forever. Amen” (6:13)
* “But this kind of demon does not go out except with prayer and fasting” (17:21)
* “For the Son of Man came to save that which was lost” (18:11)
* “Many are called, but few are chosen” (20:16)
* “Woe to you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites! for you devour widows’ houses, while you make a show of long prayers. You will therefore receive greater condemnation.” (23:14)

Translators are advised not to include these passages. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these passages, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Matthew’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) MAT 1 intro y7kk 0 # Matthew 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set a quotation from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this for the quoted material in 1:23.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Genealogy

A genealogy is a list that records a person’s ancestors or descendants. Jews used genealogies to choose the right man to become king. They did this because only a son of a king could become king. Most important people had records of their genealogies.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Use of the passive voice

Matthew uses the passive voice very purposefully in this chapter to indicate that Mary did not have a sexual relationship with anyone. She became pregnant with Jesus because the Holy Spirit performed a miracle. Many languages do not have a passive voice, so translators in those languages must find other ways to present the same truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 1 1 ava1 0 General Information: The author begins with Jesus’ genealogy in order to show that he is a descendant of King David and of Abraham. The genealogy continues through [Matthew 1:17](../01/17.md). MAT 1 1 y31w βίβλος γενέσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The book of the genealogy of Jesus Christ You could translate this as a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “This is the list of the ancestors of Jesus Christ” @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ MAT 1 20 iip4 αὐτοῦ ἐνθυμηθέντος 1 when he had thought “a MAT 1 20 fb7e κατ’ ὄναρ ἐφάνη αὐτῷ 1 appeared to him in a dream “came to Joseph while he was dreaming” MAT 1 20 lc8r υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 son of David Here, **son** means “descendant.” MAT 1 20 va5e figs-activepassive τὸ…ἐν αὐτῇ γεννηθὲν ἐκ Πνεύματός ἐστιν Ἁγίου 1 the one who has been conceived in her is from the Holy Spirit This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit caused Mary to become pregnant with this child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 1 21 j38f τέξεται…υἱὸν 1 she will bear a son
Because God sent the angel, the angel knew the baby was a boy. +MAT 1 21 j38f τέξεται…υἱὸν 1 she will bear a son Because God sent the angel, the angel knew the baby was a boy. MAT 1 21 glq8 καλέσεις τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 you will call his name “you must name him” or “you must give him the name.” This is a command. MAT 1 21 bf5z αὐτὸς γὰρ σώσει 1 for he will save Translator may add a footnote that says “The name ‘Jesus’ means ‘the Lord saves.’” MAT 1 21 em9q τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ 1 his people This refers to the Jews. @@ -666,7 +666,7 @@ MAT 8 34 b2hp ἰδοὺ 1 behold This marks the beginning of another event in MAT 8 34 j6sp figs-metonymy πᾶσα ἡ πόλις 1 the whole city The word **city** is a metonym for the people of the city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 8 34 xb5x figs-hyperbole πᾶσα ἡ πόλις 1 the whole city The word **whole** is probably an exaggeration to emphasize how very many people came out. Not necessarily every person came out. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MAT 8 34 bsf4 τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν 1 their region “their region” -MAT 9 intro tg41 0 # Matthew 09 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Sinners”

When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Passive voice

Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### Rhetorical questions

Speakers in this chapter asked questions to which they already knew the answer. They asked the questions to show that they were not happy with the hearers or to teach them or to get them to think. Your language may have another way of doing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Proverbs

Proverbs are very short sentences that use words that are easy to remember to tell about something that is generally true. People who understand proverbs usually have to know much about the language and culture of the speaker. When you translate the proverbs in this chapter, you may have to use many more words than the speakers used so that you can add information that the hearers knew but your reader do not know. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) +MAT 9 intro tg41 0 # Matthew 09 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Sinners”

When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Passive voice

Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### Rhetorical questions

Speakers in this chapter asked questions to which they already knew the answer. They asked the questions to show that they were not happy with the hearers or to teach them or to get them to think. Your language may have another way of doing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Proverbs

Proverbs are very short sentences that use words that are easy to remember to tell about something that is generally true. People who understand proverbs usually have to know much about the language and culture of the speaker. When you translate the proverbs in this chapter, you may have to use many more words than the speakers used so that you can add information that the hearers knew but your reader do not know. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) MAT 9 1 nl8w 0 Connecting Statement: Matthew returns to the theme, which he began in [Matthew 8:1](../08/01.md), of Jesus healing people. This begins an account of Jesus healing a paralyzed man. MAT 9 1 cs8l πλοῖον 1 a boat This is probably the same boat as in [Matthew 8:23](../08/23.md). You only need to specify this if needed to avoid confusion. MAT 9 1 lje9 εἰς τὴν ἰδίαν πόλιν 1 into his own city “to the town where he lived.” This refers to Capernaum. @@ -800,7 +800,7 @@ MAT 9 37 mur4 writing-proverbs ὁ μὲν θερισμὸς πολύς, οἱ MAT 9 37 m6ke ὁ μὲν θερισμὸς πολύς 1 The harvest is plentiful “There is plenty of ripe food for someone to collect” MAT 9 37 h3a2 ἐργάται 1 laborers “workers” MAT 9 38 vz8y δεήθητε…τοῦ Κυρίου τοῦ θερισμοῦ 1 beg the Lord of the harvest “pray to God, because he is in charge of the harvest” -MAT 10 intro m5iu 0 # Matthew 10 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### The sending of the twelve disciples

Many verses in this chapter describe how Jesus sent the twelve disciples out. He sent them to tell his message about the kingdom of heaven. They were to tell his message only in Israel and not to share it with the Gentiles.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The twelve disciples

The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:

In Matthew:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

Thaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James.

### “The kingdom of heaven has come near”

No one knows for sure whether the “kingdom of heaven” was present or still coming when John spoke these words. English translations often use the phrase “at hand,” but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phrases “is coming near” and “has come near.” +MAT 10 intro m5iu 0 # Matthew 10 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The sending of the twelve disciples

Many verses in this chapter describe how Jesus sent the twelve disciples out. He sent them to tell his message about the kingdom of heaven. They were to tell his message only in Israel and not to share it with the Gentiles.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The twelve disciples

The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:

In Matthew:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

Thaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James.

### “The kingdom of heaven has come near”

No one knows for sure whether the “kingdom of heaven” was present or still coming when John spoke these words. English translations often use the phrase “at hand,” but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phrases “is coming near” and “has come near.” MAT 10 1 nhp2 0 Connecting Statement: This begins an account of Jesus sending out his twelve disciples to do his work. MAT 10 1 gjs9 translate-numbers προσκαλεσάμενος τοὺς δώδεκα μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ 1 having summoned his 12 disciples “having summoned his twelve disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MAT 10 1 x1er ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ἐξουσίαν 1 he gave them authority Be sure that the text clearly communicates that this **authority** was (1) to drive out unclean spirits and (2) to heal disease and sickness. @@ -1675,7 +1675,7 @@ MAT 15 38 udk7 οἱ…ἐσθίοντες 1 those eating “the people who ate MAT 15 38 z66m translate-numbers τετρακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 1 4,000 men “four thousand men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MAT 15 39 be43 τὰ ὅρια 1 the region “the area” MAT 15 39 m8dp translate-names Μαγαδάν 1 of Magadan This region is sometimes called “Magdala.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MAT 16 intro za2k 0 # Matthew 16 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Yeast

Jesus spoke of the way people thought about God as if it were bread, and he spoke of what people taught about God as if it were the yeast that makes bread dough become larger and the baked bread taste good. He did not want his followers to listen to what the Pharisees and Sadducees taught. This was because if they did listen, they would not understand who God is and how he wants his people to live. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Jesus told his people to obey his commands. He did this by telling them to “follow” him. It is as if he were walking on a path and they were walking after him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Background information

Matthew continues his account from chapter 15 in verses 1-20. The account stops in verse 21 so Matthew can tell the reader that Jesus told his disciples again and again that people would kill him after he arrived in Jerusalem. Then the account continues in verses 22-27 with what happened the first time Jesus told the disciples that he would die.

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” ([Matthew 16:25](../../mat/16/25.md)). +MAT 16 intro za2k 0 # Matthew 16 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Yeast

Jesus spoke of the way people thought about God as if it were bread, and he spoke of what people taught about God as if it were the yeast that makes bread dough become larger and the baked bread taste good. He did not want his followers to listen to what the Pharisees and Sadducees taught. This was because if they did listen, they would not understand who God is and how he wants his people to live. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Jesus told his people to obey his commands. He did this by telling them to “follow” him. It is as if he were walking on a path and they were walking after him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Background information

Matthew continues his account from chapter 15 in verses 1-20. The account stops in verse 21 so Matthew can tell the reader that Jesus told his disciples again and again that people would kill him after he arrived in Jerusalem. Then the account continues in verses 22-27 with what happened the first time Jesus told the disciples that he would die.

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” ([Matthew 16:25](../../mat/16/25.md)). MAT 16 1 t249 0 General Information: This begins an encounter between Jesus and the Pharisees and Sadducees. MAT 16 1 t7p5 πειράζοντες 1 testing him Here, **testing** is used in a negative sense. Alternate translation: “challenging him” or “wanting to trap him” MAT 16 4 jl3e figs-123person γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς 1 An evil and adulterous generation Jesus is speaking to his present generation. Alternate translation: “You are an evil and adulterous generation” See how you translated this in [Matthew 12:39](../12/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) @@ -1747,7 +1747,7 @@ MAT 16 28 ytr3 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you “I tell y MAT 16 28 k2d1 figs-you ὑμῖν 1 to you Here, **you** is plural and refers to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 16 28 wq13 figs-idiom οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου 1 may certainly not have tasted death Here, **tasted** means to experience. Alternate translation: “will not have experienced death” or” will still be alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 16 28 b2pb figs-metonymy ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἐρχόμενον ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 until they may see the Son of Man coming in his kingdom Here, **his kingdom** represents him being King. Alternate translation: “until they see the Son of Man coming as King” or “until they see the evidence that the Son of Man is King” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 17 intro yb4k 0 # Matthew 17 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Elijah

The Old Testament prophet Malachi lived many years before Jesus was born. Malachi had said that before the Messiah came a prophet named Elijah would return. Jesus explained that Malachi had been talking about John the Baptist. Jesus said this because John the Baptist had done what Malachi had said that Elijah would do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

### “transfigured”

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Matthew says in this chapter that Jesus’ body shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]]) +MAT 17 intro yb4k 0 # Matthew 17 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Elijah

The Old Testament prophet Malachi lived many years before Jesus was born. Malachi had said that before the Messiah came a prophet named Elijah would return. Jesus explained that Malachi had been talking about John the Baptist. Jesus said this because John the Baptist had done what Malachi had said that Elijah would do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

### “transfigured”

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Matthew says in this chapter that Jesus’ body shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]]) MAT 17 1 u6dw 0 General Information: This begins the account of Jesus’ transfiguration. MAT 17 1 nva7 τὸν Πέτρον, καὶ Ἰάκωβον, καὶ Ἰωάννην, τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 Peter, James, and John his brother “Peter, James, and James’s brother John” MAT 17 2 xx8e μετεμορφώθη ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν 1 he was transfigured before them When they looked at him, his appearance was different from what it had been. @@ -1811,7 +1811,7 @@ MAT 17 27 ebj4 τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ 1 its mouth “the fish’s mouth MAT 17 27 t9t8 translate-bmoney στατῆρα 1 a shekel a silver coin worth four days’ wages (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) MAT 17 27 ej3l ἐκεῖνον λαβὼν, δὸς 1 Having taken that, give it “Take the shekel and give it” MAT 17 27 km3v figs-you ἀντὶ ἐμοῦ καὶ σοῦ 1 on behalf of me and you Here, **you** is singular and refers to Peter. Each man had to pay a half shekel tax. So one shekel would be enough for Jesus and Peter to pay their taxes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 18 intro m4y6 0 # Matthew 18 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### What should Jesus’ followers do when other followers sin against them?

Jesus taught that his followers must treat each other well and not be angry with each other. They should forgive anyone who is sorry for his sin, even if he has committed the same sin before. If he is not sorry for his sin, Jesus’ followers should speak with him alone or in a small group. If he is still not sorry after that, then Jesus’ followers can treat him as guilty. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) +MAT 18 intro m4y6 0 # Matthew 18 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### What should Jesus’ followers do when other followers sin against them?

Jesus taught that his followers must treat each other well and not be angry with each other. They should forgive anyone who is sorry for his sin, even if he has committed the same sin before. If he is not sorry for his sin, Jesus’ followers should speak with him alone or in a small group. If he is still not sorry after that, then Jesus’ followers can treat him as guilty. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) MAT 18 1 f7zv 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story that runs through [Matthew 18:35](../18/35.md), where Jesus teaches about life in the kingdom of heaven. Here, Jesus uses a little child to teach the disciples. MAT 18 1 iri5 τίς ἄρα μείζων ἐστὶν 1 Who therefore is greatest “Who therefore is the most important” or “Who then among us will be the most important” MAT 18 1 pp31 figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 in the kingdom of the heavens The phrase **kingdom of the heavens** refers to God’s rule as king. This phrase is used only in the book of Matthew. if possible, use **heavens** in your translation. Alternate translation: “in God’s kingdom” or “when our God in heaven establishes his rule on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1911,7 +1911,7 @@ MAT 18 35 pm1d guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ οὐρά MAT 18 35 q8p9 figs-you ὑμῖν…ἕκαστος…ὑμῶν 1 to you … each of you … your All occurrences of **you** and **your** are plural. Jesus is speaking to his disciples, but this parable teaches a general truth that applies to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 18 35 c4fw figs-metonymy ἀπὸ τῶν καρδιῶν ὑμῶν 1 from your heart Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s inner being. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 18 35 mzn6 figs-idiom ἀπὸ τῶν καρδιῶν ὑμῶν 1 from your heart The phrase **from your heart** is an idiom that means “sincerely.” Alternate translation: “sincerely” or “completely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 19 intro ewl5 0 # Matthew 19 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Divorce

Jesus taught about divorce because the Pharisees wanted people to think Jesus’ teachings about divorce were wrong ([Matthew 19:3-12](./03.md)). Jesus talked about what God had first said about marriage when he created it.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metonymy

Jesus often says the word “heaven” when he wants his hearers to think of God, who lives in heaven ([Matthew 1:12](../../mat/01/12.md)). +MAT 19 intro ewl5 0 # Matthew 19 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Divorce

Jesus taught about divorce because the Pharisees wanted people to think Jesus’ teachings about divorce were wrong ([Matthew 19:3-12](./03.md)). Jesus talked about what God had first said about marriage when he created it.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metonymy

Jesus often says the word “heaven” when he wants his hearers to think of God, who lives in heaven ([Matthew 1:12](../../mat/01/12.md)). MAT 19 1 nj6t writing-background 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story that runs through [Matthew 22:46](../22/46.md), which tells of Jesus ministering in Judea. These verses provide background information of how Jesus came to be in Judea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 19 1 ap4g ἐγένετο, ὅτε 1 it happened that when This phrase shifts the story from Jesus’ teachings to what happened next. Alternate translation: “And when” or “And after” MAT 19 1 c5j9 figs-metonymy ἐτέλεσεν…τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 had finished these words Here, **words** refers to what Jesus taught starting in [Matthew 18:1](../18/01.md). Alternate translation: “had finished teaching these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1977,7 +1977,7 @@ MAT 19 29 gq8p figs-metonymy ἕνεκεν τοῦ ἐμοῦ ὀνόματός MAT 19 29 bzt3 translate-numbers ἑκατονταπλασίονα λήμψεται 1 will receive 100 times as much “will receive from God one hundred times as many good things as they gave up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MAT 19 29 z8wb figs-idiom ζωὴν αἰώνιον κληρονομήσει 1 will inherit eternal life This is an idiom that means “God will bless them with eternal life” or “God will cause them to live forever.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 19 30 u8p3 πολλοὶ δὲ ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι 1 But many who will be first will be last, and the last, first Here, **first** and **last** refer to people’s status or importance. Jesus is contrasting people’s status now with their status in the kingdom of heaven. Alternate translation: “But many who seem to be important now will be the least important, and many who seem to be unimportant now will be very important” -MAT 20 intro z39h 0 # Matthew 20 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### The parable of the landowner and his vineyard

Jesus tells this parable ([Matthew 20:1-16](./01.md)) to teach his disciples that what God says is right is different from what people say is right. +MAT 20 intro z39h 0 # Matthew 20 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The parable of the landowner and his vineyard

Jesus tells this parable ([Matthew 20:1-16](./01.md)) to teach his disciples that what God says is right is different from what people say is right. MAT 20 1 k7sw 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus tells a parable about a landowner who hires workers, to illustrate how God will reward those who belong to the kingdom of heaven. MAT 20 1 q9qc figs-parables ὁμοία γάρ ἐστιν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 For the kingdom of heaven is like This is the beginning of a parable. See how you translated the introduction to the parable in [Matthew 13:24](../13/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MAT 20 2 wd43 συμφωνήσας 1 After he had agreed “After the landowner had agreed” @@ -2257,7 +2257,7 @@ MAT 22 45 d8gl figs-rquestion εἰ οὖν Δαυεὶδ καλεῖ αὐτὸ MAT 22 45 x9uh εἰ οὖν Δαυεὶδ καλεῖ αὐτὸν, Κύριον, 1 If David therefore calls him ‘Lord,’ **David** referred to Jesus as **Lord** because Jesus was not only a descendant of David, but he was also superior to him. MAT 22 46 n3hw figs-metonymy ἀποκριθῆναι αὐτῷ λόγον 1 to answer him a word Here, **word** refers to what people say. Alternate translation: “to answer him anything” or “to answer him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 22 46 c1f2 figs-explicit ἐπερωτῆσαι αὐτὸν οὐκέτι 1 to question him any longer It is implied that no one asked him the kind of questions that were intended to make him say something wrong so the religious leaders could arrest him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 23 intro m99i 0 # Matthew 23 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Hypocrites

Jesus calls the Pharisees hypocrites many times ([Matthew 23:13](../../mat/23/13.md)) and carefully tells what he means by doing that. The Pharisees made rules that no one could actually obey, and then they persuaded the ordinary people that they were guilty because they could not obey the rules. Also, the Pharisees obeyed their own rules instead of obeying God’s original commands in the law of Moses.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Name calling

In most cultures, it is wrong to insult people. The Pharisees took many of the words in this chapter as insults. Jesus called them “hypocrites,” “blind guides,” “fools,” and “serpents” ([Matthew 23:16-17](./16.md)). Jesus uses these words say that God would surely punish them because they were doing wrong.

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “He who is greatest among you will be your servant” ([Matthew 23:11-12](./11.md)). +MAT 23 intro m99i 0 # Matthew 23 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Hypocrites

Jesus calls the Pharisees hypocrites many times ([Matthew 23:13](../../mat/23/13.md)) and carefully tells what he means by doing that. The Pharisees made rules that no one could actually obey, and then they persuaded the ordinary people that they were guilty because they could not obey the rules. Also, the Pharisees obeyed their own rules instead of obeying God’s original commands in the law of Moses.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Name calling

In most cultures, it is wrong to insult people. The Pharisees took many of the words in this chapter as insults. Jesus called them “hypocrites,” “blind guides,” “fools,” and “serpents” ([Matthew 23:16-17](./16.md)). Jesus uses these words say that God would surely punish them because they were doing wrong.

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “He who is greatest among you will be your servant” ([Matthew 23:11-12](./11.md)). MAT 23 1 skq4 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story that runs through [Matthew 25:46](../25/46.md), where Jesus teaches about salvation and the final judgment. Here he begins to warn the people about the scribes and Pharisees. MAT 23 2 dnu3 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῆς Μωϋσέως καθέδρας ἐκάθισαν 1 sit in Moses’ seat Here, **seat** represents the authority to rule and make judgments. Alternate translation: “have authority as Moses had” or “have authority to say what the law of Moses means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 23 3 q336 πάντα οὖν ὅσα ἐὰν…ποιήσατε, καὶ τηρεῖτε 1 Therefore whatever…do and observe these things “all the things…do them and observe them” or “everything…do it and observe it” @@ -2553,7 +2553,7 @@ MAT 25 45 whu5 οὐδὲ ἐμοὶ ἐποιήσατε. 1 you did not do for MAT 25 46 m6me καὶ ἀπελεύσονται οὗτοι εἰς κόλασιν αἰώνιον 1 These will go away into eternal punishment “The King will send these to a place where they will receive punishment that never ends” MAT 25 46 nj72 figs-ellipsis οἱ δὲ δίκαιοι εἰς ζωὴν 1 but the righteous into eternal life The understood information can be made clear. Alternate translation: “but the King will send the righteous to the place where they will live forever with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 25 46 kq5b figs-nominaladj οἱ…δίκαιοι 1 the righteous This nominative adjective can be stated as an adjective. Alternate translation: “the righteous people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MAT 26 intro mtq8 0 # Matthew 26 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 26:31, which is words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sheep
Sheep are a common image used in Scripture to refer to the people of Israel. In [Matthew 26:31](../../mat/26/31.md), however, Jesus used the words “the sheep” to refer to his disciples and to say that they would run away when he was arrested.

### Passover
The Passover festival was when the Jews would celebrate the day God killed the firstborn sons of the Egyptians but “passed over” the Israelites and let them live.

### The eating of the body and blood
[Matthew 26:26-28](./26.md) describes Jesus’ last meal with his followers. At this time, Jesus told them that what they were eating and drinking were his body and his blood. Nearly all Christian churches celebrate “the Lord’s Supper,” the “Eucharist”, or “Holy Communion” to remember this meal.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Judas’ kiss for Jesus
[Matthew 26:49](../../mat/26/49.md) describes how Judas kissed Jesus so the soldiers would know whom to arrest. The Jews would kiss each other when they greeted each other.

### “I am able to destroy the temple of God”
Two men accused Jesus of saying that he could destroy the temple in Jerusalem and then rebuild it “in three days” ([Matthew 26:61](../../mat/26/61.md)). They were accusing him of insulting God by claiming that God had given him the authority to destroy the temple and the power to rebuild it. What Jesus actually said was that if the Jewish authorities were to destroy this temple, he would certainly raise it up in three days ([John 2:19](../../jhn/02/19.md)). +MAT 26 intro mtq8 0 # Matthew 26 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 26:31, which is words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sheep

Sheep are a common image used in Scripture to refer to the people of Israel. In [Matthew 26:31](../../mat/26/31.md), however, Jesus used the words “the sheep” to refer to his disciples and to say that they would run away when he was arrested.

### Passover
The Passover festival was when the Jews would celebrate the day God killed the firstborn sons of the Egyptians but “passed over” the Israelites and let them live.

### The eating of the body and blood

[Matthew 26:26-28](./26.md) describes Jesus’ last meal with his followers. At this time, Jesus told them that what they were eating and drinking were his body and his blood. Nearly all Christian churches celebrate “the Lord’s Supper,” the “Eucharist”, or “Holy Communion” to remember this meal.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Judas’ kiss for Jesus

[Matthew 26:49](../../mat/26/49.md) describes how Judas kissed Jesus so the soldiers would know whom to arrest. The Jews would kiss each other when they greeted each other.

### “I am able to destroy the temple of God”

Two men accused Jesus of saying that he could destroy the temple in Jerusalem and then rebuild it “in three days” ([Matthew 26:61](../../mat/26/61.md)). They were accusing him of insulting God by claiming that God had given him the authority to destroy the temple and the power to rebuild it. What Jesus actually said was that if the Jewish authorities were to destroy this temple, he would certainly raise it up in three days ([John 2:19](../../jhn/02/19.md)). MAT 26 1 t5mz 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story that tells of Jesus’ crucifixion, death, and resurrection. Here he tells his disciples how he will suffer and die. MAT 26 1 i35c καὶ ἐγένετο ὅτε 1 It came about that when “After” or “Then, after.” This phrase shifts the story from Jesus’ teachings to what happened next. MAT 26 1 xiv4 πάντας τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 all these words This refers to all that Jesus taught starting in [Matthew 24:3](../24/03.md). @@ -2723,7 +2723,7 @@ MAT 26 73 w8ww γὰρ ἡ λαλιά σου δῆλόν σε ποιεῖ 1 for MAT 26 74 edd8 καταθεματίζειν 1 to curse “to call down a curse on himself” MAT 26 74 w87b ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώνησεν 1 a rooster crowed A rooster is a bird that calls out loudly around the time the sun comes up. The sound a rooster makes is called “crowing.” See how you translated this in [Matthew 26:34](../26/34.md). MAT 26 75 nx3j figs-quotations καὶ ἐμνήσθη ὁ Πέτρος τοῦ ῥήματος Ἰησοῦ εἰρηκότος, ὅτι πρὶν ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι, τρὶς ἀπαρνήσῃ με 1 Then Peter remembered the words that Jesus had said, “Before the rooster crows you will deny me three times.” This direct quotation can be stated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Peter remembered that Jesus told him that before the rooster crowed, he would deny Jesus three times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MAT 27 intro deu4 0 # Matthew 27 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Delivered him to Pilate the governor”

The Jewish leaders needed to get permission from Pontius Pilate, the Roman governor, before they could kill Jesus. This was because Roman law did not allow them to kill Jesus themselves. Pilate wanted to set Jesus free, but they wanted him to free a very bad prisoner named Barabbas.

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Matthew 27:60](../../mat/27/60.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Sarcasm

The soldiers said, “Hail, King of the Jews!” ([Matthew 27:29](../../mat/27/29.md)) to mock Jesus. They did not think that he was the king of the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) +MAT 27 intro deu4 0 # Matthew 27 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Delivered him to Pilate the governor”

The Jewish leaders needed to get permission from Pontius Pilate, the Roman governor, before they could kill Jesus. This was because Roman law did not allow them to kill Jesus themselves. Pilate wanted to set Jesus free, but they wanted him to free a very bad prisoner named Barabbas.

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Matthew 27:60](../../mat/27/60.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Sarcasm

The soldiers said, “Hail, King of the Jews!” ([Matthew 27:29](../../mat/27/29.md)) to mock Jesus. They did not think that he was the king of the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) MAT 27 1 hvr4 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of Jesus’ trial before Pilate. MAT 27 1 qe1s δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. MAT 27 1 cm46 figs-explicit συμβούλιον ἔλαβον…κατὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ, ὥστε θανατῶσαι αὐτόν 1 plotted against Jesus to put him to death The Jewish leaders were planning how they could convince the Roman leaders to kill Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2846,7 +2846,7 @@ MAT 27 64 u5tg figs-ellipsis καὶ ἔσται ἡ ἐσχάτη πλάνη χ MAT 27 65 dkq9 κουστωδίαν 1 a guard This consisted of four to sixteen Roman soldiers. MAT 27 66 pk1q σφραγίσαντες τὸν λίθον 1 sealing the stone Possible meanings are (1) they put a cord around the stone and attached it to the rock wall on either side of the entrance to the tomb or (2) they put seals between the stone and the wall. MAT 27 66 e8uf μετὰ τῆς κουστωδίας 1 placing the guard “telling the soldiers to stand where they could keep people from tampering with the tomb” -MAT 28 intro psw9 0 # Matthew 28 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Matthew 28:1](../../mat/28/01.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

### “Make disciples”

The last two verses ([Matthew 28:19-20](./19.md)) are commonly known as “The Great Commission” because they contain a very important command given to all Christians. Christians are to “make disciples” by going to people, sharing the gospel with them and training them to live as Christians.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### An angel of the Lord

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels looked human. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md)) +MAT 28 intro psw9 0 # Matthew 28 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Matthew 28:1](../../mat/28/01.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

### “Make disciples”

The last two verses ([Matthew 28:19-20](./19.md)) are commonly known as “The Great Commission” because they contain a very important command given to all Christians. Christians are to “make disciples” by going to people, sharing the gospel with them and training them to live as Christians.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### An angel of the Lord

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels looked human. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md)) MAT 28 1 anr1 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of the resurrection of Jesus from the dead. MAT 28 1 qkn8 ὀψὲ δὲ Σαββάτων, τῇ ἐπιφωσκούσῃ εἰς μίαν σαββάτων 1 Now late on the Sabbath, as it began to dawn toward the first day of the week “After the Sabbath ended, as the sun came up on Sunday morning” MAT 28 1 gs43 δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. diff --git a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv index 8b938ec676..23385e438d 100644 --- a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -MRK front intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Mark

1. Introduction (1:1-13)
1. The ministry of Jesus in Galilee
- Early ministry (1:14-3:6)
- Jesus becomes more popular among the people (3:7-5:43)
- Moving away from Galilee and then returning (6:1-8:26)
1. Progress toward Jerusalem, repeated times when Jesus predicts his own death; the disciples misunderstand, and Jesus teaches them how difficult it will be to follow him (8:27-10:52)
1. Last days of ministry and preparation for final conflict in Jerusalem (11:1-13:37)
1. The death of Christ and the empty tomb (14:1-16:8)

### What is the Book of Mark about?

The Gospel of Mark is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Mark wrote much about how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. He did this to encourage his readers who were being persecuted. Mark also explained Jewish customs and some Aramaic words. This may indicate that Mark expected most of his first readers to be Gentiles.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Mark,” or “The Gospel according to Mark.” They may also choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Mark wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Book of Mark?

The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was Mark. Mark was also known as John Mark. He was a close friend of Peter. Mark may not have witnessed what Jesus said and did. But many scholars think that Mark wrote in his gospel what Peter told him about Jesus.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What were Jesus’ teaching methods?

The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in similar ways as other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. He often told parables. Parables are stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”

The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” It is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a “son of man.” That means the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to the son of man to rule over the nations forever. And all the people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. Therefore, Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### Why does Mark frequently use terms indicating short periods of time?

The Gospel of Mark uses the word “immediately” forty-two times. Mark does this to make the events more exciting and vivid. It moves the reader quickly from one event to the next.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Mark?

The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to include these verses. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these verses, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Mark’s Gospel.

* “If any man has ears to hear, let him hear.” (7:16)
* “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:44)
* “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:46)
* “And the scripture was fulfilled that says, ‘He was counted with the lawless ones’” (15:28)

The following passage in not found in the earliest manuscripts. Most Bibles include this passage, but modern Bibles put it in brackets ([]) or indicate in some way that this passage may not have been original to Mark’s Gospel. Translators are advised to do something similar as the modern versions of the Bible.

* “Early on the first day of the week, after he arose, he appeared first to Mary Magdalene, from whom he had cast out seven demons. She went and told those who were with him, while they were mourning and weeping. They heard that he was alive and that he had been seen by her, but they did not believe. After these things he appeared in a different form to two of them, as they were walking out into the country. They went and told the rest of the disciples, but they did not believe them. Jesus later appeared to the eleven as they were reclining at the table, and he rebuked them for their unbelief and hardness of heart, because they did not believe those who saw him after he rose from the dead. He said to them, ‘Go into all the world, and preach the gospel to the entire creation. He who believes and is baptized will be saved, and he who does not believe will be condemned. These signs will go with those who believe: In my name they will cast out demons. They will speak in new languages. They will pick up snakes with their hands, and if they drink anything deadly, it will not hurt them. They will lay hands on the sick, and they will get well.’ After the Lord had spoken to them, he was taken up into heaven and sat down at the right hand of God. The disciples left and preached everywhere, while the Lord worked with them and confirmed the word by the signs that went with them.” (16:9-20)

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -MRK 1 intro c6ep 0 # Mark 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:2-3, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “You can make me clean”
Leprosy was a disease of the skin that made a person unclean and unable to properly worship God. Jesus is capable of making people physically “clean” or healthy as well as spiritually “clean” or right with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])

### “The kingdom of God is near”

Scholars debate whether the “kingdom of God” was present at this time or is something that is still coming. English translations frequently use the phrase “at hand,” but this can create difficulty for translators. Other versions use the phase “is coming” and “has come near.” +MRK front intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Mark

1. Introduction (1:1-13)
1. The ministry of Jesus in Galilee
- Early ministry (1:14-3:6)
- Jesus becomes more popular among the people (3:7-5:43)
- Moving away from Galilee and then returning (6:1-8:26)
1. Progress toward Jerusalem, repeated times when Jesus predicts his own death; the disciples misunderstand, and Jesus teaches them how difficult it will be to follow him (8:27-10:52)
1. Last days of ministry and preparation for final conflict in Jerusalem (11:1-13:37)
1. The death of Christ and the empty tomb (14:1-16:8)

### What is the Book of Mark about?

The Gospel of Mark is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Mark wrote much about how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. He did this to encourage his readers who were being persecuted. Mark also explained Jewish customs and some Aramaic words. This may indicate that Mark expected most of his first readers to be Gentiles.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Mark,” or “The Gospel according to Mark.” They may also choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Mark wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Book of Mark?

The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was Mark. Mark was also known as John Mark. He was a close friend of Peter. Mark may not have witnessed what Jesus said and did. But many scholars think that Mark wrote in his gospel what Peter told him about Jesus.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What were Jesus’ teaching methods?

The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in similar ways as other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. He often told parables. Parables are stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”

The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” It is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a “son of man.” That means the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to the son of man to rule over the nations forever. And all the people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. Therefore, Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### Why does Mark frequently use terms indicating short periods of time?

The Gospel of Mark uses the word “immediately” forty-two times. Mark does this to make the events more exciting and vivid. It moves the reader quickly from one event to the next.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Mark?

The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to include these verses. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these verses, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Mark’s Gospel.
* “If any man has ears to hear, let him hear.” (7:16)
* “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:44)
* “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:46)
* “And the scripture was fulfilled that says, ‘He was counted with the lawless ones’” (15:28)

The following passage in not found in the earliest manuscripts. Most Bibles include this passage, but modern Bibles put it in brackets ([]) or indicate in some way that this passage may not have been original to Mark’s Gospel. Translators are advised to do something similar as the modern versions of the Bible.
* “Early on the first day of the week, after he arose, he appeared first to Mary Magdalene, from whom he had cast out seven demons. She went and told those who were with him, while they were mourning and weeping. They heard that he was alive and that he had been seen by her, but they did not believe. After these things he appeared in a different form to two of them, as they were walking out into the country. They went and told the rest of the disciples, but they did not believe them. Jesus later appeared to the eleven as they were reclining at the table, and he rebuked them for their unbelief and hardness of heart, because they did not believe those who saw him after he rose from the dead. He said to them, ‘Go into all the world, and preach the gospel to the entire creation. He who believes and is baptized will be saved, and he who does not believe will be condemned. These signs will go with those who believe: In my name they will cast out demons. They will speak in new languages. They will pick up snakes with their hands, and if they drink anything deadly, it will not hurt them. They will lay hands on the sick, and they will get well.’ After the Lord had spoken to them, he was taken up into heaven and sat down at the right hand of God. The disciples left and preached everywhere, while the Lord worked with them and confirmed the word by the signs that went with them.” (16:9-20)

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +MRK 1 intro c6ep 0 # Mark 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:2-3, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “You can make me clean”

Leprosy was a disease of the skin that made a person unclean and unable to properly worship God. Jesus is capable of making people physically “clean” or healthy as well as spiritually “clean” or right with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])

### “The kingdom of God is near”

Scholars debate whether the “kingdom of God” was present at this time or is something that is still coming. English translations frequently use the phrase “at hand,” but this can create difficulty for translators. Other versions use the phase “is coming” and “has come near.” MRK 1 1 s8qp 0 General Information: The book of Mark begins with the prophet Isaiah’s foretelling of the coming of John the Baptist, who baptizes Jesus. The author is Mark, also called John Mark, who is the son of one of the several women named Mary mentioned in the four Gospels. He is also the nephew of Barnabas. MRK 1 1 i3bc guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MRK 1 2 gu7i figs-idiom πρὸ προσώπου σου 1 before your face This is an idiom that means “ahead of you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ MRK 1 45 bn6r ὥστε 1 so much that The man spread the news so much that MRK 1 45 l9es figs-explicit ὥστε μηκέτι αὐτὸν δύνασθαι φανερῶς εἰς πόλιν εἰσελθεῖν 1 that Jesus could no longer enter a town openly This was the result of the man spreading the news so much. Here, **openly** is a metaphor for “publicly.” Jesus could not enter the towns because many people would crowd around him. Alternate translation: “that Jesus could no longer enter a town publicly” or “that Jesus could no longer enter the towns in a way that many people would see him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 1 45 d5lw ἐρήμοις τόποις 1 remote places “lonely places” or “places where no one lived” MRK 1 45 z363 figs-hyperbole πάντοθεν 1 from everywhere The word **everywhere** is a hyperbole used to emphasize how very many places the people came from. Alternate translation: “from all over the region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -MRK 2 intro zhb5 0 # Mark 02 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Sinners”

When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Fasting and Feasting

People would fast, or not eat food for a long time, when they were sad or were showing God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, like during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

The Jewish leaders used rhetorical questions to show that they were angry because of what Jesus said and did and that they did not believe that he was God’s Son ([Mark 2:7](../../mrk/02/07.md)). Jesus used them to show the Jewish leaders that they were arrogant ([Mark 2:25-26](./25.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 2 intro zhb5 0 # Mark 02 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Sinners”

When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Fasting and Feasting

People would fast, or not eat food for a long time, when they were sad or were showing God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, like during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

The Jewish leaders used rhetorical questions to show that they were angry because of what Jesus said and did and that they did not believe that he was God’s Son ([Mark 2:7](../../mrk/02/07.md)). Jesus used them to show the Jewish leaders that they were arrogant ([Mark 2:25-26](./25.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 2 1 se22 0 Connecting Statement: After preaching and healing people throughout Galilee, Jesus returns to Capernaum where he heals and forgives the sin of a paralyzed man. MRK 2 1 ir5j figs-activepassive ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 1 it was heard that he was at home This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the people there heard that he was staying at his home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 2 2 d3iy figs-explicit καὶ συνήχθησαν πολλοὶ 1 So many gathered there The word **there** refers to the house that Jesus stayed it in Capernaum. Alternate translation: “So many people gathered there” or “So many people came to the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ MRK 2 26 y57j τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως 1 bread of the MRK 2 27 i374 figs-activepassive τὸ Σάββατον διὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐγένετο 1 The Sabbath was made for mankind Jesus makes clear why God established the Sabbath. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God made the Sabbath for mankind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 2 27 u83s figs-gendernotations τὸν ἄνθρωπον 1 mankind “man” or “people” or “the needs of people.” This word here refers to both men and women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) MRK 2 27 s2yd figs-ellipsis οὐχ ὁ ἄνθρωπος διὰ τὸ Σάββατον 1 not mankind for the Sabbath The words **was made** are understood from the previous phrase. They can be repeated here. Alternate translation: “mankind was not made for the Sabbath” or “God did not make mankind for the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 3 intro x969 0 # Mark 03 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sabbath
It was against the law of Moses to do work on the Sabbath. The Pharisees believed healing a sick person on the Sabbath was “work,” so they said that Jesus did wrong when he healed a person on the Sabbath. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### “Blasphemy against the Spirit”

No one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit’s work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The twelve disciples

The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:

In Matthew:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

Thaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James.

### Brothers and Sisters

Most people call those who have the same parents “brother” and “sister” and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]]) +MRK 3 intro x969 0 # Mark 03 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sabbath

It was against the law of Moses to do work on the Sabbath. The Pharisees believed healing a sick person on the Sabbath was “work,” so they said that Jesus did wrong when he healed a person on the Sabbath. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### “Blasphemy against the Spirit”

No one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit’s work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The twelve disciples

The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:

In Matthew:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

Thaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James.

### Brothers and Sisters

Most people call those who have the same parents “brother” and “sister” and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]]) MRK 3 1 cp3e 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus heals a man on the Sabbath in the synagogue and shows how he feels about what the Pharisees had done with the Sabbath rules. The Pharisees and Herodians begin to plan to put Jesus to death. MRK 3 1 y5l9 ἄνθρωπος, ἐξηραμμένην ἔχων τὴν χεῖρα 1 a man with a withered hand “a man with a crippled hand” MRK 3 2 v2yj παρετήρουν αὐτὸν, εἰ τοῖς Σάββασιν θεραπεύσει αὐτόν 1 Some people watched him closely to see if he would heal him “Some people watched Jesus closely to see if he would heal the man with the withered hand” @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ MRK 4 39 ag41 γαλήνη μεγάλη 1 a great calm “a great stillness ove MRK 4 40 h7n3 καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς 1 Then he said to them “And Jesus said to his disciples” MRK 4 40 w5n4 figs-rquestion τί δειλοί ἐστε? οὔπω ἔχετε πίστιν 1 Why are you afraid? Do you still not have faith? Jesus asks these questions to make his disciples consider why they are afraid when he is with them. These questions can be written as statements. Alternate translation: “You should not be afraid. You need to have more faith.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 4 41 u8e1 figs-rquestion τίς ἄρα οὗτός ἐστιν, ὅτι καὶ ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ ἡ θάλασσα ὑπακούει αὐτῷ? 1 Who then is this, because even the wind and the sea obey him? The disciples ask this question in amazement at what Jesus did. This question can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “This man is not like ordinary men; even the wind and the sea obey him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 5 intro lh25 0 # Mark 05 General Notes
## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Talitha, koum”

The words **Talitha, koum** ([Mark 5:41](../../mrk/05/41.md)) are from the Aramaic language. Mark writes them the way they sound and then translates them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) +MRK 5 intro lh25 0 # Mark 05 General Notes

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Talitha, koum”

The words **Talitha, koum** ([Mark 5:41](../../mrk/05/41.md)) are from the Aramaic language. Mark writes them the way they sound and then translates them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) MRK 5 1 fix1 0 Connecting Statement: After Jesus calms the great storm, he heals a man who has many demons, but the local people in Gerasa are not glad about his healing, and they beg Jesus to leave. MRK 5 1 gt8a ἦλθον 1 They came The word **They** refers to Jesus and his disciples. MRK 5 1 ahx8 τῆς θαλάσσης 1 the sea This refers to the Sea of Galilee. @@ -393,7 +393,7 @@ MRK 5 42 pt5t translate-numbers ἦν…ἐτῶν δώδεκα 1 she was twelve MRK 5 43 i5ja figs-quotations διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς πολλὰ ἵνα μηδεὶς γνοῖ τοῦτο, καὶ 1 He strictly ordered them that no one should know about this. He also This can be stated as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “He ordered them strictly, ‘No one should know about this!’ Then” or “He ordered them strictly, ‘Do not tell anyone about what I have done!’ Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) MRK 5 43 ij1k διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς πολλὰ 1 He strictly ordered them “He strongly commanded them” MRK 5 43 n29k figs-quotations καὶ εἶπεν δοθῆναι αὐτῇ φαγεῖν 1 He also told them to give her something to eat This can be stated as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “And he told them, ‘Give her something to eat.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MRK 6 intro kl7n 0 # Mark 06 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Anointed with oil”

In the ancient Near East, people would try to heal sick people by putting olive oil on them. +MRK 6 intro kl7n 0 # Mark 06 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Anointed with oil”

In the ancient Near East, people would try to heal sick people by putting olive oil on them. MRK 6 1 mi7z 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus returns to his hometown, where he is not accepted. MRK 6 1 mjr1 τὴν πατρίδα αὐτοῦ 1 his hometown This refers to the town of Nazareth, where Jesus grew up and where his family lived. This does not mean that he owned land there. MRK 6 2 y4xj τίς ἡ σοφία ἡ δοθεῖσα τούτῳ 1 What is this wisdom that has been given to him? This question, which contains passive construction, can be asked in active form. Alternate translation: “What is this wisdom that he has gained?” @@ -569,7 +569,7 @@ MRK 7 36 eb2y figs-ellipsis ὅσον…αὐτοῖς διεστέλλετο, MRK 7 36 zce7 μᾶλλον περισσότερον 1 the more abundantly “the more widely” or “the more” MRK 7 37 iy76 ὑπέρ περισσῶς ἐξεπλήσσοντο 1 They were extremely astonished “were utterly amazed” or “were exceedingly astonished” or “were astonished beyond all measure” MRK 7 37 dh17 figs-metonymy τοὺς κωφοὺς…ἀλάλους 1 the deaf…the mute These refer to people. Alternate translation: “deaf people…mute people” or “people who cannot hear…people who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 8 intro ry56 0 # Mark 08 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Bread
When Jesus worked a miracle and provided bread for a large crowd of people, they probably thought about when God miraculously provided food for the people of Israel when they were in the wilderness.

Yeast is the ingredient that causes bread to become larger before it is baked. In this chapter, Jesus uses yeast as a metaphor for things that change the way people think, speak, and act. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### “Adulterous generation”

When Jesus called the people an “adulterous generation,” he was telling them that they were not faithful to God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Jesus used many rhetorical questions as a way of both teaching the disciples ([Mark 8:17-21](./17.md)) and scolding the people ([Mark 8:12](../../mrk/08/12.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” ([Mark 8:35-37](./35.md)). +MRK 8 intro ry56 0 # Mark 08 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Bread

When Jesus worked a miracle and provided bread for a large crowd of people, they probably thought about when God miraculously provided food for the people of Israel when they were in the wilderness.

Yeast is the ingredient that causes bread to become larger before it is baked. In this chapter, Jesus uses yeast as a metaphor for things that change the way people think, speak, and act. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### “Adulterous generation”

When Jesus called the people an “adulterous generation,” he was telling them that they were not faithful to God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Jesus used many rhetorical questions as a way of both teaching the disciples ([Mark 8:17-21](./17.md)) and scolding the people ([Mark 8:12](../../mrk/08/12.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” ([Mark 8:35-37](./35.md)). MRK 8 1 sgv6 0 Connecting Statement: A great, hungry crowd is with Jesus. He feeds them using only seven loaves and a few fish before Jesus and his disciples get in a boat to go to another place. MRK 8 1 rmd8 writing-newevent ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 In those days This phrase is used to introduce a new event in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MRK 8 2 h8v8 ἤδη ἡμέραι τρεῖς προσμένουσίν μοι, καὶ οὐκ ἔχουσιν τι φάγωσιν 1 they continue to be with me already for three days and have nothing to eat “this is this third day these people have been with me, and they have nothing to eat” @@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ MRK 8 38 s5tm guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπ MRK 8 38 xd58 ὅταν ἔλθῃ 1 when he comes “when he comes back” MRK 8 38 vl69 ἐν τῇ δόξῃ τοῦ Πατρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 in the glory of his Father When Jesus returns he will have the same glory as his Father. MRK 8 38 vqk3 μετὰ τῶν ἀγγέλων τῶν ἁγίων 1 with the holy angels “accompanied by the holy angels” -MRK 9 intro n92j 0 # Mark 09 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### “transfigured”

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Mark says in this chapter that Jesus’ clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Hyperbole

Jesus said things that he did not expect his followers to understand literally. When he said, “If your hand causes you to stumble, cut it off” ([Mark 9:43](../../mrk/09/43.md)), he was exaggerating so they would know that they should stay away from anything that caused them to sin, even if it was something they loved or thought they needed.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Elijah and Moses

Elijah and Moses suddenly appear to Jesus, James, John, and Peter, and then they disappear. All four of them saw Elijah and Moses, and because Elijah and Moses spoke with Jesus, the reader should understand that Elijah and Moses appeared physically.

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([Mark 9:31](../../mrk/09/31.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “If anyone wants to be first, he must be last of all and servant of all” ([Mark 9:35](../../mrk/09/35.md)). +MRK 9 intro n92j 0 # Mark 09 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “transfigured”

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Mark says in this chapter that Jesus’ clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Hyperbole

Jesus said things that he did not expect his followers to understand literally. When he said, “If your hand causes you to stumble, cut it off” ([Mark 9:43](../../mrk/09/43.md)), he was exaggerating so they would know that they should stay away from anything that caused them to sin, even if it was something they loved or thought they needed.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Elijah and Moses

Elijah and Moses suddenly appear to Jesus, James, John, and Peter, and then they disappear. All four of them saw Elijah and Moses, and because Elijah and Moses spoke with Jesus, the reader should understand that Elijah and Moses appeared physically.

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([Mark 9:31](../../mrk/09/31.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “If anyone wants to be first, he must be last of all and servant of all” ([Mark 9:35](../../mrk/09/35.md)). MRK 9 1 mt8p 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus has just been talking to the people and his disciples about following him. Six days later, Jesus goes with three of his disciples up a mountain where his appearance temporarily changes to what he will look like one day in the kingdom of God. MRK 9 1 q4b6 ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς 1 He said to them “Jesus said to his disciples” MRK 9 1 yjf6 figs-metonymy τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει 1 the kingdom of God come with power The kingdom of God coming represents God showing himself as king. Alternate translation: “God show himself with great power as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1332,7 +1332,7 @@ MRK 14 71 ce6r figs-idiom ἀναθεματίζειν 1 to curse If in your lang MRK 14 72 i7u2 εὐθὺς…ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώνησεν 1 rooster immediately crowed The rooster is a bird that calls out very early in the morning. The loud sound he makes is “crowing.” MRK 14 72 ja3e translate-ordinal ἐκ δευτέρου 1 a second time **Second** here is an ordinal number. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) MRK 14 72 zr4p figs-idiom ἐπιβαλὼν 1 he broke down This idiom means that he was overwhelmed with grief and lost control of his emotions. Alternate translation: “he was overwhelmed with grief” or “he lost control of his emotions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 15 intro d823 0 # Mark 15 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### “The curtain of the temple was split in two”

The curtain in the temple was an important symbol that showed that people needed to have someone speak to God for them. They could not speak to God directly because all people are sinful and God hates sin. God split the curtain to show that Jesus’ people can now speak to God directly because Jesus has paid for their sins.

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Mark 15:46](../../mrk/15/46.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Sarcasm

Both by pretending to worship Jesus ([Mark 15:19](../../mrk/15/19.md)) and by pretending to speak to a king ([Mark 15:18](../../mrk/15/18.md)), the soldiers and the Jews showed that they hated Jesus and did not believe that he was the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/mock]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Eloi, Eloi, lama sabachthani?
This is a phrase in Aramaic. Mark transliterates its sounds by writing them using Greek letters. He then explains its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) +MRK 15 intro d823 0 # Mark 15 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “The curtain of the temple was split in two”

The curtain in the temple was an important symbol that showed that people needed to have someone speak to God for them. They could not speak to God directly because all people are sinful and God hates sin. God split the curtain to show that Jesus’ people can now speak to God directly because Jesus has paid for their sins.

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Mark 15:46](../../mrk/15/46.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Sarcasm

Both by pretending to worship Jesus ([Mark 15:19](../../mrk/15/19.md)) and by pretending to speak to a king ([Mark 15:18](../../mrk/15/18.md)), the soldiers and the Jews showed that they hated Jesus and did not believe that he was the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/mock]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Eloi, Eloi, lama sabachthani?

This is a phrase in Aramaic. Mark transliterates its sounds by writing them using Greek letters. He then explains its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) MRK 15 1 mps2 0 Connecting Statement: When the chief priests, the elders, the scribes, and the council gave Jesus over to Pilate, they accused Jesus of doing many bad things. When Pilate asked if what they said was true, Jesus did not answer him. MRK 15 1 xz7c figs-metonymy δήσαντες τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ἀπήνεγκαν 1 bound Jesus and led him away They commanded for Jesus to be bound, but it would have been the guards who actually bound him and led him away. Alternate translation: “they commanded for Jesus to be bound and then he was led away” or “they commanded the guards to bind Jesus and then they led him away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 15 1 v2yf παρέδωκαν Πειλάτῳ 1 They handed him over to Pilate They had Jesus led to Pilate and transferred control of Jesus over to him. @@ -1421,7 +1421,7 @@ MRK 15 46 g9hf figs-activepassive μνήματι ὃ ἦν λελατομημέ MRK 15 46 bw4k λίθον ἐπὶ 1 a stone against “a huge flat stone in front of” MRK 15 47 m782 translate-names Ἰωσῆτος 1 Joses This Joses was not that same person as the younger brother of Jesus. See how you translated the same name in [Mark 6:3](../06/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MRK 15 47 v3wu figs-activepassive ἐθεώρουν ποῦ τέθειται 1 the place where Jesus was buried This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the place where Joseph and the others buried Jesus’ body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 16 intro j5yz 0 # Mark 16 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Mark 15:46](../../mrk/15/46.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### A young man dressed in a white robe

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels were in human form. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md)) +MRK 16 intro j5yz 0 # Mark 16 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Mark 15:46](../../mrk/15/46.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### A young man dressed in a white robe

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels were in human form. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md)) MRK 16 1 cw1b 0 Connecting Statement: On the first day of the week, women come early because they expect to use spices to anoint Jesus’ body. They are surprised to see a young man who tells them Jesus is alive, but they are afraid and do not tell anyone. MRK 16 1 p61n καὶ διαγενομένου τοῦ Σαββάτου 1 When the Sabbath day was over That is, after the Sabbath, the seventh day of the week, had ended and the first day of the week had begun. MRK 16 4 kld9 figs-activepassive ἀποκεκύλισται ὁ λίθος 1 the stone had been rolled away This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “someone had rolled away the stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) diff --git a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv index 60605371bd..4950a20688 100644 --- a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -LUK front intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Luke

1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1–4)
2. Prologue
* The birth of John the Baptist (1:5–80)
* The birth and youth of Jesus (2:1–51)
* The ministry of John the Baptist (3:1–20)
* The baptism, genealogy, and temptation of Jesus (3:21–4:13)
3. The teaching and healing ministry of Jesus in Galilee (4:14–9:50)
4. Jesus teaches along his journey to Jerusalem
* Judgment by God, and people’s judgments about Jesus (9:51–13:21)
* Who will be part of the kingdom of God (13:22–17:10)
* Responding to Jesus by welcoming or rejecting him (17:11–19:27)
5. Jesus in Jerusalem
* Jesus’ entry into Jerusalem (19:28–44)
* Jesus teaches in the temple: conflict over his identity and authority (19:45–21:38)
* Jesus’ death, burial, and resurrection (22:1–24:53)

### What is the Gospel of Luke about?

The Gospel of Luke is one of four books in the New Testament that describe the life and teachings of Jesus Christ. These books are called “gospels,” which means “good news.” Their authors wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Luke wrote his gospel for a person named Theophilus and dedicated it to him. Luke wrote an accurate description of the life and teachings of Jesus so that Theophilus would be certain that what he had been taught about Jesus was true. However, Luke expected that what he wrote would encourage all followers of Jesus.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Luke” or “The Gospel according to Luke.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Good News about Jesus that Luke Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Book of Luke?

This book does not give the name of its author. However, the same person who wrote this book also wrote the Book of Acts, which is also dedicated to Theophilus. In parts of the book of Acts, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person traveling with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have recognized Luke as the author of both the Gospel of Luke and the book of Acts.

Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. Luke himself probably did not witness what Jesus said and did. But he tells Theophilus in his dedication that he talked to many people who did.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### The kingdom of God

“The kingdom of God” is a major concept in the Gospel of Luke. It is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

### Why does Luke write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?

Luke wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### What are the roles of women in the Gospel of Luke?

Luke described women in a very positive way in his gospel. For example, he often showed women being more faithful to God than most men. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they tell the story of many of the same events. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”

Passages are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This is a reference to Daniel [7:13–14](../dan/07/13.md). In that passage, there is a person who is described as like a “son of man.” That means that the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to this “son of man” to rule over the nations forever. All people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. But Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### Major issues in the text of the Book of Luke

ULT follows the readings of the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. However, there may already be older versions of the Bible in the translators’ regions that follow the readings of other manuscripts. In the most significant cases, the General Notes to the chapters in which these differences occur will discuss them and recommend approaches. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +LUK front intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Luke

1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1–4)
2. Prologue

* The birth of John the Baptist (1:5–80)

* The birth and youth of Jesus (2:1–51)

* The ministry of John the Baptist (3:1–20)

* The baptism, genealogy, and temptation of Jesus (3:21–4:13)
3. The teaching and healing ministry of Jesus in Galilee (4:14–9:50)
4. Jesus teaches along his journey to Jerusalem

* Judgment by God, and people’s judgments about Jesus (9:51–13:21)

* Who will be part of the kingdom of God (13:22–17:10)

* Responding to Jesus by welcoming or rejecting him (17:11–19:27)
5. Jesus in Jerusalem

* Jesus’ entry into Jerusalem (19:28–44)

* Jesus teaches in the temple: conflict over his identity and authority (19:45–21:38)

* Jesus’ death, burial, and resurrection (22:1–24:53)

### What is the Gospel of Luke about?

The Gospel of Luke is one of four books in the New Testament that describe the life and teachings of Jesus Christ. These books are called “gospels,” which means “good news.” Their authors wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Luke wrote his gospel for a person named Theophilus and dedicated it to him. Luke wrote an accurate description of the life and teachings of Jesus so that Theophilus would be certain that what he had been taught about Jesus was true. However, Luke expected that what he wrote would encourage all followers of Jesus.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Luke” or “The Gospel according to Luke.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Good News about Jesus that Luke Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Book of Luke?

This book does not give the name of its author. However, the same person who wrote this book also wrote the Book of Acts, which is also dedicated to Theophilus. In parts of the book of Acts, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person traveling with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have recognized Luke as the author of both the Gospel of Luke and the book of Acts.

Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. Luke himself probably did not witness what Jesus said and did. But he tells Theophilus in his dedication that he talked to many people who did.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### The kingdom of God

“The kingdom of God” is a major concept in the Gospel of Luke. It is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

### Why does Luke write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?

Luke wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### What are the roles of women in the Gospel of Luke?

Luke described women in a very positive way in his gospel. For example, he often showed women being more faithful to God than most men. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they tell the story of many of the same events. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”

Passages are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This is a reference to Daniel [7:13–14](../dan/07/13.md). In that passage, there is a person who is described as like a “son of man.” That means that the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to this “son of man” to rule over the nations forever. All people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. But Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### Major issues in the text of the Book of Luke

ULT follows the readings of the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. However, there may already be older versions of the Bible in the translators’ regions that follow the readings of other manuscripts. In the most significant cases, the General Notes to the chapters in which these differences occur will discuss them and recommend approaches. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 1 intro f1b5 0 # Luke 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1–4)
2. The angel Gabriel announces to Zechariah that his wife Elizabeth is going to bear a son, John the Baptist (1:5–25)
3. The angel Gabriel announces to Mary that she is going to become the mother of Jesus (1:26–38)
4. Mary goes to visit Elizabeth (1:39–56)
5. John the Baptist is born (1:57–80)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in Mary’s song about becoming the mother of Jesus in 1:46–55 and Zechariah’s song about the birth of his son John the Baptist in 1:68–79.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “He will be called John”

Most people in the ancient Near East would give a child the same name as someone in their families. People were surprised that Elizabeth and Zechariah named their son John because there was no one else in their family with that name. LUK 1 1 qhd9 figs-activepassive περὶ τῶν πεπληροφορημένων ἐν ἡμῖν πραγμάτων 1 concerning the things that have been fulfilled among us If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “about those things that have happened among us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 1 1 hyp6 figs-exclusive ἐν ἡμῖν 1 among us Luke dedicates this book to a man named Theophilus. It is no longer known exactly who he was. But since Luke says in [1:4](../01/04.md) that he wants Theophilus to know that the things he has been taught are reliable, it appears that he was a follower of Jesus. So here the word **us** would include him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ LUK 1 80 eh9j figs-explicit ἦν ἐν ταῖς ἐρήμοις 1 he was in th LUK 1 80 qu12 ἕως ἡμέρας ἀναδείξεως αὐτοῦ 1 until the day of his public appearance The term **until** does not indicate a stopping point. John continued to live out in the wilderness even after he started preaching publicly. In your translation, be sure that this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “through the time when he began to preach in public” LUK 1 80 ie4l figs-idiom ἡμέρας ἀναδείξεως αὐτοῦ 1 the day of his public appearance Here, Luke uses the term **day** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “the time when he began to preach in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 80 l102 figs-personification πρὸς τὸν Ἰσραήλ 1 to Israel Luke is referring to all of the Israelites figuratively as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -LUK 2 intro dw6t 0 # Luke 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus is born in the city of Bethlehem (2:1–20)
2. Joseph and Mary dedicate Jesus, and Simeon and Anna speak about him (2:21–40)
3. Jesus goes to Jerusalem with his parents for Passover (2:41–52)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in the song of the angels about Jesus’ birth in 2:14 and in Simeon’s song about Jesus in 2:29–32.

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “his father and mother”
In [2:33](../02/33.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts read “his father and mother.” ULT follows that reading. Some other ancient manuscripts read “Joseph and his mother.” That reading indicates that Joseph was not the biological father of Jesus, since Mary conceived him as a virgin. However, Joseph was the adoptive father of Jesus, and so the reading “his father and mother” is not incorrect. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading in ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +LUK 2 intro dw6t 0 # Luke 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus is born in the city of Bethlehem (2:1–20)
2. Joseph and Mary dedicate Jesus, and Simeon and Anna speak about him (2:21–40)
3. Jesus goes to Jerusalem with his parents for Passover (2:41–52)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in the song of the angels about Jesus’ birth in 2:14 and in Simeon’s song about Jesus in 2:29–32.

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “his father and mother”

In [2:33](../02/33.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts read “his father and mother.” ULT follows that reading. Some other ancient manuscripts read “Joseph and his mother.” That reading indicates that Joseph was not the biological father of Jesus, since Mary conceived him as a virgin. However, Joseph was the adoptive father of Jesus, and so the reading “his father and mother” is not incorrect. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading in ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 2 1 c887 writing-newevent ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 in those days This time reference introduces a new event. Alternate translation: “around that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 2 1 l103 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 in those days Here, Luke uses the term **days** figuratively to refer to a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “around that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 2 1 e9m5 writing-newevent ἐγένετο 1 it happened that Luke uses this phrase to show that this is the beginning of an account. If your language has a way of showing the start of an account, you may use that in your translation. If not, you may choose not to represent this phrase. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -479,7 +479,7 @@ LUK 2 51 zl2q figs-activepassive ἦν ὑποτασσόμενος αὐτοῖ LUK 2 51 ceu3 figs-metaphor διετήρει πάντα τὰ ῥήματα ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτῆς 1 kept all these things in her heart As in [2:19](../02/19.md), the **heart** here figuratively represents the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “carefully remembered all these things” or “reflected carefully on what all these things meant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 2 52 gb25 figs-abstractnouns Ἰησοῦς προέκοπτεν τῇ σοφίᾳ, καὶ ἡλικίᾳ 1 Jesus was increasing in wisdom and stature If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the ideas behind the abstract nouns **wisdom** and **stature** with adjectives. These two terms refer to mental and physical growth. Alternate translation: “Jesus steadily became wiser and stronger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 2 52 y5qk figs-abstractnouns χάριτι παρὰ Θεῷ καὶ ἀνθρώποις 1 in favor with God and people If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **favor** with verbs. The phrase **in favor with God and people** refers to spiritual and social growth. Alternate translation: “God blessed him more and more, and people admired him more and more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -LUK 3 intro tkg5 0 # Luke 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. John the Baptist begins preaching and baptizing (3:1–22)
2. The list of Jesus’ ancestors (3:23–38)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in 3:4–6, which Luke is quoting from the Old Testament about John the Baptist.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Justice
John’s instructions to the soldiers and tax collectors in Luke 3:12–15 are things that a person who wanted to live rightly would find reasonable and willingly do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and Luke [3:12-15](./12.md))

### Genealogy
A genealogy is a list that records a person’s ancestors or descendants. Such lists were very important in determining who had the right be king, because the king’s authority was usually passed down or inherited from his father. It was also common for other important people to have a recorded genealogy.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Prophecy often involves the use of metaphors to express its meaning. Spiritual discernment is needed for proper interpretation of the prophecy. The prophecy that Luke quotes in 3:4–6 from Isaiah 40:3–5 is an extended metaphor that describes the ministry of John the Baptist. See the individual notes to 3:4–6 for recommendations about how to translate this passage. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Herod locked up John in prison”
This statement could cause confusion because Luke says that John was imprisoned, and then he implies that John was still able to baptize Jesus. But Luke makes this statement in anticipation of Herod’s imprisonment of John. It describes something that was still in the future at the time of the other events in the narrative. See the first note to 3:19 for a further explanation. +LUK 3 intro tkg5 0 # Luke 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. John the Baptist begins preaching and baptizing (3:1–22)
2. The list of Jesus’ ancestors (3:23–38)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in 3:4–6, which Luke is quoting from the Old Testament about John the Baptist.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Justice

John’s instructions to the soldiers and tax collectors in Luke 3:12–15 are things that a person who wanted to live rightly would find reasonable and willingly do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and Luke [3:12-15](./12.md))

### Genealogy

A genealogy is a list that records a person’s ancestors or descendants. Such lists were very important in determining who had the right be king, because the king’s authority was usually passed down or inherited from his father. It was also common for other important people to have a recorded genealogy.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Prophecy often involves the use of metaphors to express its meaning. Spiritual discernment is needed for proper interpretation of the prophecy. The prophecy that Luke quotes in 3:4–6 from Isaiah 40:3–5 is an extended metaphor that describes the ministry of John the Baptist. See the individual notes to 3:4–6 for recommendations about how to translate this passage. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Herod locked up John in prison”

This statement could cause confusion because Luke says that John was imprisoned, and then he implies that John was still able to baptize Jesus. But Luke makes this statement in anticipation of Herod’s imprisonment of John. It describes something that was still in the future at the time of the other events in the narrative. See the first note to 3:19 for a further explanation. LUK 3 1 l167 writing-newevent ἐν ἔτει δὲ πεντεκαιδεκάτῳ τῆς ἡγεμονίας Τιβερίου Καίσαρος 1 in the fifteenth year of the reign of Tiberius Caesar This verse and the beginning of the next one are an extended time reference that introduces a new event. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Everything that the angels and inspired people had said about John and Jesus began to come true during the fifteenth year of the reign of Tiberius Caesar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 3 1 l168 translate-ordinal ἐν ἔτει δὲ πεντεκαιδεκάτῳ 1 in the fifteenth year If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “in year 15” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) LUK 3 1 l169 writing-participants Τιβερίου Καίσαρος 1 Tiberius Caesar As in [2:1](../02/01.md), **Caesar** is the title of the emperor of the Roman Empire. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “King Tiberius, who ruled the Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) @@ -587,7 +587,7 @@ LUK 3 36 xit8 translate-names τοῦ Καϊνὰμ, τοῦ Ἀρφαξὰδ, LUK 3 37 qev8 translate-names τοῦ Μαθουσαλὰ, τοῦ Ἑνὼχ, τοῦ Ἰάρετ, τοῦ Μαλελεὴλ, τοῦ Καϊνὰμ 1 of Methuselah, of Enoch, of Jared, of Mahalaleel, of Cainan This is a continuation of the list of Jesus’ ancestors that began in Luke 3:23. Use the same format as you used in the previous verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 3 38 ni8x translate-names τοῦ Ἐνὼς, τοῦ Σὴθ, τοῦ Ἀδὰμ, τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 of Enos, of Seth, of Adam, of God This is a continuation of the list of Jesus’ ancestors that began in Luke 3:23. Use the same format as you used in the previous verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 3 38 ck3f τοῦ Ἀδὰμ, τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 of Adam, of God Alternate translation: “the son of Adam, whom God created” or “the son of Adam, who was, in a sense, the son of God” -LUK 4 intro r3vy 0 # Luke 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. The devil tempts Jesus in the wilderness (4:1–13)
2. Jesus teaches in the synagogue in Nazareth (4:14–30)
3. Jesus teaches, heals, and drives out demons in Capernaum (4:31–44)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in 4:10-11 and 4:18-19, which is quoted from the Old Testamentt.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Jesus was tempted by the devil”
While it is true that the devil actually believed that he could persuade Jesus to disobey God and obey him instead, it is important not to imply in your translation that Jesus would ever really have wanted to obey the devil. +LUK 4 intro r3vy 0 # Luke 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. The devil tempts Jesus in the wilderness (4:1–13)
2. Jesus teaches in the synagogue in Nazareth (4:14–30)
3. Jesus teaches, heals, and drives out demons in Capernaum (4:31–44)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in 4:10-11 and 4:18-19, which is quoted from the Old Testamentt.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Jesus was tempted by the devil”

While it is true that the devil actually believed that he could persuade Jesus to disobey God and obey him instead, it is important not to imply in your translation that Jesus would ever really have wanted to obey the devil. LUK 4 1 n1xx writing-newevent Ἰησοῦς δὲ 1 Then Jesus Luke uses this expression to return to the story after providing background information about Jesus’ ancestors. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include a phrase that would provide continuity with the previous episode in the story. Alternate translation: “After John had baptized Jesus, then Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 4 1 l201 translate-names τοῦ Ἰορδάνου 1 the Jordan **Jordan** is the name of a river. Alternate translation: “the Jordan River” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 4 1 v18k figs-activepassive ἤγετο ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι 1 was led by the Spirit This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the Spirit led him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -3227,7 +3227,7 @@ LUK 18 42 gcv1 figs-personification ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε LUK 18 42 m257 ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you Here Jesus seems to be using the word **saved** in one of its particular senses, to mean “healed.” Alternate translation: “Because you believed, you have been healed” LUK 18 43 m258 ἠκολούθει αὐτῷ 1 he followed him Here, **followed** does not necessarily have the figurative meaning of “became a disciple.” Alternate translation: “he walked down the road with the rest of the crowd that was around Jesus” LUK 18 43 d1kk δοξάζων τὸν Θεόν 1 glorifying God Alternate translation: “giving glory to God” or “praising God” -LUK 19 intro zn2b 0 # Luke 19 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus helps a man named Zacchaeus repent of his sins (19:1–10)
2. Jesus tells a parable about a man who entrusted money to his servants (19:11–27)
3. Jesus rides into Jerusalem on a colt (19:28–48)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Sinner”
The Pharisees refer to a group of people as “sinners.” The Jewish leaders thought these people were sinful, but in reality the leaders were also sinful. This can be taken as irony. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### Servants

God expects his people to remember that everything in the world belongs to God. God gives his people things so they can serve him. He wants them to please him by doing what he wants them to do with everything he has given them. One day Jesus will ask his servants what they have done with everything he gave them to use. He will give a reward to those who have done what he wanted them to do, and he will punish those who have not.

### The donkey and the colt

Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that the disciples brought Jesus both a donkey and a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: Matthew 21:1-7 and Mark 11:1-7 and Luke 19:29-36 and John 12:14-15)

### Spreading garments and branches

When kings would enter the cities they ruled, people would cut branches from trees and take off the outer garments that they wore to stay warm in cold weather and spread them all on the road so the king would ride over them. They did this to honor the king and show that they loved him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/honor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])

### The merchants in the temple

Jesus forced the people who were selling animals in the temple to leave. He did this to show everyone that he had authority over the temple and that only those who were righteous, who did what God said was good, could be in it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]]) +LUK 19 intro zn2b 0 # Luke 19 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus helps a man named Zacchaeus repent of his sins (19:1–10)
2. Jesus tells a parable about a man who entrusted money to his servants (19:11–27)
3. Jesus rides into Jerusalem on a colt (19:28–48)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Sinner”

The Pharisees refer to a group of people as “sinners.” The Jewish leaders thought these people were sinful, but in reality the leaders were also sinful. This can be taken as irony. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### Servants

God expects his people to remember that everything in the world belongs to God. God gives his people things so they can serve him. He wants them to please him by doing what he wants them to do with everything he has given them. One day Jesus will ask his servants what they have done with everything he gave them to use. He will give a reward to those who have done what he wanted them to do, and he will punish those who have not.

### The donkey and the colt

Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that the disciples brought Jesus both a donkey and a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: Matthew 21:1-7 and Mark 11:1-7 and Luke 19:29-36 and John 12:14-15)

### Spreading garments and branches

When kings would enter the cities they ruled, people would cut branches from trees and take off the outer garments that they wore to stay warm in cold weather and spread them all on the road so the king would ride over them. They did this to honor the king and show that they loved him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/honor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])

### The merchants in the temple

Jesus forced the people who were selling animals in the temple to leave. He did this to show everyone that he had authority over the temple and that only those who were righteous, who did what God said was good, could be in it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]]) LUK 19 1 j35m grammar-connect-time-background καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to begin relating a new event by introducing background information that will help readers understand what happens. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) LUK 19 1 m259 translate-names Ἰερειχώ 1 Jericho **Jericho** is the name of a city. See how you translated it in [18:35](../18/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 19 2 m263 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Luke uses the term **behold** to calls the reader’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) diff --git a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv index 2a7a8fb926..55490a04d6 100644 --- a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -JHN front intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Gospel of John

1. Introduction about who Jesus is (1:1-18)
1. Jesus is baptized, and he chooses twelve disciples (1:19-51)
1. Jesus preaches, teaches, and heals people (2-11)
1. The seven days before Jesus’ death (12-19)
- Mary anoints the feet of Jesus (12:1-11)
- Jesus rides a donkey into Jerusalem (12:12-19)
- Some Greek men want to see Jesus (12:20-36)
- The Jewish leaders reject Jesus (12:37-50)
- Jesus teaches his disciples (13-17)
- Jesus is arrested and undergoes trial (18:1-19:15)
- Jesus is crucified and buried (19:16-42)
1. Jesus rises from the dead (20:1-29)
1. John says why he wrote his gospel (20:30-31)
1. Jesus meets with the disciples (21)

### What is the Gospel of John about?

The Gospel of John is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. John said that he wrote his gospel “so that people might believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of the living God” (20:31).

John’s Gospel is very different from the other three Gospels. John does not include some of the teachings and events that the other writers included in their gospels. Also, John wrote about some teachings and events that are not in the other gospels.

John wrote much about the signs Jesus did to prove that what Jesus said about himself was true. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of John” or “The Gospel According to John.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News About Jesus That John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Gospel of John?

This book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the Apostle John was the author.
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Why does John write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?

John wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What do the words “remain,” “reside,” and “abide” mean in the Gospel of John?

John often used the words “remain,” “reside”, and “abide” as metaphors. John spoke of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if Jesus’ word “remained” in the believer. Also, John spoke of someone being spiritually joined to someone else as if the person “remained” in the other person. Christians are said to “remain” in Christ and in God. The Father is said to “remain” in the Son, and the Son is said to “remain” in the Father. The Son is said to “remain” in believers. The Holy Spirit is also said to “remain” in the believers.

Many translators will find it impossible to represent these ideas in their languages in exactly the same way. For example, Jesus intended to express the idea of the Christian being spiritually together with him when he said, “He who eats my flesh and drinks my blood remains in me, and I in him” (John 6:56). The UST uses the idea of “will be joined to me, and I will be joined to him.” But translators may have to find other ways of expressing the idea.

In the passage, “If my words remain in you” (John 15:7), the UST expresses this idea as, “If you live by my message.” Translators may find it possible to use this translation as a model.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Gospel of John?

The following verses found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to translate these verses. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include these verses, the translators can include them. If they are translated, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to John’s Gospel.

* “waiting for the moving of the water. For an angel of the Lord occasionally went down into the pool and stirred the water and whoever went first after the stirring of the water, was made well from the disease they had.” (5:3-4)
* “going through the midst of them, and so passed by” (8:59)

The following passage is included in most older and modern versions of the Bible. But it is not in the earliest copies of the Bible. Translators are advised to translate this passage. It should be put inside of square brackets ([]) to indicate that it may not have been original to John’s Gospel.

* The story of the adulterous woman (7:53–8:11)

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +JHN front intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Gospel of John

1. Introduction about who Jesus is (1:1-18)
1. Jesus is baptized, and he chooses twelve disciples (1:19-51)
1. Jesus preaches, teaches, and heals people (2-11)
1. The seven days before Jesus’ death (12-19)
- Mary anoints the feet of Jesus (12:1-11)
- Jesus rides a donkey into Jerusalem (12:12-19)
- Some Greek men want to see Jesus (12:20-36)
- The Jewish leaders reject Jesus (12:37-50)
- Jesus teaches his disciples (13-17)
- Jesus is arrested and undergoes trial (18:1-19:15)
- Jesus is crucified and buried (19:16-42)
1. Jesus rises from the dead (20:1-29)
1. John says why he wrote his gospel (20:30-31)
1. Jesus meets with the disciples (21)

### What is the Gospel of John about?

The Gospel of John is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. John said that he wrote his gospel “so that people might believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of the living God” (20:31).

John’s Gospel is very different from the other three Gospels. John does not include some of the teachings and events that the other writers included in their gospels. Also, John wrote about some teachings and events that are not in the other gospels.

John wrote much about the signs Jesus did to prove that what Jesus said about himself was true. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of John” or “The Gospel According to John.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News About Jesus That John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Gospel of John?

This book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the Apostle John was the author.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Why does John write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?

John wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What do the words “remain,” “reside,” and “abide” mean in the Gospel of John?

John often used the words “remain,” “reside”, and “abide” as metaphors. John spoke of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if Jesus’ word “remained” in the believer. Also, John spoke of someone being spiritually joined to someone else as if the person “remained” in the other person. Christians are said to “remain” in Christ and in God. The Father is said to “remain” in the Son, and the Son is said to “remain” in the Father. The Son is said to “remain” in believers. The Holy Spirit is also said to “remain” in the believers.

Many translators will find it impossible to represent these ideas in their languages in exactly the same way. For example, Jesus intended to express the idea of the Christian being spiritually together with him when he said, “He who eats my flesh and drinks my blood remains in me, and I in him” (John 6:56). The UST uses the idea of “will be joined to me, and I will be joined to him.” But translators may have to find other ways of expressing the idea.

In the passage, “If my words remain in you” (John 15:7), the UST expresses this idea as, “If you live by my message.” Translators may find it possible to use this translation as a model.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Gospel of John?

The following verses found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to translate these verses. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include these verses, the translators can include them. If they are translated, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to John’s Gospel.
* “waiting for the moving of the water. For an angel of the Lord occasionally went down into the pool and stirred the water and whoever went first after the stirring of the water, was made well from the disease they had.” (5:3-4)
* “going through the midst of them, and so passed by” (8:59)

The following passage is included in most older and modern versions of the Bible. But it is not in the earliest copies of the Bible. Translators are advised to translate this passage. It should be put inside of square brackets ([]) to indicate that it may not have been original to John’s Gospel.
* The story of the adulterous woman (7:53–8:11)

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) JHN 1 intro k29b 0 # John 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:23, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “The Word”

John uses the phrase “the Word” to refer to Jesus ([John 1:1, 14](./01.md)). John is saying that God’s most important message to all people is actually Jesus, a person with a physical body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wordofgod]])

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### “Children of God”

When people believes in Jesus, they go from being “children of wrath” to “children of God.” They are adopted into the “family of God.”They are adopted into the “family of God.” This is an important image that will be unfolded in the New Testament. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

John uses the metaphors of light and darkness and of the Word to tell the reader that he will be writing more about good and evil and about what God wants to tell people through Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “In the beginning”

Some languages and cultures speak of the world as if it has always existed, as if it had no beginning. But “very long ago” is different from “in the beginning,” and you need to be sure that your translation communicates correctly.

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 1:51](../../jhn/01/51.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 1 1 er9g ἐν ἀρχῇ 1 In the beginning This refers to the very earliest time before God created the heavens and the earth. JHN 1 1 z59q ὁ λόγος 1 the Word This refers to Jesus. Translate as “the Word” if possible. If “Word” is feminine in your language, it could be translated as “the one who is called the Word.” @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ JHN 1 47 ys8d figs-litotes ἐν ᾧ δόλος οὐκ ἔστιν 1 in whom is JHN 1 49 l666 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 1 50 p3ma figs-rquestion ὅτι εἶπόν σοι, ὅτι εἶδόν σε ὑποκάτω τῆς συκῆς, πιστεύεις 1 Because I said to you…do you believe? This remark appears in the form of a question to provide emphasis. Alternate translation: “You believe because I said, ‘I saw you underneath the fig tree’! (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 1 51 ga44 ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν 1 Truly, truly Translate this the way your language emphasizes that what follows is important and true. -JHN 2 intro jav2 0 # John 02 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Wine

The Jews drank wine at many meals and especially when they were celebrating special events. They did not believe that it was a sin to drink wine.

### Driving out the money changers

Jesus drove the money changers out of the temple to show that he had authority over the temple and over all of Israel.

### “He knew what was in man”

Jesus knew what other people were thinking only because he was and is the Son of Man and the Son of God.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “His disciples remembered”

John used this phrase to stop telling the main history and to tell about something that happened much later. It was right after he scolded the pigeon sellers ([John 2:16](../../jhn/02/16.md)) that the Jewish authorities spoke to him. It was after Jesus became alive again that his disciples remembered what the prophet had written long before and that Jesus was talking about the temple of his body ([John 2:17](../../jhn/02/17.md) and [John 2:22](../../jhn/02/22.md)). +JHN 2 intro jav2 0 # John 02 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Wine

The Jews drank wine at many meals and especially when they were celebrating special events. They did not believe that it was a sin to drink wine.

### Driving out the money changers

Jesus drove the money changers out of the temple to show that he had authority over the temple and over all of Israel.

### “He knew what was in man”

Jesus knew what other people were thinking only because he was and is the Son of Man and the Son of God.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “His disciples remembered”

John used this phrase to stop telling the main history and to tell about something that happened much later. It was right after he scolded the pigeon sellers ([John 2:16](../../jhn/02/16.md)) that the Jewish authorities spoke to him. It was after Jesus became alive again that his disciples remembered what the prophet had written long before and that Jesus was talking about the temple of his body ([John 2:17](../../jhn/02/17.md) and [John 2:22](../../jhn/02/22.md)). JHN 2 1 rl16 writing-background 0 General Information: Jesus and his disciples are invited to a wedding. These verse give background information about the setting of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 2 1 vw9e τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ τρίτῃ 1 Three days later Most interpreters read this as on the third day after Jesus called Philip and Nathaniel to follow him. The first day occurs in John 1:35 and the second in John 1:43. JHN 2 2 xm3r figs-activepassive ἐκλήθη…ὁ Ἰησοῦς καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸν γάμον 1 Jesus and his disciples were invited to the wedding This can be stated in an active form. Alternate translation: “Someone invited Jesus and his disciples to the wedding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ JHN 2 23 kvn6 ὡς δὲ ἦν ἐν τοῖς Ἱεροσολύμοις 1 Now JHN 2 23 w3qv figs-metonymy ἐπίστευσαν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 believed in his name Here, **name** is a metonym that represents the person of Jesus. Alternate translation: “believed in him” or “trusted in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 2 23 u65n τὰ σημεῖα ἃ ἐποίει 1 the signs that he did Miracles can also be called “signs” because they are used as evidence that God is the all-powerful one who has complete authority over the universe. JHN 2 25 et23 figs-gendernotations περὶ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου…γὰρ ἐγίνωσκεν τί ἦν ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ 1 about man, for he knew what was in man Here the word **man** represents people in general. Alternate translation: “about people, for he knew what was in people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -JHN 3 intro i7a7 0 # John 03 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 3:13](../../jhn/03/13.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +JHN 3 intro i7a7 0 # John 03 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 3:13](../../jhn/03/13.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 3 1 yl6f 0 General Information: Nicodemus comes to see Jesus. JHN 3 1 s9p9 writing-participants δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a new part of the story and to introduce Nicodemus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) JHN 3 2 skq8 οἴδαμεν 1 we know Here, **we** is exclusive, referring only to Nicodemus and the other members of the Jewish council. @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ JHN 4 50 uwa3 figs-metonymy ἐπίστευσεν…τῷ λόγῳ 1 believed t JHN 4 51 a5gw ἤδη 1 While This word is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time. As the official was going home, his servants were coming to meet him on the road. JHN 4 53 jhg4 καὶ ἐπίστευσεν αὐτὸς καὶ ἡ οἰκία αὐτοῦ ὅλη 1 So he himself and his whole household believed The reflexive pronoun **himself** is used here to emphasize the word **he**. If you have a way of doing this in your language, you may consider using it. JHN 4 54 k5x6 σημεῖον 1 sign Miracles can also be called “signs” because they are used as indicators or evidence that God is the all-powerful one who has complete authority over the universe. -JHN 5 intro qe17 0 # John 05 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Healing water

Many of the Jews believed that God would heal people who got into some of the pools in Jerusalem when the waters were “stirred up.”

### Testimony

Testimony is what one person says about another person. What a person says about himself is not as important as what other people say about that person. Jesus told the Jews that God had told them who Jesus was, so he did not need to tell them who he was. This was because God had told the writers of the Old Testament what his Messiah would do, and Jesus had done everything they had written that he would do.

### The resurrection of life and the resurrection of judgment

God will make some people alive again and because he gives them his grace, they will live with him forever. But he will make some people alive again and because he will treat them justly, they will live apart from him forever.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The Son, the Son of God, and the Son of Man

Jesus refers to himself in this chapter as the “Son” ([John 5:19](../../jhn/05/19.md)), the “Son of God” ([John 5:25](../../jhn/05/25.md)), and the “Son of Man” ([John 5:27](../../jhn/05/27.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +JHN 5 intro qe17 0 # John 05 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Healing water

Many of the Jews believed that God would heal people who got into some of the pools in Jerusalem when the waters were “stirred up.”

### Testimony

Testimony is what one person says about another person. What a person says about himself is not as important as what other people say about that person. Jesus told the Jews that God had told them who Jesus was, so he did not need to tell them who he was. This was because God had told the writers of the Old Testament what his Messiah would do, and Jesus had done everything they had written that he would do.

### The resurrection of life and the resurrection of judgment

God will make some people alive again and because he gives them his grace, they will live with him forever. But he will make some people alive again and because he will treat them justly, they will live apart from him forever.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The Son, the Son of God, and the Son of Man

Jesus refers to himself in this chapter as the “Son” ([John 5:19](../../jhn/05/19.md)), the “Son of God” ([John 5:25](../../jhn/05/25.md)), and the “Son of Man” ([John 5:27](../../jhn/05/27.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 5 1 urn9 writing-background 0 General Information: This is the next event in the story, in which Jesus goes up to Jerusalem and heals a man. These verses give background information about the setting of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 5 1 ea65 μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After this This refers to after Jesus healed the official’s son. See how you translated this in [John 3:22](../03/22.md). JHN 5 1 b1pz ἦν ἑορτὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 there was a Jewish festival “the Jews were celebrating a festival” @@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ JHN 5 45 kk5q figs-metonymy ἔστιν ὁ κατηγορῶν ὑμῶν Μω JHN 5 45 pf98 ἠλπίκατε 1 your hope “your confidence” or “your trust” JHN 5 47 b8dd figs-rquestion εἰ…τοῖς ἐκείνου γράμμασιν οὐ πιστεύετε, πῶς τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν πιστεύσετε 1 If you do not believe his writings, how are you going to believe my words? This remark appears in the form of a question to provide emphasis. Alternate translation: “You do not believe his writings, so you will never believe my words!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 5 47 x7h9 τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν 1 my words “what I say” -JHN 6 intro xe4t 0 # John 06 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### King

The king of any nation was the richest and most powerful person in that nation. The people wanted Jesus to be their king because he gave them food and so they thought he would make the Jews into the richest and most powerful nation in the world. They did not understand that Jesus came to die so God could forgive his people’s sins and that the world would persecute his people.

## Important metaphors in this chapter

### Bread

Bread was the most common and important food in Jesus’ day, and so the word “bread” was their general word for “food.” It is often difficult to translate the word “bread” into the languages of people who do not eat bread because the general word for food in some languages refers to food that did not exist in Jesus’ culture. Jesus used the word “bread” to refer to himself. He wanted them to understand that they need him so they can have eternal life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])

### Eating the flesh and drinking the blood

When Jesus said, “Unless you eat the flesh of the Son of Man and drink his blood, you will not have life in yourselves,” he knew that before he died he would tell his followers to do this by eating bread and drinking wine. In the event this chapter describes, he expected that his hearers would understand that he was using a metaphor but would not understand what the metaphor referred to. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Parenthetical Ideas
Several times in this passage, John explains something or gives the reader some context to better understand the story. These explanation are intended to give the reader some additional knowledge without interrupting the flow of the narrative. The information is placed inside parentheses.

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 6;26](./26.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +JHN 6 intro xe4t 0 # John 06 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### King

The king of any nation was the richest and most powerful person in that nation. The people wanted Jesus to be their king because he gave them food and so they thought he would make the Jews into the richest and most powerful nation in the world. They did not understand that Jesus came to die so God could forgive his people’s sins and that the world would persecute his people.

## Important metaphors in this chapter

### Bread

Bread was the most common and important food in Jesus’ day, and so the word “bread” was their general word for “food.” It is often difficult to translate the word “bread” into the languages of people who do not eat bread because the general word for food in some languages refers to food that did not exist in Jesus’ culture. Jesus used the word “bread” to refer to himself. He wanted them to understand that they need him so they can have eternal life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])

### Eating the flesh and drinking the blood

When Jesus said, “Unless you eat the flesh of the Son of Man and drink his blood, you will not have life in yourselves,” he knew that before he died he would tell his followers to do this by eating bread and drinking wine. In the event this chapter describes, he expected that his hearers would understand that he was using a metaphor but would not understand what the metaphor referred to. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Parenthetical Ideas

Several times in this passage, John explains something or gives the reader some context to better understand the story. These explanation are intended to give the reader some additional knowledge without interrupting the flow of the narrative. The information is placed inside parentheses.

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 6;26](./26.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 6 1 qhj7 writing-background 0 General Information: Jesus has traveled from Jerusalem to Galilee. A crowd has followed him up a mountainside. These verses tell the setting of this part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 6 1 el4l μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things The phrase **these things** refers to the events in [John 5:1-46](../05/01.md) and introduces the event that follows. JHN 6 1 z345 figs-explicit ἀπῆλθεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 Jesus went away It is implied in the text that Jesus traveled by boat and took his disciples with him. Alternate translation: “Jesus traveled by boat with his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ JHN 6 67 bg2f figs-ellipsis τοῖς δώδεκα 1 the twelve This is an ellip JHN 6 68 g9l4 figs-rquestion Κύριε, πρὸς τίνα ἀπελευσόμεθα 1 Lord, to whom shall we go? Simon Peter gives this remark in the form of a question to emphasize that he desires to follow only Jesus. Alternate translation: “Lord, we could never follow anyone but you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 6 70 z9yc writing-background 0 General Information: Verse 71 is not part of the main story line as John comments on what Jesus said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 6 70 m9ys figs-rquestion οὐκ ἐγὼ ὑμᾶς τοὺς δώδεκα ἐξελεξάμην, καὶ ἐξ ὑμῶν εἷς διάβολός ἐστιν 1 Did not I choose you, the twelve, and one of you is a devil? Jesus gives this remark in the form of a question to draw attention to the fact that one of the disciples will betray him. Alternate translation: “I chose you all myself, yet one of you is a servant of Satan!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 7 intro l712 0 # John 07 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This whole chapter concerns the concept of believing Jesus to be the Messiah. Some people believed this to be true while others rejected it. Some were willing to recognize his power and even the possibility that he was a prophet, but most were unwilling to believe that he was the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

Translators may wish to include a note at verse 53 to explain to the reader why they have chosen or chosen not to translate verses 7:53-8:11.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “My time has not yet come”
This phrase and “his hour had not yet come” are used in this chapter to indicate that Jesus is in control of the events unfolding in his life.

### “Living water”
This is an important image used in the New Testament. It is a metaphor. Because this metaphor is given in a desert environment, it probably emphasizes that Jesus is able to give life sustaining nourishment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Prophecy
Jesus gives a prophecy about his life without an explicit statement in John [John 7:33-34](./33.md).

### Irony
Nicodemus explains to the other Pharisees that the Law requires him to hear directly from a person before making a judgment about them. The Pharisees in turn made a judgment about Jesus without speaking to Jesus.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Did not believe in him”
Jesus’ brothers did not believe Jesus was the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### “The Jews”
This term is used in two different ways in this passage. It is used specifically in reference to the opposition of the Jewish leaders who were trying to kill him ([John 7:1](../../jhn/07/01.md)). It is also used in reference to the people of Judea in general who had a positive opinion of Jesus ([John 7:13](../../jhn/07/13.md)). The translator may wish to use the terms “Jewish leaders” and “Jewish people” or “Jews (leaders)” and “Jews (in general).” +JHN 7 intro l712 0 # John 07 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This whole chapter concerns the concept of believing Jesus to be the Messiah. Some people believed this to be true while others rejected it. Some were willing to recognize his power and even the possibility that he was a prophet, but most were unwilling to believe that he was the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

Translators may wish to include a note at verse 53 to explain to the reader why they have chosen or chosen not to translate verses 7:53-8:11.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “My time has not yet come”

This phrase and “his hour had not yet come” are used in this chapter to indicate that Jesus is in control of the events unfolding in his life.

### “Living water”

This is an important image used in the New Testament. It is a metaphor. Because this metaphor is given in a desert environment, it probably emphasizes that Jesus is able to give life sustaining nourishment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Prophecy

Jesus gives a prophecy about his life without an explicit statement in John [John 7:33-34](./33.md).

### Irony

Nicodemus explains to the other Pharisees that the Law requires him to hear directly from a person before making a judgment about them. The Pharisees in turn made a judgment about Jesus without speaking to Jesus.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Did not believe in him”

Jesus’ brothers did not believe Jesus was the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### “The Jews”

This term is used in two different ways in this passage. It is used specifically in reference to the opposition of the Jewish leaders who were trying to kill him ([John 7:1](../../jhn/07/01.md)). It is also used in reference to the people of Judea in general who had a positive opinion of Jesus ([John 7:13](../../jhn/07/13.md)). The translator may wish to use the terms “Jewish leaders” and “Jewish people” or “Jews (leaders)” and “Jews (in general).” JHN 7 1 gg4v writing-background 0 General Information: Jesus is in Galilee speaking to his brothers. These verses tell about when this event occurred. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 7 1 b99m μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things These words tell the reader that the writer will begin talking about a new event. “After he finished speaking with the disciples” ([John 6:66-71](../06/66.md)) or “Some time later” JHN 7 1 k5yv περιεπάτει 1 traveled The reader should understand that Jesus probably walked rather than riding an animal or in a vehicle. @@ -646,7 +646,7 @@ JHN 8 57 r1ek figs-rquestion πεντήκοντα ἔτη οὔπω ἔχεις, JHN 8 58 rnw4 ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν 1 Truly, truly See how you translated this in [John 1:51](../01/51.md). JHN 8 58 k4tp ἐγὼ εἰμί 1 I AM Possible meanings are (1) Jesus is identifying himself as Yahweh, who identified himself to Moses as “I AM,” or (2) Jesus is saying, “before Abraham existed, I existed.” JHN 8 59 bxs5 figs-explicit ἦραν οὖν λίθους, ἵνα βάλωσιν ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 Then they picked up stones to throw at him The Jewish leaders are outraged at what Jesus has said. Here it is implied that they wanted to kill him because he had made himself equal to God. Alternate translation: “Then they picked up stones to kill him because he claimed to be equal with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 9 intro hq31 0 # John 09 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Who sinned?”

Many of the Jews of Jesus’ time believed that if a person was blind or deaf or crippled, it was because he or his parents or someone in his family had sinned. This was not the teaching of the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### “He does not keep the Sabbath”

The Pharisees thought that Jesus was working, and so breaking the Sabbath, by making mud. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

## Important metaphors in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Seeing and being blind

Jesus calls the Pharisees blind because they see that Jesus is able to heal blind people but they still do not believe that God sent him ([John 9:39-40](./39.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 9:35](../../jhn/09/35.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +JHN 9 intro hq31 0 # John 09 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Who sinned?”

Many of the Jews of Jesus’ time believed that if a person was blind or deaf or crippled, it was because he or his parents or someone in his family had sinned. This was not the teaching of the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### “He does not keep the Sabbath”

The Pharisees thought that Jesus was working, and so breaking the Sabbath, by making mud. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

## Important metaphors in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Seeing and being blind

Jesus calls the Pharisees blind because they see that Jesus is able to heal blind people but they still do not believe that God sent him ([John 9:39-40](./39.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 9:35](../../jhn/09/35.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 9 1 fa5a 0 General Information: As Jesus and his disciples are walking along, they come across a blind man. JHN 9 1 un4h writing-newevent καὶ 1 Now This word shows that the author is about to describe a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) JHN 9 1 z5sx figs-synecdoche παράγων 1 as Jesus passed by Here, **Jesus** is a synecdoche for Jesus and the disciples. Alternate translation: “as Jesus and his disciples passed by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ JHN 9 39 te5y figs-metaphor ἵνα οἱ μὴ βλέποντες, βλέπωσ JHN 9 40 d8mm μὴ καὶ ἡμεῖς τυφλοί ἐσμεν 1 Are we also blind? “Do you think we are spiritually blind?” JHN 9 41 rh3l figs-metaphor εἰ τυφλοὶ ἦτε, οὐκ ἂν εἴχετε ἁμαρτίαν 1 If you were blind, you would have no sin Here, **blindness** is a metaphor for not knowing God’s truth. Alternate translation: “If you wanted to know God’s truth, you would be able to receive your sight. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 9 41 jmq7 figs-metaphor νῦν δὲ λέγετε, ὅτι βλέπομεν, ἡ ἁμαρτία ὑμῶν μένει 1 but now you say, ‘We see,’ so your sin remains Here, **seeing** is a metaphor for knowing God’s truth. Alternate translation: “Since you falsely think that you already know God’s truth, you will remain blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 10 intro e8mb 0 # John 10 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Blasphemy

When a person claims that he is God or that God has told him to speak when God has not told him to speak, this is called blasphemy. The law of Moses commanded the Israelites to kill blasphemers by stoning them to death. When Jesus said, “I and the Father are one,” the Jews thought he was blaspheming, so they took up stones to kill him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Important metaphors in this chapter

### Sheep

Jesus spoke of people as sheep because sheep do not see well, they do not think well, they often walk away from those who care for them, and they cannot defend themselves when other animals attack them. God’s people also rebel against him and do not know when they are doing wrong.

### Sheep pen

A sheep pen was a space with a stone wall around it in which shepherds would keep their sheep. Once they were inside the sheep pen, the sheep could not run away, and animals and thieves could not easily get inside to kill or steal them.

### Laying down and taking up life

Jesus speaks of his life as if it were a physical object that he could lay down on the ground, a metaphor for dying, or pick up again, a metaphor for becoming alive again. +JHN 10 intro e8mb 0 # John 10 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Blasphemy

When a person claims that he is God or that God has told him to speak when God has not told him to speak, this is called blasphemy. The law of Moses commanded the Israelites to kill blasphemers by stoning them to death. When Jesus said, “I and the Father are one,” the Jews thought he was blaspheming, so they took up stones to kill him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Important metaphors in this chapter

### Sheep

Jesus spoke of people as sheep because sheep do not see well, they do not think well, they often walk away from those who care for them, and they cannot defend themselves when other animals attack them. God’s people also rebel against him and do not know when they are doing wrong.

### Sheep pen

A sheep pen was a space with a stone wall around it in which shepherds would keep their sheep. Once they were inside the sheep pen, the sheep could not run away, and animals and thieves could not easily get inside to kill or steal them.

### Laying down and taking up life

Jesus speaks of his life as if it were a physical object that he could lay down on the ground, a metaphor for dying, or pick up again, a metaphor for becoming alive again. JHN 10 1 gzd8 figs-parables 0 General Information: Jesus begins to speak in parables. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) JHN 10 1 ab9x 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues to speak to the Pharisees. This is the same part of the story which began in [John 9:35](../09/35.md). JHN 10 1 i3tj ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν 1 Truly, truly See how you translated this in [John 1:51](../01/51.md). @@ -788,7 +788,7 @@ JHN 10 40 f5dx figs-explicit ἔμεινεν ἐκεῖ 1 he stayed there Jesus JHN 10 41 m1pl Ἰωάννης μὲν σημεῖον ἐποίησεν οὐδέν; πάντα δὲ ὅσα εἶπεν Ἰωάννης περὶ τούτου ἀληθῆ ἦν 1 John indeed did no signs, but all the things that John has said about this man are true “It is true that John did no signs, but he certainly did speak the truth about this man, who does signs.” JHN 10 41 lw9n σημεῖον 1 signs These are miracles that prove that something is true or that give someone credibility. JHN 10 42 ieh5 ἐπίστευσαν εἰς 1 believed in Here, **believed in** means accepted or trusted what Jesus said was true. -JHN 11 intro tks5 0 # John 11 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Passover

After Jesus made Lazarus become alive again, the Jewish leaders were trying hard to kill him, so he started traveling from place to place in secret. Now the Pharisees knew that he would probably come to Jerusalem for the Passover because God had commanded all Jewish men to celebrate the Passover in Jerusalem, so they planned to catch him and kill him then. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### “One man dies for the people”

The law of Moses commanded the priests to kill animals so that God would forgive the people’s sins. The high priest Caiaphas said, “It is better for you that one man dies for the people than that the whole nation perishes” ([John 10:50](../../jhn/10/50.md)). He said this because he loved his “place” and “nation” ([John 10:48](../../jhn/10/48.md)) more than he loved the God who had made Lazarus become alive again. He wanted Jesus to die so that the Romans would not destroy the temple and Jerusalem, but God wanted Jesus to die so that he could forgive all of his people’s sins.

### Hypothetical situation

When Martha said, “If you had been here, my brother would not have died,” she was speaking of a situation that could have happened but did not happen. Jesus had not come, and her brother had died. +JHN 11 intro tks5 0 # John 11 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Passover

After Jesus made Lazarus become alive again, the Jewish leaders were trying hard to kill him, so he started traveling from place to place in secret. Now the Pharisees knew that he would probably come to Jerusalem for the Passover because God had commanded all Jewish men to celebrate the Passover in Jerusalem, so they planned to catch him and kill him then. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### “One man dies for the people”

The law of Moses commanded the priests to kill animals so that God would forgive the people’s sins. The high priest Caiaphas said, “It is better for you that one man dies for the people than that the whole nation perishes” ([John 10:50](../../jhn/10/50.md)). He said this because he loved his “place” and “nation” ([John 10:48](../../jhn/10/48.md)) more than he loved the God who had made Lazarus become alive again. He wanted Jesus to die so that the Romans would not destroy the temple and Jerusalem, but God wanted Jesus to die so that he could forgive all of his people’s sins.

### Hypothetical situation

When Martha said, “If you had been here, my brother would not have died,” she was speaking of a situation that could have happened but did not happen. Jesus had not come, and her brother had died. JHN 11 1 fsf7 writing-participants 0 General Information: These verses introduce the story of Lazarus and give background information about him and his sister Mary. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 11 2 c6r9 writing-background ἦν δὲ Μαρία ἡ ἀλείψασα τὸν Κύριον μύρῳ, καὶ ἐκμάξασα τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ ταῖς θριξὶν αὐτῆς 1 It was Mary who anointed the Lord…her hair As John introduces Mary, the sister of Martha, he also shares information concerning what would later happen in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 11 3 i2ar ἀπέστειλαν…πρὸς αὐτὸν 1 sent for Jesus “asked Jesus to come” @@ -1016,7 +1016,7 @@ JHN 13 35 kyd9 figs-hyperbole πάντες 1 everyone You may need to make expli JHN 13 37 ye6m τὴν ψυχήν μου…θήσω 1 lay down my life “give up my life” or “die” JHN 13 38 qp88 figs-rquestion τὴν ψυχήν σου ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ θήσεις 1 Will you lay down your life for me? This remark appears in the form of a question to add emphasis to Jesus’ statement. Alternate translation: “You say that you will die for me, but the truth is that you will not!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 13 38 sp7p οὐ μὴ ἀλέκτωρ φωνήσῃ, ἕως οὗ ἀρνήσῃ με τρίς 1 the rooster will not crow before you have denied me three times “you will say that you do not know me three times before the rooster crows” -JHN 14 intro kv6m 0 # John 14 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### “My Father’s house”

Jesus used these words to speak of heaven, where God lives, not of the temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])

### The Holy Spirit

Jesus told his disciples that he would send the Holy Spirit to them. The Holy Spirit is the Comforter ([John 14:16](../../jhn/14/16.md)) who is always with God’s people to help them and to speak to God for them, He is also the Spirit of truth ([John 14:17](../../jhn/14/17.md)) who tells God’s people what is true about God so they know him better and serve him well. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]]) +JHN 14 intro kv6m 0 # John 14 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “My Father’s house”

Jesus used these words to speak of heaven, where God lives, not of the temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])

### The Holy Spirit

Jesus told his disciples that he would send the Holy Spirit to them. The Holy Spirit is the Comforter ([John 14:16](../../jhn/14/16.md)) who is always with God’s people to help them and to speak to God for them, He is also the Spirit of truth ([John 14:17](../../jhn/14/17.md)) who tells God’s people what is true about God so they know him better and serve him well. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]]) JHN 14 1 a2xv 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus reclines at the table with his disciples and continues to speak to them. JHN 14 1 w3dn figs-metonymy μὴ ταρασσέσθω ὑμῶν ἡ καρδία 1 Do not let your heart be troubled Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s inner being. Alternate translation: “Stop being so anxious and worried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 14 2 cp9z ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ τοῦ Πατρός μου, μοναὶ πολλαί εἰσιν 1 In my Father’s house are many rooms “There are many places to live in my Father’s house” @@ -1135,7 +1135,7 @@ JHN 15 26 tpw6 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρός 1 Father This is an im JHN 15 26 tzi9 figs-explicit τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας 1 the Spirit of truth This is a title for the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Spirit who tells the truth about God and me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 15 27 r47f figs-explicit καὶ ὑμεῖς…μαρτυρεῖτε 1 You are also testifying Here, **testifying** means to tell others about Jesus. Alternate translation: “You also must tell everyone what you know about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 15 27 ew2v figs-metonymy ἀρχῆς 1 the beginning Here the **beginning** is a metonym that means the first days of Jesus’ ministry. Alternate translation: “from the very first days when I began teaching the people and doing miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 16 intro wb8v 0 # John 16 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Holy Spirit

Jesus told his disciples that he would send the Holy Spirit to them. The Holy Spirit is the Comforter ([John 14:16](../../jhn/14/16.md)) who is always with God’s people to help them and to speak to God for them, He is also the Spirit of truth ([John 14:17](../../jhn/14/17.md)) who tells God’s people what is true about God so they know him better and serve him well. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

### “The hour is coming”

Jesus used these words to begin prophecies about times that could be shorter or longer than sixty minutes. “The hour” in which people would persecute his followers ([John 16:2](../../jhn/16/02.md)) was days, weeks, and years long, but “the hour” in which his disciples would scatter and leave him alone ([John 16:32](../../jhn/16/32.md)) was less than sixty minutes long. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Simile

Jesus said that just as a woman is in pain as she gives birth to a baby and his followers would be sad when he died. But the woman is glad after the baby is born, and his followers would be happy when he became alive again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +JHN 16 intro wb8v 0 # John 16 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Holy Spirit

Jesus told his disciples that he would send the Holy Spirit to them. The Holy Spirit is the Comforter ([John 14:16](../../jhn/14/16.md)) who is always with God’s people to help them and to speak to God for them, He is also the Spirit of truth ([John 14:17](../../jhn/14/17.md)) who tells God’s people what is true about God so they know him better and serve him well. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

### “The hour is coming”

Jesus used these words to begin prophecies about times that could be shorter or longer than sixty minutes. “The hour” in which people would persecute his followers ([John 16:2](../../jhn/16/02.md)) was days, weeks, and years long, but “the hour” in which his disciples would scatter and leave him alone ([John 16:32](../../jhn/16/32.md)) was less than sixty minutes long. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Simile

Jesus said that just as a woman is in pain as she gives birth to a baby and his followers would be sad when he died. But the woman is glad after the baby is born, and his followers would be happy when he became alive again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) JHN 16 1 pbc8 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus reclines at the table with his disciples and continues to speak to them. JHN 16 1 vui6 figs-explicit μὴ σκανδαλισθῆτε 1 you will not fall away Here the phrase **fall away** implies to stop putting one’s trust in Jesus. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “you will not stop trusting in me because of the difficulties you must face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 16 2 i79b ἔρχεται ὥρα, ἵνα πᾶς ὁ ἀποκτείνας ὑμᾶς, δόξῃ λατρείαν προσφέρειν τῷ Θεῷ 1 the hour is coming when everyone who kills you will think that he is offering a service to God “it will someday happen that a person will kill you and think he is doing something good for God.” @@ -1395,7 +1395,7 @@ JHN 19 41 fb25 writing-background ἦν δὲ ἐν τῷ τόπῳ ὅπου JHN 19 41 uib1 figs-activepassive ἦν δὲ ἐν τῷ τόπῳ ὅπου ἐσταυρώθη κῆπος 1 Now in the place where he was crucified there was a garden You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Now in the place where they crucified Jesus there was a garden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 19 41 qd1a figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ οὐδέπω οὐδεὶς ἦν τεθειμένος 1 in which no person had yet been buried You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “in which people had buried no one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 19 42 nr4r figs-explicit διὰ τὴν παρασκευὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Because it was the day of preparation for the Jews According to Jewish law, no one could work after sundown on Friday. It was the beginning of the Sabbath and Passover. Alternate translation: “The Passover was about to begin that evening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 20 intro nm1y 0 # John 20 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([John 20:1](../../jhn/20/01.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

### “Receive the Holy Spirit”

If your language uses the same word for “breath” and “spirit,” be sure that the reader understands that Jesus was performing a symbolic action by breathing, and that what the disciples received was the Holy Spirit, not Jesus’ breath. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Rabboni

John used Greek letters to describe the sound of the word, and then he explained that it means “Teacher.” You should do the same, using the letters of your language.

### Jesus’ resurrection body

No one is sure what Jesus’ body looked like after he became alive again. His disciples knew it was Jesus because they could see his face and touch the places where the soldiers had put the nails through his hands and feet, But he could also walk through solid walls and doors. It is best not to try to say more than what the ULT says.

### Two angels in white

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels were in human form. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md)) +JHN 20 intro nm1y 0 # John 20 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([John 20:1](../../jhn/20/01.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

### “Receive the Holy Spirit”

If your language uses the same word for “breath” and “spirit,” be sure that the reader understands that Jesus was performing a symbolic action by breathing, and that what the disciples received was the Holy Spirit, not Jesus’ breath. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Rabboni

John used Greek letters to describe the sound of the word, and then he explained that it means “Teacher.” You should do the same, using the letters of your language.

### Jesus’ resurrection body

No one is sure what Jesus’ body looked like after he became alive again. His disciples knew it was Jesus because they could see his face and touch the places where the soldiers had put the nails through his hands and feet, But he could also walk through solid walls and doors. It is best not to try to say more than what the ULT says.

### Two angels in white

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels were in human form. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md)) JHN 20 1 k5pq 0 General Information: This is the third day after Jesus was buried. JHN 20 1 a8vl μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων 1 first day of the week “Sunday” JHN 20 1 bdw5 figs-activepassive βλέπει τὸν λίθον ἠρμένον 1 she saw the stone rolled away You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “she saw that someone had rolled away the stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1456,7 +1456,7 @@ JHN 20 31 am9l figs-activepassive ταῦτα δὲ γέγραπται 1 but the JHN 20 31 p5k4 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 20 31 uem2 figs-metonymy ζωὴν…ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 life in his name Here, **life** is a metonym that means Jesus gives life. Alternate translation: “you may have life because of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 20 31 ip1i ζωὴν 1 life This refers to spiritual life. -JHN 21 intro e1bg 0 # John 21 General Notes
## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### The metaphor of sheep

Before Jesus died, he spoke of himself taking care of his people as if he were a good shepherd taking care of sheep ([John 10:11](../../jhn/10/11.md)). After he became alive again, he told Peter that Peter would be the one who took care of Jesus’ sheep. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 21 intro e1bg 0 # John 21 General Notes

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### The metaphor of sheep

Before Jesus died, he spoke of himself taking care of his people as if he were a good shepherd taking care of sheep ([John 10:11](../../jhn/10/11.md)). After he became alive again, he told Peter that Peter would be the one who took care of Jesus’ sheep. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 21 1 et5h writing-background 0 General Information: Jesus shows himself again to the disciples at the Sea of Tiberias. Verses 2 and 3 tell us what happens in the story before Jesus appears. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 21 1 yj6k μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things “Some time later” JHN 21 2 b421 figs-activepassive ὁμοῦ…Θωμᾶς ὁ λεγόμενος Δίδυμος 1 with Thomas called Didymus You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “with Thomas whom we called Didymus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) diff --git a/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv b/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv index 3712eaf48f..d49f9aebcb 100644 --- a/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv +++ b/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -ROM front intro gtn1 0 # Introduction to Romans

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Romans

1. Introduction (1:1-15)
1. Righteousness by faith in Jesus Christ (1:16-17)
1. All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18-3:20)
1. Righteousness through Jesus Christ by faith in him (3:21-4:25)
1. The fruits of the Spirit (5:1-11)
1. Adam and Christ compared (5:12-21)
1. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1-8:39)
1. God’s plan for Israel (9:1-11:36)
1. Practical advice for living as Christians (12:1-15:13)
1. Conclusion and greetings (15:14-16:27)

### Who wrote the Book of Romans?

The Apostle Paul wrote the Book of Romans. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul probably wrote this letter while he was staying in the city of Corinth during his third trip through the Roman Empire.

### What is the Book of Romans about?

Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Rome. Paul wanted to get them ready to receive him when he visited them. He said his purpose was to “bring about the obedience of faith” (16:26).

In this letter Paul most fully described the gospel of Jesus Christ. He explained that both Jews and non-Jews have sinned, and God will forgive them and declare them righteous only if they believe in Jesus (chapters 1-11). Then he gave them practical advice for how believers should live (chapters 12-16),

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Romans.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Rome,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Rome.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What are the titles used to refer to Jesus?

In Romans, Paul described Jesus Christ by many titles and descriptions: Jesus Christ (1:1), the Seed of David (1:3), the Son of God (1:4), the Lord Jesus Christ (1:7), Christ Jesus (3:24), Propitiation (3:25), Jesus (3:26), Jesus our Lord (4:24), Lord of Hosts (9:29), a Stumbling Stone and Rock of Offence (9:33), the End of the Law (10:4), the Deliverer (11:26), Lord of the Dead and the Living (14:9), and the Root of Jesse (15:12).

### How should theological terms in Romans be translated?

Paul uses many theological terms that are not used in the four gospels. As early Christians learned more about the meaning of Jesus Christ and his message, they needed words and expressions for new ideas. Some examples of these words are “justification” (5:1), “works of the law” (3:20), “reconcile” (5:10), “propitiation” (3:25), “sanctification” (6:19), and “the old man” (6:6).

The “key terms” dictionary can help translators understand many of these terms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

Terms such as those given above are difficult to explain. It is often hard or impossible for translators to find equivalent terms in their own languages. It can help to know that word equivalents of these terms are not necessary. Instead, translators can develop short expressions to communicate these ideas. For example, the term “gospel” can be translated as “the good news about Jesus Christ.”

Translators should also remember that some of these terms have more than one meaning. The meaning will depend on how the author is using the word in that particular passage. For example, “righteousness” sometimes means that a person obeys God’s law. At other times, “righteousness” means that Jesus Christ has perfectly obeyed God’s law for us.

### What did Paul mean by “a remnant” of Israel (11:5)?

The idea of a “remnant” is important both in the Old Testament and for Paul. Most of the Israelites were either killed or scattered among other people when the Assyrians and then the Babylonians conquered their land. Only a relatively few Jews survived. They were known as “the remnant.”

In 11:1-9, Paul speaks of another remnant. This remnant is the Jews whom God saved because they believed in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/remnant]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by being “in Christ”?

The phrase “in Christ” and similar phrases occur in 3:24; 6:11, 23; 8:1,2,39; 9:1; 12:5,17; 15:17; and 16:3,7,9,10. Paul used these kinds of phrases as a metaphor to express that Christian believers belong to Jesus Christ. Belonging to Christ means the believer is saved and is made a friend with God. The believer is also promised to live with God forever. However, this idea can be difficult to represent in many languages.

These phrases also have specific meanings that depend on how Paul used them in a particular passage. For example, in 3:24 (“the redemption that is in Christ Jesus”), Paul referred to our being redeemed “because” of Jesus Christ. In 8:9 (“you are not in the flesh but in the Spirit”), Paul spoke of believers submitting “to” the Holy Spirit. In 9:1 (“I tell the truth in Christ”), Paul meant that he is telling the truth that “is in agreement with” Jesus Christ.

Nevertheless, the basic idea of our being united with Jesus Christ (and with the Holy Spirit) is seen in these passages as well. Therefore, the translator has a choice in many passages that use “in.” He will often decide to represent the more immediate sense of “in,” such as, “by means of,” “in the manner of,” or “in regard to.” But, if possible, the translator should choose a word or phrase that reprents the immediate sense and the sense of “in union with.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inchrist]])

### How are the ideas of “holy,” “saints” or “holy ones,” and “sanctify” represented in Romans in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless and faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones” or “holy people.” (See: 1:7)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In cases where some other English versions have “saints” or “holy ones,” the ULT uses “believers.” (See: 8:27; 12:13; 15:25, 26, 31; 16:2, 15)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “consecrated,” or “reserved for.” (See: 15:16)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Romans?

For the following verses, modern version of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT includes the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote.

* “he [God] works all things together for good” (8:28). Some older versions read, “All things work together for good.”
* “But if it is by grace, it is no longer by works. Otherwise grace would no longer be grace” (11:6). Some older versions read: “But if it is by works, then is it no more grace: otherwise work is no more work.”

The following verse is not in the best ancient copies of the Bible. Translators are advised not to include this verse. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have this verse, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Romans.

* “May the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be with you all. Amen” (16:24).

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -ROM 1 intro hn5n 0 # Romans 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The first verse is a type of introduction. People in the ancient Mediterranean region often started their letters this way. Sometimes this is called a “salutation.”

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The gospel
This chapter refers to the contents of the Book of Romans as “the gospel” ([Romans 1:2](../../rom/01/02.md)). Romans is not a gospel like Matthew, Mark, Luke and John. Instead, chapters 1-8 present the biblical gospel: All have sinned. Jesus died for our sins. He was raised again that we might have new life in him.

### Fruit
This chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person’s faith producing good works in their life. In this chapter, it refers to the results of Paul’s work among the Roman Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Universal Condemnation and the Wrath of God
This chapter explains that everyone is without excuse. We all know about the true God, Yahweh, from his creation all around us. Because of our sin and our sinful nature, every person justly deserves the wrath of God. This wrath was satisfied by Jesus dying on a cross for those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### “God gave them over”
Many scholars view the phrases “God gave them over” and “God gave them up” as theologically significant. For this reason, it is important to translate these phrases with God playing a passive role in the action. God simply allows men to pursue their own desires, he does not force them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Difficult phrases and concepts

This chapter has many difficult ideas in it. How Paul writes makes many of the phrases in this chapter difficult to translate. The translator may need to use the UST to understand the meaning of the phrases. And it may be necessary to more freely translate these phrases. Some of the difficult phrases include: “obedience of faith,” “whom I serve in my spirit,” “from faith to faith” and “exchanged the glory of the imperishable God for the likenesses of an image of perishable man.” +ROM front intro gtn1 0 # Introduction to Romans

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Romans

1. Introduction (1:1-15)
1. Righteousness by faith in Jesus Christ (1:16-17)
1. All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18-3:20)
1. Righteousness through Jesus Christ by faith in him (3:21-4:25)
1. The fruits of the Spirit (5:1-11)
1. Adam and Christ compared (5:12-21)
1. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1-8:39)
1. God’s plan for Israel (9:1-11:36)
1. Practical advice for living as Christians (12:1-15:13)
1. Conclusion and greetings (15:14-16:27)

### Who wrote the Book of Romans?

The Apostle Paul wrote the Book of Romans. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul probably wrote this letter while he was staying in the city of Corinth during his third trip through the Roman Empire.

### What is the Book of Romans about?

Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Rome. Paul wanted to get them ready to receive him when he visited them. He said his purpose was to “bring about the obedience of faith” (16:26).

In this letter Paul most fully described the gospel of Jesus Christ. He explained that both Jews and non-Jews have sinned, and God will forgive them and declare them righteous only if they believe in Jesus (chapters 1-11). Then he gave them practical advice for how believers should live (chapters 12-16),

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Romans.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Rome,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Rome.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What are the titles used to refer to Jesus?

In Romans, Paul described Jesus Christ by many titles and descriptions: Jesus Christ (1:1), the Seed of David (1:3), the Son of God (1:4), the Lord Jesus Christ (1:7), Christ Jesus (3:24), Propitiation (3:25), Jesus (3:26), Jesus our Lord (4:24), Lord of Hosts (9:29), a Stumbling Stone and Rock of Offence (9:33), the End of the Law (10:4), the Deliverer (11:26), Lord of the Dead and the Living (14:9), and the Root of Jesse (15:12).

### How should theological terms in Romans be translated?

Paul uses many theological terms that are not used in the four gospels. As early Christians learned more about the meaning of Jesus Christ and his message, they needed words and expressions for new ideas. Some examples of these words are “justification” (5:1), “works of the law” (3:20), “reconcile” (5:10), “propitiation” (3:25), “sanctification” (6:19), and “the old man” (6:6).

The “key terms” dictionary can help translators understand many of these terms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

Terms such as those given above are difficult to explain. It is often hard or impossible for translators to find equivalent terms in their own languages. It can help to know that word equivalents of these terms are not necessary. Instead, translators can develop short expressions to communicate these ideas. For example, the term “gospel” can be translated as “the good news about Jesus Christ.”

Translators should also remember that some of these terms have more than one meaning. The meaning will depend on how the author is using the word in that particular passage. For example, “righteousness” sometimes means that a person obeys God’s law. At other times, “righteousness” means that Jesus Christ has perfectly obeyed God’s law for us.

### What did Paul mean by “a remnant” of Israel (11:5)?

The idea of a “remnant” is important both in the Old Testament and for Paul. Most of the Israelites were either killed or scattered among other people when the Assyrians and then the Babylonians conquered their land. Only a relatively few Jews survived. They were known as “the remnant.”

In 11:1-9, Paul speaks of another remnant. This remnant is the Jews whom God saved because they believed in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/remnant]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by being “in Christ”?

The phrase “in Christ” and similar phrases occur in 3:24; 6:11, 23; 8:1,2,39; 9:1; 12:5,17; 15:17; and 16:3,7,9,10. Paul used these kinds of phrases as a metaphor to express that Christian believers belong to Jesus Christ. Belonging to Christ means the believer is saved and is made a friend with God. The believer is also promised to live with God forever. However, this idea can be difficult to represent in many languages.

These phrases also have specific meanings that depend on how Paul used them in a particular passage. For example, in 3:24 (“the redemption that is in Christ Jesus”), Paul referred to our being redeemed “because” of Jesus Christ. In 8:9 (“you are not in the flesh but in the Spirit”), Paul spoke of believers submitting “to” the Holy Spirit. In 9:1 (“I tell the truth in Christ”), Paul meant that he is telling the truth that “is in agreement with” Jesus Christ.

Nevertheless, the basic idea of our being united with Jesus Christ (and with the Holy Spirit) is seen in these passages as well. Therefore, the translator has a choice in many passages that use “in.” He will often decide to represent the more immediate sense of “in,” such as, “by means of,” “in the manner of,” or “in regard to.” But, if possible, the translator should choose a word or phrase that reprents the immediate sense and the sense of “in union with.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inchrist]])

### How are the ideas of “holy,” “saints” or “holy ones,” and “sanctify” represented in Romans in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless and faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones” or “holy people.” (See: 1:7)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In cases where some other English versions have “saints” or “holy ones,” the ULT uses “believers.” (See: 8:27; 12:13; 15:25, 26, 31; 16:2, 15)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “consecrated,” or “reserved for.” (See: 15:16)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Romans?

For the following verses, modern version of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT includes the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote.
* “he [God] works all things together for good” (8:28). Some older versions read, “All things work together for good.”
* “But if it is by grace, it is no longer by works. Otherwise grace would no longer be grace” (11:6). Some older versions read: “But if it is by works, then is it no more grace: otherwise work is no more work.”

The following verse is not in the best ancient copies of the Bible. Translators are advised not to include this verse. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have this verse, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Romans.
* “May the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be with you all. Amen” (16:24).

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +ROM 1 intro hn5n 0 # Romans 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The first verse is a type of introduction. People in the ancient Mediterranean region often started their letters this way. Sometimes this is called a “salutation.”

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The gospel

This chapter refers to the contents of the Book of Romans as “the gospel” ([Romans 1:2](../../rom/01/02.md)). Romans is not a gospel like Matthew, Mark, Luke and John. Instead, chapters 1-8 present the biblical gospel: All have sinned. Jesus died for our sins. He was raised again that we might have new life in him.

### Fruit

This chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person’s faith producing good works in their life. In this chapter, it refers to the results of Paul’s work among the Roman Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Universal Condemnation and the Wrath of God

This chapter explains that everyone is without excuse. We all know about the true God, Yahweh, from his creation all around us. Because of our sin and our sinful nature, every person justly deserves the wrath of God. This wrath was satisfied by Jesus dying on a cross for those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### “God gave them over”

Many scholars view the phrases “God gave them over” and “God gave them up” as theologically significant. For this reason, it is important to translate these phrases with God playing a passive role in the action. God simply allows men to pursue their own desires, he does not force them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Difficult phrases and concepts

This chapter has many difficult ideas in it. How Paul writes makes many of the phrases in this chapter difficult to translate. The translator may need to use the UST to understand the meaning of the phrases. And it may be necessary to more freely translate these phrases. Some of the difficult phrases include: “obedience of faith,” “whom I serve in my spirit,” “from faith to faith” and “exchanged the glory of the imperishable God for the likenesses of an image of perishable man.” ROM 1 1 x3em figs-explicit Παῦλος 1 Paul Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. You may also need to tell in this same verse who the people are to whom Paul wrote the letter ([Romans 1:7](./07.md)). Alternate translation: “I, Paul, wrote this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 1 1 v5b9 figs-activepassive κλητὸς ἀπόστολος, ἀφωρισμένος εἰς εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ 1 called to be an apostle and set apart for the gospel of God You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God called me to be an apostle and chose me to tell people about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 1 1 sg88 κλητὸς 1 called This means that God has appointed or chosen people to be his children, to be his servants and proclaimers of his message of salvation through Jesus. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ ROM 1 32 ytu6 figs-explicit ὅτι οἱ τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντ ROM 1 32 z12q ἄξιοι θανάτου εἰσίν 1 are deserving of death “deserve to die” ROM 1 32 ama2 αὐτὰ 1 these things “these kinds of evil things” ROM 1 32 iqg1 figs-explicit τοῖς πράσσουσιν 1 who do them Here the verb **do** refers to continuing to do things that are evil. Alternate translation: “who keep on doing evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 2 intro dse2 0 # Romans 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter shifts its audience from Roman Christians to those who “judge” other people and do not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### “Therefore you are without excuse”
This phrase looks back at Chapter 1. In some ways, it actually concludes what Chapter 1 teaches. This phrase explains why everyone in the world must worship the true God.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Doers of the Law”
Those who try to obey the law will not be justified by trying to obey it. Those who are justified by believing in Jesus show that their faith is real by obeying God’s commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions
Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Hypothetical Situation
In context, “he will give eternal life” in verse 7 is a hypothetical statement. If a person could live a perfect life, they would earn eternal life as a reward. But only Jesus was able to live a perfect life.

Paul gives another hypothetical situation in verses 17-29. Here he explains that even those who earnestly try to obey the law of Moses are guilty of violating the law. In English, this is about those who follow the “letter” of the law but cannot follow the “spirit” or general principles of the law. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “You who judge”
At times, this could be translated in a simpler way. But it is translated in this relatively awkward way because when Paul refers to “people who judge” he is also saying that everyone judges. It is possible to translate this as “those who judge (and everyone judges).” +ROM 2 intro dse2 0 # Romans 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter shifts its audience from Roman Christians to those who “judge” other people and do not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### “Therefore you are without excuse”

This phrase looks back at Chapter 1. In some ways, it actually concludes what Chapter 1 teaches. This phrase explains why everyone in the world must worship the true God.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Doers of the Law”

Those who try to obey the law will not be justified by trying to obey it. Those who are justified by believing in Jesus show that their faith is real by obeying God’s commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Hypothetical Situation

In context, “he will give eternal life” in verse 7 is a hypothetical statement. If a person could live a perfect life, they would earn eternal life as a reward. But only Jesus was able to live a perfect life.

Paul gives another hypothetical situation in verses 17-29. Here he explains that even those who earnestly try to obey the law of Moses are guilty of violating the law. In English, this is about those who follow the “letter” of the law but cannot follow the “spirit” or general principles of the law. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “You who judge”

At times, this could be translated in a simpler way. But it is translated in this relatively awkward way because when Paul refers to “people who judge” he is also saying that everyone judges. It is possible to translate this as “those who judge (and everyone judges).” ROM 2 1 y6ts 0 Connecting Statement: Paul has affirmed all men are sinners and continues to remind them that all people are wicked. ROM 2 1 d7pj figs-explicit διὸ ἀναπολόγητος εἶ 1 Therefore you are without excuse The word **therefore** marks a new section of the letter. It also makes a concluding statement based on what Paul has said in [Romans 1:1-32](../01/01.md). Alternate translation: “Since God will punish those who continually sin, he will certainly not excuse your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 2 1 x3mi figs-apostrophe εἶ 1 you are Paul is writing here as if he were addressing a Jewish person who is arguing with him. Paul is doing this to teach his audience that God will punish everyone who continually sins, whether Jew or Gentile. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ ROM 2 29 v149 ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ 1 inwardly This refers to the values an ROM 2 29 dk8q figs-metonymy καρδίας 1 of the heart Here, **heart** is a metonym for the inner person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 2 29 dd3p figs-synecdoche ἐν Πνεύματι, οὐ γράμματι 1 in the Spirit, not in the letter Here, **letter** is a synecdoche that refers to written Scripture. Alternate translation: “through the work of the Holy Spirit, not because you know the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ROM 2 29 qa6b ἐν Πνεύματι 1 in the Spirit This refers to the internal, spiritual part of a person that “God’s Spirit” changes . -ROM 3 intro y2kb 0 # Romans 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 4 and 10-18 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

Chapter 3 answers the question, “What advantage does being a Jew have over being a Gentile?” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### “For all have sinned and come short of the glory of God”
Because God is holy, anyone with him in heaven must be perfect. Any sin at all will condemn a person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]])

### The purpose of the law of Moses
Obeying the law cannot make a person right with God. Obeying God’s law is a way a person shows they believe in God. People have always been justified only by faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions
Paul frequently uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]]) +ROM 3 intro y2kb 0 # Romans 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 4 and 10-18 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

Chapter 3 answers the question, “What advantage does being a Jew have over being a Gentile?” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### “For all have sinned and come short of the glory of God”
Because God is holy, anyone with him in heaven must be perfect. Any sin at all will condemn a person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]])

### The purpose of the law of Moses

Obeying the law cannot make a person right with God. Obeying God’s law is a way a person shows they believe in God. People have always been justified only by faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul frequently uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]]) ROM 3 1 v788 0 Connecting Statement: Paul proclaims the advantage that Jews have because God gave them his law. ROM 3 1 gcd6 figs-explicit τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς 1 Then what advantage does the Jew have? And what is the benefit of circumcision? Paul presents ideas that people might have after they hear what he wrote in chapter 2. He does this in order to respond to them in verse 2. Alternate translation: “Some people might say, ‘Then what advantage does the Jew have? And what is the benefit of circumcision?’” or “Some people might say, ‘If that is true, then the Jews do not have any advantage, and there is no benefit in being circumcised.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 3 2 rri9 figs-explicit πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον 1 It is great in every way Paul now responds to the concerns brought up in verse 1. Here, **It** refers to being a member of the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “But there is great advantage to being a Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ ROM 3 31 wb6r figs-rquestion νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν διὰ ROM 3 31 jdq1 figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 May it never be This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question. You may have a similar express in your language that you could use here. Alternate translation: “This is certainly not true” or “Certainly not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 3 31 y6qx νόμον ἱστάνομεν 1 we uphold the law “we obey the law” ROM 3 31 nzr7 figs-exclusive καταργοῦμεν 1 we uphold This pronoun refers to Paul, other believers, and the readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ROM 4 intro f9jc 0 # Romans 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 7-8 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The purpose of the law of Moses
Paul builds upon material from chapter 3. He explains how Abraham, the father of Israel, was justified. Even Abraham could not be justified by what he did. Obeying the law of Moses does not make a person right with God. Obeying God’s commands is a way a person shows they believe in God. People have always been justified only by faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Circumcision
Circumcision was important to the Israelites. It identified a person as a descendant of Abraham. It was also a sign of the covenant between Abraham and Yahweh. However, no person was justified only by being circumcised. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) +ROM 4 intro f9jc 0 # Romans 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 7-8 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The purpose of the law of Moses

Paul builds upon material from chapter 3. He explains how Abraham, the father of Israel, was justified. Even Abraham could not be justified by what he did. Obeying the law of Moses does not make a person right with God. Obeying God’s commands is a way a person shows they believe in God. People have always been justified only by faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Circumcision

Circumcision was important to the Israelites. It identified a person as a descendant of Abraham. It was also a sign of the covenant between Abraham and Yahweh. However, no person was justified only by being circumcised. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) ROM 4 1 gw29 0 Connecting Statement: Paul confirms that even in the past believers were made right with God by faith and not by the law. ROM 4 1 gwp3 figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν, εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα 1 What then will we say that Abraham, our forefather according to the flesh, found? Paul uses the question to catch the attention of the reader and to start talking about something new. Alternate translation: “This is what Abraham our physical ancestor found” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 4 3 w9i5 figs-rquestion τί γὰρ ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει 1 For what does the scripture say Paul uses this question to add emphasis. He speaks of the Scriptures as if they were alive and could talk. Alternate translation: “For we can read in the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ ROM 4 24 pfc9 figs-exclusive δι’ ἡμᾶς 1 for us The word **us** refers ROM 4 24 nh4k figs-activepassive καὶ δι’ ἡμᾶς, οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι, τοῖς πιστεύουσιν 1 also for us, for whom it will be counted, we who believe You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “It was also for our benefit, because God will consider us righteous also if we believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 4 24 a6c7 figs-idiom τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 him who raised Jesus our Lord from the dead **Raised…from the dead** here is an idiom for “caused to live again.” Alternate translation: “him who caused Jesus our Lord to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ROM 4 25 cca1 figs-activepassive ὃς παρεδόθη διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν, καὶ ἠγέρθη διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν 1 who was delivered up for our trespasses and was raised for our justification You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God gave over to enemies for our trespasses and whom God brought back to life so he could make us right with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ROM 5 intro i1dt 0 # Romans 05 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Many scholars view verses 12-17 as some of the most important, but difficult, verses in Scripture to understand. Some of their richness and meaning has likely been lost while being translated from how the original Greek was constructed.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Results of justification
How Paul explains the results of our being justified is an important part of this chapter. These results include having peace with God, having access to God, being confident about our future, being able to rejoice when suffering, being eternally saved, and being reconciled with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]])

### “All sinned”
Scholars are divided over what Paul meant in verse 12: “And death spread to all people, because all sinned.” Some believe that all of mankind was present in the “seed of Adam.” So, as Adam is the father of all mankind, all of mankind was present when Adam sinned. Others believe that Adam served as a representative head for mankind. So when he sinned, all of mankind “fell” as a result. Whether people today played an active or passive role in Adam’s original sin is one way these views differ. Other passages will help one decide. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/seed]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### The second Adam
Adam was the first man and the first “son” of God. He was created by God. He brought sin and death into the world by eating the forbidden fruit. Paul describes Jesus as the “second Adam” in this chapter and the true son of God. He brings life and overcame sin and death by dying on the cross. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]]) +ROM 5 intro i1dt 0 # Romans 05 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Many scholars view verses 12-17 as some of the most important, but difficult, verses in Scripture to understand. Some of their richness and meaning has likely been lost while being translated from how the original Greek was constructed.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Results of justification

How Paul explains the results of our being justified is an important part of this chapter. These results include having peace with God, having access to God, being confident about our future, being able to rejoice when suffering, being eternally saved, and being reconciled with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]])

### “All sinned”

Scholars are divided over what Paul meant in verse 12: “And death spread to all people, because all sinned.” Some believe that all of mankind was present in the “seed of Adam.” So, as Adam is the father of all mankind, all of mankind was present when Adam sinned. Others believe that Adam served as a representative head for mankind. So when he sinned, all of mankind “fell” as a result. Whether people today played an active or passive role in Adam’s original sin is one way these views differ. Other passages will help one decide. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/seed]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### The second Adam

Adam was the first man and the first “son” of God. He was created by God. He brought sin and death into the world by eating the forbidden fruit. Paul describes Jesus as the “second Adam” in this chapter and the true son of God. He brings life and overcame sin and death by dying on the cross. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]]) ROM 5 1 xmp3 0 Connecting Statement: Paul begins to tell many different things that happen when God makes believers right with him. ROM 5 1 age4 δικαιωθέντες οὖν 1 Since we are justified “Because we are justified” ROM 5 1 s6xd figs-exclusive …ἡμῶν 1 we…our All occurrences of “we” and “our” refer to all believers and should be inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ ROM 5 21 wmy8 figs-personification ὥσπερ ἐβασίλευσεν ἡ ἁμ ROM 5 21 w4ut figs-personification οὕτως καὶ ἡ χάρις βασιλεύσῃ διὰ δικαιοσύνης, εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 even so grace might rule through righteousness for everlasting life through Jesus Christ our Lord Paul speaks of **grace** here as if it were a king that ruled. Alternate translation: “grace gave people everlasting life through the righteousness of Jesus Christ our Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 5 21 m5by figs-personification οὕτως…ἡ χάρις βασιλεύσῃ διὰ δικαιοσύνης 1 so grace might rule through righteousness Paul speaks of **grace** here as if it were a king that ruled. The word **righteousness** refers to God’s ability to make people right with him. Alternate translation: “so God might give his free gift to people to make them right with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 5 21 ew1b figs-exclusive τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 our Lord Paul includes himself, his readers, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ROM 6 intro v522 0 # Romans 06 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul begins this chapter by answering how someone might hypothetically object to what he taught in Chapter 5. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Against the Law
In this chapter, Paul refutes the teaching that Christians can live however they want after they are saved. Scholars call this “antinomianism” or being “against the law.” To motivate godly living, Paul recalls the great price Jesus paid for a Christian to be saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

### Servants of sin
Before believing in Jesus, sin enslaves people. God frees Christians from serving sin. They are able to choose to serve Christ in their lives. Paul explains that when Christians choose to sin, they willingly choose to sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Fruit
This chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person’s faith producing good works in their life. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Death
Paul uses “death” many different ways in this chapter: physical death, spiritual death, sin reigning in the heart of man, and to end something. He contrasts sin and death with the new life provided by Christ and the new way Christians are supposed to live after they are saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]]) +ROM 6 intro v522 0 # Romans 06 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul begins this chapter by answering how someone might hypothetically object to what he taught in Chapter 5. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Against the Law

In this chapter, Paul refutes the teaching that Christians can live however they want after they are saved. Scholars call this “antinomianism” or being “against the law.” To motivate godly living, Paul recalls the great price Jesus paid for a Christian to be saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

### Servants of sin
Before believing in Jesus, sin enslaves people. God frees Christians from serving sin. They are able to choose to serve Christ in their lives. Paul explains that when Christians choose to sin, they willingly choose to sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Fruit

This chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person’s faith producing good works in their life. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Death

Paul uses “death” many different ways in this chapter: physical death, spiritual death, sin reigning in the heart of man, and to end something. He contrasts sin and death with the new life provided by Christ and the new way Christians are supposed to live after they are saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]]) ROM 6 1 x13n 0 Connecting Statement: Under grace, Paul tells those who believe in Jesus to live a new life as though dead to sin and alive to God. ROM 6 1 pvg3 figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ 1 What then will we say? Should we continue in sin so that grace may abound? Paul asks these rhetorical questions to get the attention of his readers. Alternate translation: “So, what should we say about all of this? We certainly should not keep on sinning so that God will give us more and more grace! (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 6 1 fj9e figs-exclusive ἐροῦμεν 1 we say The pronoun “we” refers to Paul, his readers, and other people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ ROM 6 22 npf3 figs-metaphor ἔχετε τὸν καρπὸν ὑμῶν εἰς ROM 6 22 a478 τὸ δὲ τέλος ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 The result is eternal life “The result of all of this is that you will live forever with God” ROM 6 23 ze3f τὰ γὰρ ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος 1 For the wages of sin are death The word **wages** refers to a payment given to someone for their work. “For if you serve sin, you will receive spiritual death as payment” or “For if you continue sinning, God will punish you with spiritual death” ROM 6 23 pf3s τὸ δὲ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ ζωὴ αἰώνιος ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, τῷ Κυρίῳ ἡμῶν 1 but the gift of God is eternal life in Christ Jesus our Lord “but God gives eternal life to those who belong to Christ Jesus our Lord” -ROM 7 intro fl1y 0 # Romans 07 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

### “Or do you not know”
Paul uses this phrase to discuss a new topic, while connecting what follows with the previous teaching.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “We have been released from the law”
Paul explains that the law of Moses is no longer in effect. While this is true, the timeless principles behind the law reflect the character of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Marriage
Scripture commonly uses marriage as a metaphor. Here Paul uses it to describe how the church relates to the law of Moses and now to Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh
This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) +ROM 7 intro fl1y 0 # Romans 07 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

### “Or do you not know”

Paul uses this phrase to discuss a new topic, while connecting what follows with the previous teaching.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “We have been released from the law”

Paul explains that the law of Moses is no longer in effect. While this is true, the timeless principles behind the law reflect the character of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Marriage

Scripture commonly uses marriage as a metaphor. Here Paul uses it to describe how the church relates to the law of Moses and now to Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) ROM 7 1 nj1k 0 Connecting Statement: Paul explains how the law controls those who want to live under the law. ROM 7 1 mk7w figs-rquestion ἢ ἀγνοεῖτε, ἀδελφοί (γινώσκουσιν γὰρ νόμον λαλῶ), ὅτι ὁ νόμος κυριεύει τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ζῇ? 1 do you not know, brothers…that the law controls a person for as long as he lives? Paul asks this question to add emphasis. Alternate translation: “So you certainly know that people have to obey laws only while they are alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 7 1 r9fl ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women. @@ -505,7 +505,7 @@ ROM 7 24 nu6u με ῥύσεται 1 deliver me “rescue me” ROM 7 24 md8e figs-metaphor τοῦ σώματος τοῦ θανάτου τούτου 1 this body of death This is a metaphor that means a body that will experience physical death. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 7 25 w9ui χάρις τῷ Θεῷ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 But thanks be to God through Jesus Christ our Lord This is the answer to the question in 7:24. ROM 7 25 adx1 figs-metaphor ἄρα οὖν αὐτὸς ἐγὼ, τῷ μὲν νοῒ δουλεύω νόμῳ Θεοῦ; τῇ δὲ σαρκὶ, νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας 1 So then, I myself serve the law of God with my mind. However, with the flesh I serve the principle of sin The mind and flesh are used here to show how they compare to serve either God’s law or the principle of sin. With the mind or intellect one can choose to please and obey God and with the flesh or physical nature to serve sin. Alternate translation: “My mind chooses to please God, but my flesh chooses to obey sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ROM 8 intro ev4r 0 # Romans 08 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The first verse of this chapter is a transitional sentence. Paul concludes his teaching of Chapter 7 and leads into the words of Chapter 8.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 36. Paul quotes these words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Indwelling of the Spirit
The Holy Spirit is said to live inside a person or inside their heart. If the Spirit is present, this signifies that a person is saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### “These are sons of God”
Jesus is the Son of God in a unique way. God also adopts Christians to be his children. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])

### Predestination
Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” This is related to the biblical concept of “predestine.” Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some to be eternally saved. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter, especially with regards to elements of causation. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor
Paul poetically presents his teaching in verses 38 and 39 in the form of an extended metaphor. He explains that nothing can separate a person from the love of God in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### No condemnation
This phrase must be translated carefully to avoid doctrinal confusion. People are still guilty of their sin. God disapproves of acting sinfully, even after believing in Jesus. God still punishes the sins of believers, but Jesus has paid the punishment for their sin. This is what Paul expresses here. The word “condemn” has several possible meanings. Here Paul emphasizes that people who believe in Jesus are no longer punished eternally for their sin by being “condemned to hell.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]])

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]]) +ROM 8 intro ev4r 0 # Romans 08 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The first verse of this chapter is a transitional sentence. Paul concludes his teaching of Chapter 7 and leads into the words of Chapter 8.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 36. Paul quotes these words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Indwelling of the Spirit

The Holy Spirit is said to live inside a person or inside their heart. If the Spirit is present, this signifies that a person is saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### “These are sons of God”

Jesus is the Son of God in a unique way. God also adopts Christians to be his children. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])

### Predestination

Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” This is related to the biblical concept of “predestine.” Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some to be eternally saved. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter, especially with regards to elements of causation. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor
Paul poetically presents his teaching in verses 38 and 39 in the form of an extended metaphor. He explains that nothing can separate a person from the love of God in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### No condemnation

This phrase must be translated carefully to avoid doctrinal confusion. People are still guilty of their sin. God disapproves of acting sinfully, even after believing in Jesus. God still punishes the sins of believers, but Jesus has paid the punishment for their sin. This is what Paul expresses here. The word “condemn” has several possible meanings. Here Paul emphasizes that people who believe in Jesus are no longer punished eternally for their sin by being “condemned to hell.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]])

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]]) ROM 8 1 xq2y 0 Connecting Statement: Paul gives the answer to the struggle he has with sin and good. ROM 8 1 xw65 figs-explicit οὐδὲν ἄρα νῦν κατάκριμα τοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 There is therefore now no condemnation for those who are in Christ Jesus Here, **condemnation** refers to punishing people. Alternate translation: “God will not condemn and punish those who are joined to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 8 1 i12t ἄρα 1 therefore “for that reason” or “because what I have just told you is true” @@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ ROM 8 37 wcm6 figs-explicit διὰ τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς 1 ROM 8 38 fch1 πέπεισμαι 1 I have been convinced “I am convinced” or “I am confident” ROM 8 38 js9q ἀρχαὶ 1 governments Possible meanings are (1) demons or (2) human kings and rulers. ROM 8 38 q7ti οὔτε δυνάμεις 1 nor powers Possible meanings are (1) spiritual beings with power or (2) human beings with power. -ROM 9 intro w6f4 0 # Romans 09 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul changes what he is teaching about. In Chapters 9-11, he focuses on the nation of Israel.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 25-29 and 33 of this chapter. Paul quotes all of these words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Flesh
Paul uses the word “flesh” in this chapter only to refer to Israelites, people physically descending from Abraham through Jacob, who God named Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

In other chapters, Paul uses the word “brother” to mean fellow Christians. However, in this chapter, he uses “my brothers” to mean his kinsmen the Israelites.

Paul refers to those who believe in Jesus as “children of God” and “children of the promise.”

### Predestination
Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches extensively on a subject known as “predestination.” This is related to the biblical concept of “predestine.” Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to eternally save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Stone of stumbling
Paul explains that while some Gentiles accepted Jesus as their savior by believing in him, most Jews were trying to earn their salvation and so rejected Jesus. Paul, quoting the Old Testament, describes Jesus as a stone that the Jews stumble over when walking. This “stone of stumbling” causes them to “fall.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “It is not everyone in Israel who truly belongs to Israel”
Paul uses the word “Israel” in this verse with two different meanings. The first “Israel” means the physical descendants of Abraham through Jacob. The second “Israel” means those who are God’s people through faith. The UST reflects this. +ROM 9 intro w6f4 0 # Romans 09 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul changes what he is teaching about. In Chapters 9-11, he focuses on the nation of Israel.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 25-29 and 33 of this chapter. Paul quotes all of these words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Flesh

Paul uses the word “flesh” in this chapter only to refer to Israelites, people physically descending from Abraham through Jacob, who God named Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

In other chapters, Paul uses the word “brother” to mean fellow Christians. However, in this chapter, he uses “my brothers” to mean his kinsmen the Israelites.

Paul refers to those who believe in Jesus as “children of God” and “children of the promise.”

### Predestination

Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches extensively on a subject known as “predestination.” This is related to the biblical concept of “predestine.” Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to eternally save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Stone of stumbling

Paul explains that while some Gentiles accepted Jesus as their savior by believing in him, most Jews were trying to earn their salvation and so rejected Jesus. Paul, quoting the Old Testament, describes Jesus as a stone that the Jews stumble over when walking. This “stone of stumbling” causes them to “fall.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “It is not everyone in Israel who truly belongs to Israel”

Paul uses the word “Israel” in this verse with two different meanings. The first “Israel” means the physical descendants of Abraham through Jacob. The second “Israel” means those who are God’s people through faith. The UST reflects this. ROM 9 1 b89f 0 Connecting Statement: Paul tells of his personal desire that the people of the nation of Israel will be saved. Then he emphasizes the different ways in which God has prepared them to believe. ROM 9 1 yg93 figs-doublet ἀλήθειαν λέγω ἐν Χριστῷ, οὐ ψεύδομαι 1 I tell the truth in Christ. I do not lie These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that he is telling the truth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ROM 9 1 h9mp συνμαρτυρούσης μοι τῆς συνειδήσεώς μου ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 my conscience bears witness with me in the Holy Spirit “the Holy Spirit controls my conscience and confirms what I say” @@ -681,7 +681,7 @@ ROM 9 33 kx9c figs-explicit καθὼς γέγραπται 1 as it has been writ ROM 9 33 dy6x figs-metonymy ἐν Σιὼν 1 in Zion Here, **Zion** is a metonym that represents Israel. Alternate translation: “in Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 9 33 u3dj figs-doublet λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου 1 stone of stumbling and a rock of offense Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing and are metaphors that refer to Jesus and his death on the cross. It was as if the people stumbled over a stone because they were disgusted when they considered Jesus’ death on the cross. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 9 33 tu4i πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ 1 believes in it Because the stone stands for a person, you may need to translate “believes in him.” -ROM 10 intro c2li 0 # Romans 10 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 8.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 18-20 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### God’s righteousness

Paul teaches here that while many Jews earnestly tried to be righteous, they did not succeed. We cannot earn God’s righteousness. God gives us Jesus’ righteousness when we believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He does this to convince his readers that God does not save only the Hebrew people, so Christians must be ready to go and share the gospel with the whole world. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “I will provoke you to jealousy by what is not a nation”

Paul uses this prophecy to explain that God will use the church to make the Hebrew people jealous. This is so they will seek God and believe the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/jealous]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ROM 10 intro c2li 0 # Romans 10 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 8.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 18-20 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### God’s righteousness

Paul teaches here that while many Jews earnestly tried to be righteous, they did not succeed. We cannot earn God’s righteousness. God gives us Jesus’ righteousness when we believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He does this to convince his readers that God does not save only the Hebrew people, so Christians must be ready to go and share the gospel with the whole world. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “I will provoke you to jealousy by what is not a nation”

Paul uses this prophecy to explain that God will use the church to make the Hebrew people jealous. This is so they will seek God and believe the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/jealous]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 10 1 pi37 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues stating his desire for Israel to believe but emphasizes that both those who are Jews as well as everyone else can only be saved by faith in Jesus. ROM 10 1 hj4b ἀδελφοί 1 Brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women. ROM 10 1 tq7k figs-metonymy ἡ μὲν εὐδοκία τῆς ἐμῆς καρδίας 1 my heart’s desire Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s emotions or inner being. Alternate translation: “my greatest desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ ROM 10 20 t78j ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην 1 I appeared “I made myself ROM 10 20 k8pp λέγει 1 he says “He” refers to God, who is speaking through Isaiah. ROM 10 21 hw4w ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν 1 All the day long This phrase is used to emphasize God’s continual effort. “continually” ROM 10 21 il8s ἐξεπέτασα τὰς χεῖράς μου πρὸς λαὸν ἀπειθοῦντα καὶ ἀντιλέγοντα 1 I reached out my hands to a disobedient and stubborn people “I tried to welcome you and to help you, but you refused my help and continued to disobey” -ROM 11 intro e9qz 0 # Romans 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-10, 26-27, and 34-35, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Grafting
Paul uses the image of “grafting” to refer to the place of the Gentiles and Jews in the plans of God. Making one plant to be permanently part of another plant is called “grafting.” Paul uses the picture of God grafting the Gentiles as a wild branch into his saving plans. But God has not forgotten about the Jews, who are spoken of as the natural plant. God will also save Jews who believe in Jesus.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Did God reject his people? May it never be”

Whether Israel (the physical descendants of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob) has a future in the plans of God, or if they have been replaced in the plans of God by the church, is a major theological issue in Chapters 9-11. This phrase is an important part of this section of Romans. It seems to indicate that Israel remains distinct from the church. Not all scholars arrive at this conclusion. Despite their currently rejecting Jesus as their Messiah, Israel has not exhausted the grace and mercy of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/mercy]]) +ROM 11 intro e9qz 0 # Romans 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-10, 26-27, and 34-35, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Grafting

Paul uses the image of “grafting” to refer to the place of the Gentiles and Jews in the plans of God. Making one plant to be permanently part of another plant is called “grafting.” Paul uses the picture of God grafting the Gentiles as a wild branch into his saving plans. But God has not forgotten about the Jews, who are spoken of as the natural plant. God will also save Jews who believe in Jesus.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Did God reject his people? May it never be”

Whether Israel (the physical descendants of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob) has a future in the plans of God, or if they have been replaced in the plans of God by the church, is a major theological issue in Chapters 9-11. This phrase is an important part of this section of Romans. It seems to indicate that Israel remains distinct from the church. Not all scholars arrive at this conclusion. Despite their currently rejecting Jesus as their Messiah, Israel has not exhausted the grace and mercy of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/mercy]]) ROM 11 1 p2h9 0 Connecting Statement: Though Israel as a nation has rejected God, God wants them to understand salvation comes by grace without works. ROM 11 1 wp35 λέγω οὖν 1 I say then “I, Paul, say then” ROM 11 1 p4zd figs-rquestion μὴ ἀπώσατο ὁ Θεὸς τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ 1 did God reject his people? Paul asks this question so that he can answer the questions of other Jews who are upset that God has included the Gentiles among his people, while the hearts of the Jewish people have been hardened. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -839,7 +839,7 @@ ROM 11 34 yy52 figs-metonymy νοῦν Κυρίου 1 the mind of the Lord Here, ROM 11 35 j5cn figs-rquestion ἢ τίς προέδωκεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀνταποδοθήσεται αὐτῷ 1 Or who has first given anything to God, that God must repay him?” Paul uses this question to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: “No one has ever given anything to God that he did not first receive from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 11 36 abc1 writing-pronouns ἐξ αὐτοῦ, καὶ δι’ αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἰς αὐτὸν, τὰ πάντα. αὐτῷ 1 For from him…through him…to him Here, all occurrences of “him” refers to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ROM 11 36 rpx6 figs-explicit αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας 1 To him be the glory forever This expresses Paul’s desire for all people to honor God. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “May all people honor him forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 12 intro aky9 0 # Romans 12 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 20, which are from the Old Testament.

Many scholars believe Paul uses the word **therefore** in [Romans 12:1](../../rom/12/01.md) to refer back to all of Chapters 1-11. Having carefully explained the Christian gospel, Paul now explains how Christians should live in light of these great truths. Chapters 12-16 focus on living out one’s Christian faith. Paul uses many different commands in these chapters to give these practical instructions. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Christian living
Under the law of Moses, people were required to offer temple sacrifices of animals or grain. Now Christians are required to live their lives as a type of sacrifice to God. Physical sacrifices are no longer required. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Body of Christ
The body of Christ is an important metaphor or image used in Scripture to refer to the church. Each church member plays a unique and important function. Christians need each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/body]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ROM 12 intro aky9 0 # Romans 12 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 20, which are from the Old Testament.

Many scholars believe Paul uses the word **therefore** in [Romans 12:1](../../rom/12/01.md) to refer back to all of Chapters 1-11. Having carefully explained the Christian gospel, Paul now explains how Christians should live in light of these great truths. Chapters 12-16 focus on living out one’s Christian faith. Paul uses many different commands in these chapters to give these practical instructions. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Christian living

Under the law of Moses, people were required to offer temple sacrifices of animals or grain. Now Christians are required to live their lives as a type of sacrifice to God. Physical sacrifices are no longer required. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Body of Christ

The body of Christ is an important metaphor or image used in Scripture to refer to the church. Each church member plays a unique and important function. Christians need each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/body]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 12 1 rhs3 0 Connecting Statement: Paul tells what the life of a believer should be and how believers should serve. ROM 12 1 d2y3 figs-explicit παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, διὰ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 I urge you therefore, brothers, by the mercies of God Here, **brothers** refers to fellow believers, both male and female. Alternate translation: “Fellow believers, because of the great mercy that God has given you I very much want you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 12 1 w1mz figs-synecdoche παραστῆσαι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν θυσίαν ζῶσαν 1 to present your bodies a living sacrifice Here Paul uses the word **bodies** to refer to the whole person. Paul is comparing a believer in Christ who completely obeys God to the animals that the Jews killed and then offered to God. Alternate translation: “to offer yourselves completely to God while you are alive as if you were a dead sacrifice on a temple altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -887,7 +887,7 @@ ROM 12 20 e49j ψώμιζε αὐτόν 1 feed him “give him some food” ROM 12 20 wce6 figs-metaphor ἄνθρακας πυρὸς σωρεύσεις ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ 1 You will heap coals of fire on his head Paul speaks of the blessings that the enemies will receive as if someone were pouring hot coals on their heads. Possible meanings are (1) “make the person who harmed you feel badly about how he has mistreated you” or (2) “give God a reason to judge your enemy more harshly.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 12 21 q761 figs-personification μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, ἀλλὰ νίκα ἐν τῷ ἀγαθῷ τὸ κακόν 1 Do not be overcome by evil, but overcome evil with good Paul describes “evil” as though it were a person. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Do not let those who are evil defeat you, but defeat those who are evil by doing what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 12 21 p7fd figs-you μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, ἀλλὰ νίκα…τὸ κακόν 1 Do not be overcome by evil, but overcome evil These verbs are addressed as to one person and so are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -ROM 13 intro l4q7 0 # Romans 13 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In the first part of this chapter, Paul teaches Christians to obey rulers who govern them. At that time, ungodly Roman rulers governed the land. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Ungodly rulers
When Paul teaches about obeying rulers, some readers will find this difficult to understand, especially in places where rulers persecute the church. Christians must obey their rulers as well as obey God, unless the rulers do not allow Christians to do something God explicitly commands them to do. There are times when a believer must submit to these rulers and suffer at their hands. Christians understand that this world is temporary and they will ultimately be with God forever. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) +ROM 13 intro l4q7 0 # Romans 13 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In the first part of this chapter, Paul teaches Christians to obey rulers who govern them. At that time, ungodly Roman rulers governed the land. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Ungodly rulers

When Paul teaches about obeying rulers, some readers will find this difficult to understand, especially in places where rulers persecute the church. Christians must obey their rulers as well as obey God, unless the rulers do not allow Christians to do something God explicitly commands them to do. There are times when a believer must submit to these rulers and suffer at their hands. Christians understand that this world is temporary and they will ultimately be with God forever. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) ROM 13 1 v5ik 0 Connecting Statement: Paul tells believers how to live under their rulers. ROM 13 1 b8nf figs-synecdoche πᾶσα ψυχὴ…ὑποτασσέσθω 1 Let every soul be obedient to Here, **soul** is a synecdoche for the whole person. “Every Christian should obey” or “Everyone should obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ROM 13 1 g1by ἐξουσίαις ὑπερεχούσαις 1 higher authorities “government officials” @@ -984,7 +984,7 @@ ROM 14 22 r53r μακάριος ὁ μὴ κρίνων ἑαυτὸν ἐν ᾧ ROM 14 23 s1ph figs-activepassive ὁ δὲ διακρινόμενος, ἐὰν φάγῃ, κατακέκριται 1 He who doubts is condemned if he eats You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will say that the person does wrong if he is not sure if it is right to eat a certain food, but he eats it anyway” or “The person who is not sure if it is right to eat a certain food, but then eats it anyway will have a troubled conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 14 23 yr44 figs-explicit ὅτι οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως 1 because it is not from faith Anything that is **not from faith** is something that God does not want you to do. You can make explicit the full meaning here. Alternate translation: “God will say that he is wrong because he is eating something he believes God does not want him to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 14 23 tr9i figs-explicit πᾶν δὲ ὃ οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως, ἁμαρτία ἐστίν 1 whatever is not from faith is sin Anything that is **not from faith** is something that God does not want you to do. You can make explicit the full meaning here. Alternate translation: “you are sinning if you do something that you do not believe God wants you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 15 intro ae9u 0 # Romans 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-11 and 21 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 12.

In [Romans 15:14](../../rom/15/14.md), Paul begins to speak more personally. He shifts from teaching to telling of his personal plans.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Strong/Weak
These terms are used to refer to people who are mature and immature in their faith. Paul teaches that those who are strong in faith need to help those who are weak in faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) +ROM 15 intro ae9u 0 # Romans 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-11 and 21 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 12.

In [Romans 15:14](../../rom/15/14.md), Paul begins to speak more personally. He shifts from teaching to telling of his personal plans.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Strong/Weak

These terms are used to refer to people who are mature and immature in their faith. Paul teaches that those who are strong in faith need to help those who are weak in faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) ROM 15 1 cx66 0 Connecting Statement: Paul concludes this section about believers’ living for others with reminding them how Christ lived. ROM 15 1 u19s δὲ 1 Now Translate this using the words your language uses to introduce a new idea into an argument. ROM 15 1 u73x figs-explicit ἡμεῖς, οἱ δυνατοὶ 1 we who are strong Here, **strong** refers to the people who are strong in their faith. They believe that God allows them to eat any kind of food. Alternate translation: “we who are strong in faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index ab5a29f70a..c06b107191 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -1CO front intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Corinthians

1. Divisions in the church (1:10-4:21)
1. Moral sins and irregularities (5:1-13)
1. Christians taking other Christians to court (6:1-20)
1. Marriage and related matters (7:1-40)
1. Misuse of Christian liberty; food sacrificed to idols, fleeing idolatry; women’s head coverings (8:1-13; 10:1-11:16)
1. Paul’s rights as an apostle (9:1-27)
1. The Lord’s Supper (11:17-34)
1. The gifts of the Holy Spirit (12:1-31)
1. Love (13:1-13)
1. The gifts of the Holy Spirit: prophecy and languages (14:1-40)
1. The resurrection of believers and the resurrection of Christ (15:1-58)
1. Closing: the contribution for Christians in Jerusalem, requests, and personal greetings (16:1-24)

### Who wrote the Book of 1 Corinthians?

Paul wrote 1 Corinthians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul started the church that met in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.

### What is the Book of 1 Corinthians about?

1 Corinthians is a letter that Paul wrote to the believers who were in the city of Corinth. Paul had heard that there were problems among the believers there. They were arguing with each other. Some of them did not understand some of the Christian teachings. And some of them were behaving badly. In this letter, Paul responded to them and encouraged them to live in a way that pleased God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “First Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Corinth like?

Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.

### What was the problem with meat sacrificed to idols?

Many animals were slaughtered and sacrificed to the false gods in Corinth. Priests and worshipers kept some of the meat. Much of the meat was sold in markets. Many Christians disagreed with each other over whether it was right for them to eat this meat, because it had been dedicated to a false god. Paul writes about this problem in 1 Corinthians.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 1 Corinthians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, 1 Corinthians ULT uses the following principles:

* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.” (See: 1:2; 3:17)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 6:1, 2; 14:33; 16:1, 15)
* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.” (See: 1:2; 6:11; 7:14, 34)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What is the meaning of “flesh?”

Paul frequently used the terms “flesh” or “fleshly” to refer to Christians who did sinful things. However, it is not the physical world that is evil. Paul also described Christians who lived in a righteous way as “spiritual.” This is because they did what the Holy Spirit taught them to do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:2, 30, 31; 3:1; 4:10, 15, 17; 6:11, 19; 7:22; 9:1, 2; 11:11, 25; 12:3, 9, 13, 18, 25; 14:16; 15:18, 19, 22, 31, 58; 16:19, 24. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “those who have been dedicated in Christ Jesus” (1:2), where Paul specifically meant that Christian believers have been dedicated to Christ.

Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Corinthians?

For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. Translators are advised to follow the modern versions of the Bible. However, if in the translators’ region there are Bibles that read according to older versions of the Bible, the translators can follow those. If so, these verses should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to 1 Corinthians.

* “Therefore glorify God with your body.” Some older versions read “Therefore glorify God with your body and in your spirit, which are God’s.” (6:20)
* “I did this even though I myself was not under the law” (9:20). Some older versions leave this passage out.
* “for the sake of conscience--the conscience of the other man.” Some older versions read “for the sake of conscience: for the earth and everything in it belong to the Lord: the conscience of the other man.” (10:28)
* “and that I give my body to be burned” (13:3). Some older versions read, “and that I give my body so that I might boast.”
* “But if anyone does not recognize this, let him not be recognized” (14:38). Some older versions read, “But if anyone is ignorant of this, let him be ignorant.”


(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1CO 1 intro ud5y 0 # 1 Corinthians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The first three verses are a greeting. In the ancient Near East, this was a common way of starting a letter.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 19, which are from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Disunity
In this chapter, Paul scolds the church for being divided and for following different apostles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])

### Spiritual gifts
Spiritual gifts are specific supernatural abilities to help the church. The Holy Spirit gives these gifts to Christians after they come to believe in Jesus. Paul lists spiritual gifts in Chapter 12. Some scholars believe the Holy Spirit gave some of these gifts only in the early church to help establish the developing church. Other scholars believe all the gifts of the Spirit are still available to help all Christians throughout the church history. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Idioms

In this chapter, Paul refers to the return of Christ using two different phrases: “the revelation of our Lord Jesus Christ” and “the day of our Lord Jesus Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])

### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the Corinthians for dividing into factions and for relying on human wisdom. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Stumbling block
A stumbling block is a rock people stumble over. Here it means the Jews find it hard to believe that God allowed his Messiah to be crucified. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO front intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Corinthians

1. Divisions in the church (1:10-4:21)
1. Moral sins and irregularities (5:1-13)
1. Christians taking other Christians to court (6:1-20)
1. Marriage and related matters (7:1-40)
1. Misuse of Christian liberty; food sacrificed to idols, fleeing idolatry; women’s head coverings (8:1-13; 10:1-11:16)
1. Paul’s rights as an apostle (9:1-27)
1. The Lord’s Supper (11:17-34)
1. The gifts of the Holy Spirit (12:1-31)
1. Love (13:1-13)
1. The gifts of the Holy Spirit: prophecy and languages (14:1-40)
1. The resurrection of believers and the resurrection of Christ (15:1-58)
1. Closing: the contribution for Christians in Jerusalem, requests, and personal greetings (16:1-24)

### Who wrote the Book of 1 Corinthians?

Paul wrote 1 Corinthians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul started the church that met in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.

### What is the Book of 1 Corinthians about?

1 Corinthians is a letter that Paul wrote to the believers who were in the city of Corinth. Paul had heard that there were problems among the believers there. They were arguing with each other. Some of them did not understand some of the Christian teachings. And some of them were behaving badly. In this letter, Paul responded to them and encouraged them to live in a way that pleased God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “First Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Corinth like?

Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.

### What was the problem with meat sacrificed to idols?

Many animals were slaughtered and sacrificed to the false gods in Corinth. Priests and worshipers kept some of the meat. Much of the meat was sold in markets. Many Christians disagreed with each other over whether it was right for them to eat this meat, because it had been dedicated to a false god. Paul writes about this problem in 1 Corinthians.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 1 Corinthians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, 1 Corinthians ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.” (See: 1:2; 3:17)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 6:1, 2; 14:33; 16:1, 15)
* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.” (See: 1:2; 6:11; 7:14, 34)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What is the meaning of “flesh?”

Paul frequently used the terms “flesh” or “fleshly” to refer to Christians who did sinful things. However, it is not the physical world that is evil. Paul also described Christians who lived in a righteous way as “spiritual.” This is because they did what the Holy Spirit taught them to do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:2, 30, 31; 3:1; 4:10, 15, 17; 6:11, 19; 7:22; 9:1, 2; 11:11, 25; 12:3, 9, 13, 18, 25; 14:16; 15:18, 19, 22, 31, 58; 16:19, 24. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “those who have been dedicated in Christ Jesus” (1:2), where Paul specifically meant that Christian believers have been dedicated to Christ.

Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Corinthians?

For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. Translators are advised to follow the modern versions of the Bible. However, if in the translators’ region there are Bibles that read according to older versions of the Bible, the translators can follow those. If so, these verses should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to 1 Corinthians.
* “Therefore glorify God with your body.” Some older versions read “Therefore glorify God with your body and in your spirit, which are God’s.” (6:20)
* “I did this even though I myself was not under the law” (9:20). Some older versions leave this passage out.
* “for the sake of conscience--the conscience of the other man.” Some older versions read “for the sake of conscience: for the earth and everything in it belong to the Lord: the conscience of the other man.” (10:28)
* “and that I give my body to be burned” (13:3). Some older versions read, “and that I give my body so that I might boast.”
* “But if anyone does not recognize this, let him not be recognized” (14:38). Some older versions read, “But if anyone is ignorant of this, let him be ignorant.”


(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1CO 1 intro ud5y 0 # 1 Corinthians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The first three verses are a greeting. In the ancient Near East, this was a common way of starting a letter.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 19, which are from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Disunity

In this chapter, Paul scolds the church for being divided and for following different apostles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])

### Spiritual gifts

Spiritual gifts are specific supernatural abilities to help the church. The Holy Spirit gives these gifts to Christians after they come to believe in Jesus. Paul lists spiritual gifts in Chapter 12. Some scholars believe the Holy Spirit gave some of these gifts only in the early church to help establish the developing church. Other scholars believe all the gifts of the Spirit are still available to help all Christians throughout the church history. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Idioms

In this chapter, Paul refers to the return of Christ using two different phrases: “the revelation of our Lord Jesus Christ” and “the day of our Lord Jesus Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the Corinthians for dividing into factions and for relying on human wisdom. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Stumbling block

A stumbling block is a rock people stumble over. Here it means the Jews find it hard to believe that God allowed his Messiah to be crucified. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 1 1 e8j3 Παῦλος 1 Paul Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. Alternate translation: “I, Paul” 1CO 1 1 qp1n translate-names Σωσθένης, ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 Sosthenes our brother This indicates that both Paul and the Corinthians knew Sosthenes. Alternate translation: “Sosthenes the brother you and I know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 1 2 r9kg τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ…ἐν Κορίνθῳ 1 to the church of God at Corinth Your language may have a particular way of introducing the intended audience. Alternate translation: “wrote this letter to you in Corinth who believe in God” @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 1 30 a7bs figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 us These words refer to Paul, those with him, and the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1CO 1 30 f1at figs-metonymy Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, ὃς ἐγενήθη σοφία ἡμῖν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 Christ Jesus, who was made for us wisdom from God Possible meanings are (1) “Christ Jesus, who has made clear to us how wise God is” or (2) “Christ Jesus, who has given us God’s wisdom.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 1 31 fym9 ὁ καυχώμενος, ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω 1 Let the one who boasts, boast in the Lord “If a person boasts, he should boast about how great the Lord is” -1CO 2 intro k86p 0 # 1 Corinthians 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verses 9 and 16, which are from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Wisdom
Paul continues the discussion from the first chapter that contrasts human wisdom and God’s wisdom. For Paul, wisdom can be simple and human ideas foolish. He said the wisdom from the Holy Spirit is the only true wisdom. Paul uses the phrase “hidden wisdom” when he refers to previously unknown truths. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]]) +1CO 2 intro k86p 0 # 1 Corinthians 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verses 9 and 16, which are from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Wisdom

Paul continues the discussion from the first chapter that contrasts human wisdom and God’s wisdom. For Paul, wisdom can be simple and human ideas foolish. He said the wisdom from the Holy Spirit is the only true wisdom. Paul uses the phrase “hidden wisdom” when he refers to previously unknown truths. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]]) 1CO 2 1 kjc7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul contrasts human wisdom and God’s wisdom. He emphasizes that spiritual wisdom comes from God. 1CO 2 1 qvj7 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women. 1CO 2 2 a2g9 figs-hyperbole ἔκρινά τι εἰδέναι…εἰ μὴ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν 1 I decided to know nothing…except Jesus Christ When Paul said that he “decided to know nothing” he exaggerated to emphasize that he decided focus on and teach about nothing other than Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “I decided to teach nothing…except Jesus Christ” or “I decided not to teach anything…except Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 2 14 gwe3 ὅτι πνευματικῶς ἀνακρίνεται 1 because they are spiritually discerned “because understanding these things requires the aid of the Spirit” 1CO 2 15 w4q7 ὁ…πνευματικὸς 1 the one who is spiritual “The believer who has received the Spirit” 1CO 2 16 m4pu figs-rquestion τίς γὰρ ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ὃς συμβιβάσει αὐτόν? 1 For who can know the mind of the Lord, that he can instruct him? Paul uses this question to emphasize that no one knows the mind of the Lord. No one is as wise as the Lord. Alternate translation: “No one can know the mind of the Lord, so no one can teach him anything he does not already know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 3 intro g6ku 0 # 1 Corinthians 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verses 19 and 20.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Fleshly people
The Corinthian believers were immature because of their unrighteous actions. He calls them “fleshly,” meaning acting as nonbelievers. This term is used in opposition to those who are “spiritual.” Christians following their “flesh” are acting foolishly. They are following the wisdom of the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor
There are many metaphors in this chapter. Paul uses “babies” and “milk” to illustrate spiritual immaturity. He uses the metaphors of planting and watering to describe the roles he and Apollos played in growing the church in Corinth. Paul uses other metaphors to help teach spiritual truths to the Corinthians and to help them to understand his teachings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 3 intro g6ku 0 # 1 Corinthians 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verses 19 and 20.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Fleshly people

The Corinthian believers were immature because of their unrighteous actions. He calls them “fleshly,” meaning acting as nonbelievers. This term is used in opposition to those who are “spiritual.” Christians following their “flesh” are acting foolishly. They are following the wisdom of the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor
There are many metaphors in this chapter. Paul uses “babies” and “milk” to illustrate spiritual immaturity. He uses the metaphors of planting and watering to describe the roles he and Apollos played in growing the church in Corinth. Paul uses other metaphors to help teach spiritual truths to the Corinthians and to help them to understand his teachings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 3 1 a43d 0 Connecting Statement: Paul now reminds the Corinthian believers of how they are actually living instead of behaving as their position before God is. He then reminds them that the person who teaches them is not as important as God who gives their growth. 1CO 3 1 r4iw ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women. 1CO 3 1 jx17 πνευματικοῖς 1 spiritual people people who obey the Spirit @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 3 20 la6x Κύριος γινώσκει τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς τῶν σοφῶν, ὅτι εἰσὶν μάταιοι 1 The Lord knows that the reasoning of the wise is futile “The Lord knows that what people who think they are wise plan to do is futile” 1CO 3 20 kz2u μάταιοι 1 futile useless 1CO 3 23 nj48 ὑμεῖς δὲ Χριστοῦ, Χριστὸς δὲ Θεοῦ 1 you are Christ’s, and Christ is God’s “you belong to Christ, and Christ belongs to God” -1CO 4 intro vg5z 0 # 1 Corinthians 04 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Pride
Paul contrasts the Corinthians being proud with the apostles being humble. The Corinthian believers had no reason to be proud. All that they had, and all they were, was a gift from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors
Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. He describes the apostles as servants. Paul speaks of a victory parade where the apostles are the prisoners who will be killed. He uses a rod to stand for punishment. He calls himself their father because he is their “spiritual father.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

### Irony
Paul uses irony to shame the Corinthians for being proud. The Corinthian believers are reigning but the apostles are suffering. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion) +1CO 4 intro vg5z 0 # 1 Corinthians 04 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Pride

Paul contrasts the Corinthians being proud with the apostles being humble. The Corinthian believers had no reason to be proud. All that they had, and all they were, was a gift from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. He describes the apostles as servants. Paul speaks of a victory parade where the apostles are the prisoners who will be killed. He uses a rod to stand for punishment. He calls himself their father because he is their “spiritual father.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

### Irony

Paul uses irony to shame the Corinthians for being proud. The Corinthian believers are reigning but the apostles are suffering. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion) 1CO 4 1 k1v5 0 Connecting Statement: Having just reminded the people not to be proud concerning who taught them about the Lord and who had baptized them, Paul reminds the Corinthian believers that all believers are to be humble servants. 1CO 4 2 th8e figs-123person ὧδε λοιπὸν ζητεῖται ἐν τοῖς οἰκονόμοις 1 what is required of stewards Paul is speaking of himself as if he were speaking about other people. Alternate translation: “we are required to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 4 3 k6nc ἐλάχιστόν ἐστιν, ἵνα ὑφ’ ὑμῶν ἀνακριθῶ 1 it is a very small thing that I should be judged by you Paul is comparing the difference between human judgment and God’s judgment. Man’s judgment is not important compared to God’s true judgment upon man. @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 4 21 ix5g figs-rquestion τί θέλετε? 1 What do you want? Paul was making a last appeal to the Corinthians, as he has been rebuking them for the errors they had made. Alternate translation: “Tell me what you want to happen now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 4 21 wv61 figs-rquestion ἐν ῥάβδῳ ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ἢ ἐν ἀγάπῃ, πνεύματί τε πραΰτητος? 1 Shall I come to you with a rod or with love and in a spirit of gentleness? Paul is offering the Corinthians two opposing attitudes he could use when approaching them. Alternate translation: “If you want, I can come to punish you, or I can come to show you how much I love you by being gentle with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 4 21 ix7l πραΰτητος 1 of gentleness “of kindness” or “of tenderness” -1CO 5 intro vb3l 0 # 1 Corinthians 05 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 13.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Euphemisms

Paul uses euphemisms to describe sensitive topics. This chapter deals with sexual immorality of one church member. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fornication]])

### Metaphor
Paul uses an extended comparison using many metaphors. Yeast represents evil. The loaf probably represents the whole congregation. The unleavened bread represents living purely. So the whole passage means: Don’t you know that a little evil will affect the whole congregation? So get rid of the evil so you can live purely. Christ has been sacrificed for us. So let us be sincere and truthful and not wicked and behaving badly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/unleavenedbread]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/purify]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])

### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion) +1CO 5 intro vb3l 0 # 1 Corinthians 05 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 13.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Euphemisms

Paul uses euphemisms to describe sensitive topics. This chapter deals with sexual immorality of one church member. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fornication]])

### Metaphor
Paul uses an extended comparison using many metaphors. Yeast represents evil. The loaf probably represents the whole congregation. The unleavened bread represents living purely. So the whole passage means: Don’t you know that a little evil will affect the whole congregation? So get rid of the evil so you can live purely. Christ has been sacrificed for us. So let us be sincere and truthful and not wicked and behaving badly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/unleavenedbread]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/purify]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion) 1CO 5 1 e66c 0 Connecting Statement: Paul now specifically states about what sin of theirs he has heard, and how the Corinthian believers are proud of their acceptance of that man and his sin. 1CO 5 1 dlj2 figs-activepassive ἥτις οὐδὲ ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 which does not even exist among the Gentiles This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that not even the Gentiles permit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 5 1 b9xn γυναῖκά τινα τοῦ πατρὸς ἔχειν 1 a man has his father’s wife “A man among you is commiting adultery with his father’s wife” @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 5 11 b4us ἀδελφὸς 1 brother Here this means a fellow Christian, either a man or a woman. 1CO 5 12 xeu7 figs-rquestion τί…μοι τοὺς ἔξω κρίνειν? 1 how am I involved with judging those who are outside the church? Paul is emphasizing that he is not the one to judge people outside the church. This can also be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I am not the one who should judge people who do not belong to the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 5 12 m4s6 figs-rquestion οὐχὶ τοὺς ἔσω ὑμεῖς κρίνετε? 1 Are you not to judge those inside? Paul is scolding the Corinthians. “you should know that you are the ones who should judge those who are inside the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 6 intro s6hb 0 # 1 Corinthians 06 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Lawsuits

Paul teaches that a Christian should not take another Christian to court before a non-Christian judge. It is better to be cheated. Christians will judge the angels. So they should be able to solve problems among themselves. It is especially bad to use a court to cheat another believer. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor
The temple of the Holy Spirit is an important metaphor. It refers to the place where the Holy Spirit stays and is worshiped. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion) +1CO 6 intro s6hb 0 # 1 Corinthians 06 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Lawsuits

Paul teaches that a Christian should not take another Christian to court before a non-Christian judge. It is better to be cheated. Christians will judge the angels. So they should be able to solve problems among themselves. It is especially bad to use a court to cheat another believer. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor
The temple of the Holy Spirit is an important metaphor. It refers to the place where the Holy Spirit stays and is worshiped. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion) 1CO 6 1 hv79 0 Connecting Statement: Paul then explains how believers are to settle disagreements with other believers. 1CO 6 1 q5d3 πρᾶγμα 1 dispute disagreement or argument 1CO 6 1 gmy5 figs-rquestion τολμᾷ…κρίνεσθαι…τῶν ἁγίων? 1 does he dare to go…saints? Paul is emphasizing that Christians must resolve disagreements among themselves. Alternate translation: “he should not dare to go…saints!” or “he should be fear God and not go…saints!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 6 19 d2mc figs-metaphor ναὸς τοῦ…Ἁγίου Πνεύματός 1 temple of the Holy Spirit A temple is dedicated to divine beings, and it is also where they dwell. In the same way, each Corinthian believer’s body is like a temple because the Holy Spirit is present within them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 6 20 qv47 figs-activepassive ἠγοράσθητε γὰρ τιμῆς 1 For you were bought with a price God paid for the freedom of the Corinthians from the slavery of sin. This can be stated as active. Alternate translation: “God paid for your freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 6 20 y7fe δὴ 1 Therefore “Because what I have just said is true” -1CO 7 intro a25m 0 # 1 Corinthians 07 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul begins to answer a series of questions that the Corinthians may have asked him. The first question is about marriage. The second question is about a slave trying to become free, a Gentile becoming a Jew, or a Jew becoming a Gentile.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Divorce
Paul says married Christians should not divorce. A Christian married to an unbeliever should not leave their husband or wife. If the unbelieving husband or wife leaves, this is not a sin. Paul advises that, because of the difficult times and being near to time that Jesus will return, it is acceptable to remain unmarried. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Euphemisms
Paul uses many euphemisms to discreetly refer to sexual relations. This is often a sensitive topic. Many cultures do not wish to speak openly about these matters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) +1CO 7 intro a25m 0 # 1 Corinthians 07 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul begins to answer a series of questions that the Corinthians may have asked him. The first question is about marriage. The second question is about a slave trying to become free, a Gentile becoming a Jew, or a Jew becoming a Gentile.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Divorce

Paul says married Christians should not divorce. A Christian married to an unbeliever should not leave their husband or wife. If the unbelieving husband or wife leaves, this is not a sin. Paul advises that, because of the difficult times and being near to time that Jesus will return, it is acceptable to remain unmarried. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Euphemisms

Paul uses many euphemisms to discreetly refer to sexual relations. This is often a sensitive topic. Many cultures do not wish to speak openly about these matters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1CO 7 1 iue7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul gives the believers some specific instructions on marriage. 1CO 7 1 y4lx δὲ 1 Now Paul is introducing a new topic in his teaching. 1CO 7 1 jq21 ὧν ἐγράψατε 1 the issues you wrote about The Corinthians had written a letter to Paul to ask for answers to certain questions. @@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 7 40 hwz4 τὴν ἐμὴν γνώμην 1 my judgment “my understanding of God’s word” 1CO 7 40 hd7f μακαριωτέρα 1 happier more contented, more joyful 1CO 7 40 pse4 οὕτως μείνῃ 1 lives as she is “remains unmarried” -1CO 8 intro c8l6 0 # 1 Corinthians 08 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In Chapters 8-10, Paul answers the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?”

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Meat sacrificed to idols
Paul answers this question by saying that idols are gods that do not really exist. Therefore nothing is wrong with the meat. Christians are free to eat it. However, someone who does not understand this may see a Christian eating it. They may then be encouraged to eat the meat as an act of worship to the idol. +1CO 8 intro c8l6 0 # 1 Corinthians 08 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In Chapters 8-10, Paul answers the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?”

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Meat sacrificed to idols

Paul answers this question by saying that idols are gods that do not really exist. Therefore nothing is wrong with the meat. Christians are free to eat it. However, someone who does not understand this may see a Christian eating it. They may then be encouraged to eat the meat as an act of worship to the idol. 1CO 8 1 jf6h figs-exclusive 0 General Information: “We” means Paul and, though specifically writing to the Corinthian believers, includes all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1CO 8 1 nzt4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds the believers that though idols have no power, believers must be careful not to affect the weaker believers who might think they care about the idols. He tells believers to be careful with the liberty believers have in Christ. 1CO 8 1 cep1 περὶ δὲ 1 Now about Paul uses this phrase to move on to the next question the Corinthians had asked him. @@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 8 11 g5tn ἀπόλλυται…ὁ ἀσθενῶν 1 the one who is weak…is destroyed The brother or sister who is not strong in his or her faith will sin or lose his or her faith. 1CO 8 13 i8tb διόπερ 1 Therefore “Because what I have just said is true” 1CO 8 13 vf92 figs-metonymy εἰ βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει 1 if food causes to stumble **Food** here is a metonym for the person eating the food. Alternate translation: “if I cause by eating” or “if I, because of what I eat, cause” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1CO 9 intro z8d4 0 # 1 Corinthians 09 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul defends himself in this chapter. Some people claimed that he was trying to gain financially from the church.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Earning money from the church
People accused Paul of just wanting money from the church. Paul answered that he rightfully could get money from the church. The Old Testament taught that those who worked should get their living from their work. He and Barnabas purposefully never used this right and earned their own living.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor
Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. These metaphors teach complex truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Contextualization
This passage is important because Paul “contextualizes” ministering the gospel to different audiences. This means that Paul makes himself and the gospel understandable without his actions hindering the gospel being received. The translator should take extra care to preserve aspects of this “contextualization” if possible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])

### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize various points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion) +1CO 9 intro z8d4 0 # 1 Corinthians 09 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul defends himself in this chapter. Some people claimed that he was trying to gain financially from the church.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Earning money from the church

People accused Paul of just wanting money from the church. Paul answered that he rightfully could get money from the church. The Old Testament taught that those who worked should get their living from their work. He and Barnabas purposefully never used this right and earned their own living.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor
Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. These metaphors teach complex truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Contextualization

This passage is important because Paul “contextualizes” ministering the gospel to different audiences. This means that Paul makes himself and the gospel understandable without his actions hindering the gospel being received. The translator should take extra care to preserve aspects of this “contextualization” if possible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize various points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion) 1CO 9 1 fu7x 0 Connecting Statement: Paul explains how he uses the liberty he has in Christ. 1CO 9 1 mdm4 figs-rquestion οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐλεύθερος 1 Am I not free? Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of the rights he has. Alternate translation: “I am a free person.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 9 1 dbp9 figs-rquestion οὐκ εἰμὶ ἀπόστολος 1 Am I not an apostle? Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of who he is and the rights he has. Alternate translation: “I am an apostle.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 25 bfe4 figs-metaphor φθαρτὸν στέφανον…ἄφθαρτον 1 a wreath that is perishable…one that is imperishable A wreath is a bunch of leaves twisted together. Wreaths were given as prizes to athletes who won games and races. Paul speaks of eternal life as if it were a wreath that would never dry up. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 26 k64n figs-metaphor ἐγὼ…οὕτως τρέχω, ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως; οὕτως πυκτεύω, ὡς οὐκ ἀέρα δέρων 1 I do not run without purpose or box by beating the air Here, **running** and **boxing** are both metaphors for living the Christian life and serving God. This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “I know very well why I am running, and I know what I am doing when I box” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-activepassive μή…αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified This passive sentence can be rephrased to an active form. The judge of a race or competition is a metaphor for God. Alternate translation: “the judge will not disqualify me” or “God will not say that I have failed to obey the rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Chapters 8-10 together answer the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?”

In this chapter, Paul uses the exodus to warn people not to sin. Then, he returns to discussing meat offered to idols. He uses the Lord’s Supper as an example. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Exodus
Paul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])

### Eating meat sacrificed to idol
Paul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion) +1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Chapters 8-10 together answer the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?”

In this chapter, Paul uses the exodus to warn people not to sin. Then, he returns to discussing meat offered to idols. He uses the Lord’s Supper as an example. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Exodus

Paul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])

### Eating meat sacrificed to idol

Paul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion) 1CO 10 1 r66h 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds them of the example of their ancient Jewish fathers’ experiences with immorality and idolatry. 1CO 10 1 g34f figs-exclusive οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Paul is referring to the time of Moses in the book of Exodus when Israel fled through the Red Sea as the Egyptian army pursued them. The word **our** refers to himself and the Corinthians and is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1CO 10 1 v4c6 διὰ τῆς θαλάσσης διῆλθον 1 passed through the sea This sea is known by two names, the Red Sea and the Sea of Reeds. @@ -503,7 +503,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 33 kj14 πάντα…ἀρέσκω 1 try to please all people “make all people glad” 1CO 10 33 b4jv μὴ ζητῶν τὸ ἐμαυτοῦ σύμφορον 1 I do not seek my benefit “I do not do things I desire for myself” 1CO 10 33 hd2z τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many as many people as possible -1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord’s Supper (verses 17-34).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Proper conduct in a church service

### Disorderly women
Paul’s instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.

### The Lord’s Supper
There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord’s Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord’s Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ’s death if they participated in the Lord’s Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### The head

Paul uses “head” as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person’s actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used “head” in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord’s Supper (verses 17-34).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Proper conduct in a church service

### Disorderly women

Paul’s instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.

### The Lord’s Supper
There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord’s Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord’s Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ’s death if they participated in the Lord’s Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### The head

Paul uses “head” as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person’s actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used “head” in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 11 1 h5fg 0 Connecting Statement: After reminding them to follow him the way he follows Christ, Paul gives some specific instructs in how women and men are to live as believers. 1CO 11 2 qsk9 πάντα μου μέμνησθε 1 you remember me in everything “you think of me at all times” or “you always try act as I would want you to act” The Corinthians had not forgotten who Paul was or what he had taught them. 1CO 11 3 k5um θέλω δὲ 1 Now I want Possible meanings are (1) “Because of this, I want” or (2) “However, I want.” @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 33 nky5 ἀλλήλους ἐκδέχεσθε 1 wait for one another “allow the others to arrive before beginning the meal” 1CO 11 34 v2uh ἐν οἴκῳ ἐσθιέτω 1 let him eat at home “let him eat before attending this gathering” 1CO 11 34 x1l8 figs-metonymy μὴ εἰς κρίμα 1 not be for judgment “it will not be an occasion for God to discipline you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1CO 12 intro abcf 0 # 1 Corinthians 12 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

### Gifts of the Holy Spirit

This chapter begins a new section. Chapters 12-14 discuss spiritual gifts within the church.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Church, the body of Christ

This is an important metaphor in Scripture. The Church has many different parts. Each part has different functions. They combine to make one church. All of the different parts are necessary. Each part is to be concerned for all the other parts, even those that seem less important. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “No one can say, ‘Jesus is Lord,’ except by the Holy Spirit.”
In reading the Old Testament, the Jews would have substituted the word “Lord” for the word “Yahweh.” This sentence probably means that no one can say that Jesus is Yahweh, God in the flesh, without the Holy Spirit’s influence drawing them to accept this truth. If this statement is translated poorly, it can have unintended theological consequences. +1CO 12 intro abcf 0 # 1 Corinthians 12 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

### Gifts of the Holy Spirit

This chapter begins a new section. Chapters 12-14 discuss spiritual gifts within the church.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Church, the body of Christ

This is an important metaphor in Scripture. The Church has many different parts. Each part has different functions. They combine to make one church. All of the different parts are necessary. Each part is to be concerned for all the other parts, even those that seem less important. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “No one can say, ‘Jesus is Lord,’ except by the Holy Spirit.”

In reading the Old Testament, the Jews would have substituted the word “Lord” for the word “Yahweh.” This sentence probably means that no one can say that Jesus is Yahweh, God in the flesh, without the Holy Spirit’s influence drawing them to accept this truth. If this statement is translated poorly, it can have unintended theological consequences. 1CO 12 1 da2e 0 Connecting Statement: Paul lets them know that God has given special gifts to believers. These gifts are to help the body of believers. 1CO 12 1 i3k7 figs-doublenegatives οὐ θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 I do not want you to be uninformed This can be stated as a positive. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 1CO 12 2 hbt8 figs-metaphor ἦτε, πρὸς τὰ εἴδωλα τὰ ἄφωνα ὡς ἂν ἤγεσθε, ἀπαγόμενοι 1 you were led astray to idols who could not speak, in whatever ways you were led by them Here, **led astray** is a metaphor for being persuaded to do something wrong. Being led astray to idols represents being wrongly persuaded to worship idols. The phrases “were led astray” and “you were led by them” can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you were persuaded in some way to worship idols who cannot speak” or “you believed lies somehow and so you worshiped idols who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -687,7 +687,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 38 l68a figs-activepassive ἀγνοείτω 1 let him be ignorant This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you should not recognize him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 14 39 jvr7 τὸ λαλεῖν μὴ κωλύετε γλώσσαις 1 do not forbid anyone from speaking in tongues Paul makes it clear that speaking in tongues at a church gathering is permissible and acceptable. 1CO 14 40 d7ia πάντα δὲ εὐσχημόνως καὶ κατὰ τάξιν γινέσθω 1 But let all things be done properly and in order Paul is stressing that church gatherings should be held in an orderly manner. Alternate translation: “But do all things properly and in order” or “But do everything in an orderly, appropriate way” -1CO 15 intro abci 0 # 1 Corinthians 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

### Resurrection
This chapter includes a very important teaching about the resurrection of Jesus. The Greek people did not believe that a person could live after they died. Paul defends the resurrection of Jesus. He teaches why it is important to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Resurrection
Paul presents the resurrection as the ultimate proof that Jesus is God. Christ is the first of many who God will raise to life. The resurrection is central to the gospel. Few doctrines are as important as this one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

Paul uses many different figures of speech in this chapter. He uses them to express difficult theological teachings in a way that people can understand. +1CO 15 intro abci 0 # 1 Corinthians 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

### Resurrection

This chapter includes a very important teaching about the resurrection of Jesus. The Greek people did not believe that a person could live after they died. Paul defends the resurrection of Jesus. He teaches why it is important to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Resurrection

Paul presents the resurrection as the ultimate proof that Jesus is God. Christ is the first of many who God will raise to life. The resurrection is central to the gospel. Few doctrines are as important as this one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

Paul uses many different figures of speech in this chapter. He uses them to express difficult theological teachings in a way that people can understand. 1CO 15 1 gc6n 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds them that it is the gospel that saves them and he tells them again what the gospel is. Then he gives them a short history lesson, which ends with what will yet happen. 1CO 15 1 la9v γνωρίζω…ὑμῖ 1 make known to you “help you remember” 1CO 15 1 xv53 figs-metaphor ἐν ᾧ…ἑστήκατε 1 on which you stand Paul is speaking of the Corinthians as if they were a house and the gospel as if it were the foundation on which the house was standing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) diff --git a/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv b/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv index 2a4d7060ed..bad2aa8732 100644 --- a/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -2CO front intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 Corinthians

1. Paul thanks God for the Corinthian Christians (1:1-11)
1. Paul explains his conduct and his ministry (1:12-7:16)
1. Paul speaks about contributing money for the Jerusalem church (8:1-9:15)
1. Paul defends his authority as an apostle (10:1-13:10)
1. Paul gives final greetings and encouragement (13:11-14)

### Who wrote the Book of 2 Corinthians?

Paul was the author. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul started the church in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.

### What is the Book of 2 Corinthians about?

In 2 Corinthians, Paul continued to write about the conflicts among the Christians in the city of Corinth. It is clear in this letter that the Corinthians had obeyed his previous instructions to them. In 2 Corinthians, Paul encouraged them to live in a way that would please God.

Paul also wrote to assure them that Jesus Christ sent him as an apostle to preach the Gospel. Paul wanted them to understand this, because a group of Jewish Christians opposed what he was doing. They claimed Paul was not sent by God and he was teaching a false message. This group of Jewish Christians wanted Gentile Christians to obey the law of Moses.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Second Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Corinth like?

Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.

### What did Paul mean by “false apostles” (11:13)?

These were Jewish Christians. They taught that Gentile Christians had to obey the law of Moses in order to follow Christ. Christian leaders had met in Jerusalem and decided on the matter (See: Acts 15). However, it is clear that there were still some groups that disagreed with what the leaders in Jerusalem decided.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Also, the word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Corinth. There are two exceptions to this: 6:2 and 12:9. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 2 Corinthians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:

* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.”

* The meaning in most passages in 2 Corinthians is a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 1:1; 8:4; 9:1, 12; 13:13)

* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.”

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord”?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:19, 20; 2:12, 17; 3:14; 5:17, 19, 21; 10:17; 12:2, 19; and 13:4. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “A door was opened for me in the Lord,” (2:12) where Paul specifically meant that a door was opened for Paul by the Lord.

Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What does it mean to be a “new creation” in Christ (5:17)?

Paul’s message was that God makes Christians part of a “new world” when a person believes in Christ. God gives a new world of holiness, peace, and joy. In this new world, believers have a new nature that has been given them by the Holy Spirit. Translators should try to express this idea.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Corinthians?

* “and in your love for us” (8:7). Many versions, including the ULT and UST, read this way. However, many other versions read, “and in our love for you.” There is strong evidence that each reading is original. Translators should probably follow the reading preferred by other versions in their region.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -2CO 1 intro tsh3 0 # 2 Corinthians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The first paragraph reflects a common way to begin a letter in the ancient Near East.

## Special Concepts

### Paul’s integrity
People were criticizing Paul and saying he was not sincere. He refutes them by explaining his motives for what he was doing.

### Comfort
Comfort is a major theme of this chapter. The Holy Spirit comforts Christians. The Corinthians probably were afflicted and needed to be comforted.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical question

Paul uses two rhetorical questions to defend himself against a charge of not being sincere. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### We
Paul uses the pronoun “we”. This likely represents at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.

### Guarantee

Paul says the Holy Spirit is the guarantee, which means pledge or down-payment, of a Christian’s eternal life. Christians are securely saved. But they will not experience all of God’s given promises until after they die. The Holy Spirit is a personal guarantee that this will happen. This idea comes from a business term. A person gives some valuable item to another person as a “guarantee” that they will repay money. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) +2CO front intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 Corinthians

1. Paul thanks God for the Corinthian Christians (1:1-11)
1. Paul explains his conduct and his ministry (1:12-7:16)
1. Paul speaks about contributing money for the Jerusalem church (8:1-9:15)
1. Paul defends his authority as an apostle (10:1-13:10)
1. Paul gives final greetings and encouragement (13:11-14)

### Who wrote the Book of 2 Corinthians?

Paul was the author. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul started the church in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.

### What is the Book of 2 Corinthians about?

In 2 Corinthians, Paul continued to write about the conflicts among the Christians in the city of Corinth. It is clear in this letter that the Corinthians had obeyed his previous instructions to them. In 2 Corinthians, Paul encouraged them to live in a way that would please God.

Paul also wrote to assure them that Jesus Christ sent him as an apostle to preach the Gospel. Paul wanted them to understand this, because a group of Jewish Christians opposed what he was doing. They claimed Paul was not sent by God and he was teaching a false message. This group of Jewish Christians wanted Gentile Christians to obey the law of Moses.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Second Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Corinth like?

Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.

### What did Paul mean by “false apostles” (11:13)?

These were Jewish Christians. They taught that Gentile Christians had to obey the law of Moses in order to follow Christ. Christian leaders had met in Jerusalem and decided on the matter (See: Acts 15). However, it is clear that there were still some groups that disagreed with what the leaders in Jerusalem decided.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Also, the word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Corinth. There are two exceptions to this: 6:2 and 12:9. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 2 Corinthians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.”
* The meaning in most passages in 2 Corinthians is a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 1:1; 8:4; 9:1, 12; 13:13)
* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.”

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord”?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:19, 20; 2:12, 17; 3:14; 5:17, 19, 21; 10:17; 12:2, 19; and 13:4. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “A door was opened for me in the Lord,” (2:12) where Paul specifically meant that a door was opened for Paul by the Lord.

Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What does it mean to be a “new creation” in Christ (5:17)?

Paul’s message was that God makes Christians part of a “new world” when a person believes in Christ. God gives a new world of holiness, peace, and joy. In this new world, believers have a new nature that has been given them by the Holy Spirit. Translators should try to express this idea.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Corinthians?
* “and in your love for us” (8:7). Many versions, including the ULT and UST, read this way. However, many other versions read, “and in our love for you.” There is strong evidence that each reading is original. Translators should probably follow the reading preferred by other versions in their region.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +2CO 1 intro tsh3 0 # 2 Corinthians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The first paragraph reflects a common way to begin a letter in the ancient Near East.

## Special Concepts

### Paul’s integrity

People were criticizing Paul and saying he was not sincere. He refutes them by explaining his motives for what he was doing.

### Comfort

Comfort is a major theme of this chapter. The Holy Spirit comforts Christians. The Corinthians probably were afflicted and needed to be comforted.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical question

Paul uses two rhetorical questions to defend himself against a charge of not being sincere. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### We

Paul uses the pronoun “we”. This likely represents at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.

### Guarantee

Paul says the Holy Spirit is the guarantee, which means pledge or down-payment, of a Christian’s eternal life. Christians are securely saved. But they will not experience all of God’s given promises until after they die. The Holy Spirit is a personal guarantee that this will happen. This idea comes from a business term. A person gives some valuable item to another person as a “guarantee” that they will repay money. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) 2CO 1 1 epd2 0 General Information: After Paul’s greeting to the church in Corinth, he writes about suffering and comfort through Jesus Christ. Timothy is with him as well. The word “you” throughout this letter refers to the people of the church in Corinth and to the rest of the Christians in that area. Possibly Timothy writes on parchment paper the words that Paul says. 2CO 1 1 mel3 Παῦλος…τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῇ οὔσῃ ἐν Κορίνθῳ 1 Paul…to the church of God that is in Corinth Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and its intended audience. Alternate translation: “I, Paul…wrote this letter to you, the church of God that is in Corinth” 2CO 1 1 f59u Τιμόθεος ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 Timothy our brother This indicates that both Paul and the Corinthians knew Timothy and considered him to be their spiritual brother. @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 1 23 j15t ὅτι φειδόμενος ὑμῶν 1 so that I might spare you “so that I might not cause you more suffering” 2CO 1 24 cyu4 συνεργοί ἐσμεν τῆς χαρᾶς ὑμῶν 1 we are fellow workers with you for your joy “we are working with you so that you may have joy” 2CO 1 24 cih8 figs-idiom τῇ…πίστει ἑστήκατε 1 you stand firm in the faith The word **stand** can refer to something that does not change. Alternate translation: “remain firm in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -2CO 2 intro hy3h 0 # 2 Corinthians 02 General Notes
## Special Concepts

### Harsh writing
In this chapter, Paul refers to a letter he previously wrote to the Corinthians. That letter had a harsh and corrective tone. Paul probably wrote it after the letter known as First Corinthians and before this letter. He implies that the church had to rebuke an erring member. Paul is now encouraging them to be gracious to that person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Aroma
A sweet aroma is a pleasing smell. Scripture often describes things that are pleasing to God as having a pleasing aroma. +2CO 2 intro hy3h 0 # 2 Corinthians 02 General Notes

## Special Concepts

### Harsh writing

In this chapter, Paul refers to a letter he previously wrote to the Corinthians. That letter had a harsh and corrective tone. Paul probably wrote it after the letter known as First Corinthians and before this letter. He implies that the church had to rebuke an erring member. Paul is now encouraging them to be gracious to that person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Aroma

A sweet aroma is a pleasing smell. Scripture often describes things that are pleasing to God as having a pleasing aroma. 2CO 2 1 wh9c 0 Connecting Statement: Because of his great love for them, Paul makes it clear that his rebuke in his first letter to them (the rebuke of their acceptance of the sin of immorality) caused him pain as well as pain to the church people in Corinth and the immoral man. 2CO 2 1 x9s5 ἔκρινα γὰρ ἐμαυτῷ 1 I personally decided “I made the decision” 2CO 2 1 ij73 ἐν λύπῃ 1 in sorrow “in circumstances that would cause you pain” @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 2 17 x86y εἰλικρινείας 1 sincerity “pure motives” 2CO 2 17 u2zb ἐν Χριστῷ λαλοῦμεν 1 we speak in Christ “we speak as people who are joined to Christ” or “we speak with the authority of Christ” 2CO 2 17 q4dc figs-ellipsis κατέναντι Θεοῦ 1 before God Paul and his coworkers preach the gospel with the awareness that God is watching them. Alternate translation: “we speak in the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -2CO 3 intro f7rh 0 # 2 Corinthians 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul continues his defense. Paul views the Corinthian Christians as the proof of his work.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Law of Moses
Paul alludes to God giving the Ten Commandments on stone tablets. This represents the law of Moses. The law was good because it came from God. But God punished the Israelites because they disobeyed it. This chapter may be difficult for translators to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors
Paul uses many metaphors used in this chapter to explain complex spiritual truths. It is unclear whether this makes Paul’s teachings easier or more difficult to understand. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “This is a covenant not of the letter but of the Spirit.”
Paul contrasts the old and new covenants. The new covenant is not a system of rules and regulations. Here, **Spirit** probably refers to the Holy Spirit. It may also refer to the new covenant being “spiritual” in nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]]) +2CO 3 intro f7rh 0 # 2 Corinthians 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul continues his defense. Paul views the Corinthian Christians as the proof of his work.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Law of Moses

Paul alludes to God giving the Ten Commandments on stone tablets. This represents the law of Moses. The law was good because it came from God. But God punished the Israelites because they disobeyed it. This chapter may be difficult for translators to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

Paul uses many metaphors used in this chapter to explain complex spiritual truths. It is unclear whether this makes Paul’s teachings easier or more difficult to understand. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “This is a covenant not of the letter but of the Spirit.”

Paul contrasts the old and new covenants. The new covenant is not a system of rules and regulations. Here, **Spirit** probably refers to the Holy Spirit. It may also refer to the new covenant being “spiritual” in nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]]) 2CO 3 1 m1k8 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds them that he is not boasting as he tells them about what he has done through Christ. 2CO 3 1 um8x figs-rquestion ἀρχόμεθα πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνειν? 1 Are we beginning to praise ourselves again? Paul uses this question to emphasize that they are not bragging about themselves. Alternate translation: “We are not beginning to praise ourselves again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 2CO 3 1 y8yc figs-rquestion ἢ μὴ χρῄζομεν, ὥς τινες, συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἢ ἐξ ὑμῶν? 1 We do not need letters of recommendation to you or from you, like some people, do we? Paul says this to express that the Corinthians already know about Paul and Timothy’s good reputation. The question prompts a negative answer. Alternate translation: “We certainly do not need letters of recommendation to you or from you, like some people do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 3 18 rc9x figs-activepassive τὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα μεταμορφούμεθα 1 are being transformed into the same image The Spirit is changing believers to be glorious like him. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “The Lord is transforming us into his same glorious likeness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 3 18 bx5b ἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν 1 from glory to glory “from one amount of glory to another amount of glory.” This means that the Spirit is constantly increasing the glory of believers. 2CO 3 18 mw3v καθάπερ ἀπὸ Κυρίου 1 just as from the Lord “just as this comes from the Lord” -2CO 4 intro rx1c 0 # 2 Corinthians 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting
This chapter begins with the word “therefore.” This connects it to what the previous chapter teaches. How these chapters are divided may be confusing to the reader.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Ministry

Paul ministers to people by telling them about Christ. He does not try to trick people into believing. If they do not understand the gospel, it is because the problem is ultimately spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Life and death
Paul does not refer here to physical life and death. Life represents the new life a Christian has in Jesus. Death represents the old way of living before believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Hope
Paul uses a repeated pattern in a purposeful way. He makes a statement. Then he denies a seemingly opposite or contradictory statement or gives an exception. Together these give the reader hope in difficult circumstances. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hope]]) +2CO 4 intro rx1c 0 # 2 Corinthians 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter begins with the word “therefore.” This connects it to what the previous chapter teaches. How these chapters are divided may be confusing to the reader.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Ministry

Paul ministers to people by telling them about Christ. He does not try to trick people into believing. If they do not understand the gospel, it is because the problem is ultimately spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Life and death

Paul does not refer here to physical life and death. Life represents the new life a Christian has in Jesus. Death represents the old way of living before believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Hope

Paul uses a repeated pattern in a purposeful way. He makes a statement. Then he denies a seemingly opposite or contradictory statement or gives an exception. Together these give the reader hope in difficult circumstances. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hope]]) 2CO 4 1 lyi4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul writes that he is honest in his ministry by preaching Christ, not praising himself. He shows the death and the life of Jesus in how he lives so that life can work in the Corinthian believers. 2CO 4 1 ix7n figs-exclusive ἔχοντες τὴν διακονίαν ταύτην 1 having this ministry Here the word **we** refers to Paul and his coworker, but not to the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 2CO 4 1 h1ud figs-explicit καθὼς ἠλεήθημεν 1 and just as we have received mercy This phrase explains how Paul and his coworkers “have this ministry.” It is a gift that God has given to them through his mercy. Alternate translation: “because God has shown us mercy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 4 17 na9y figs-metaphor καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν εἰς ὑπερβολὴν 1 that exceeds all measurement The glory that Paul will experience is so heavy that no one can measure it. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that no one can measure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 4 18 t2fp figs-activepassive τὰ βλεπόμενα…τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα 1 things that are seen…things that are unseen This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “things that we can see…things that we cannot see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 4 18 f97x figs-ellipsis τὰ δὲ μὴ βλεπόμενα 1 but for things that are unseen You can supply the verb for this phrase. AT “but we are watching for things that are unseen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -2CO 5 intro s14p 0 # 2 Corinthians 05 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### New bodies in heaven
Paul knows that when he dies he will receive a much better body. Because of this, he is not afraid of being killed for preaching the gospel. So he tells others that they too can be reconciled to God. Christ will take away their sin and give them his righteousness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### New creation

The old and new creation probably refers to how Paul illustrates the old and new self. These concepts are also the same as the old and new man. The term “old” probably does not refer to the sinful nature with which a person is born. It refers to the old way of living or the Christian formerly being bound to sin. The “new creation” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Home
The Christian’s home is no longer in the world. A Christian’s real home is in heaven. By using this metaphor, Paul emphasizes that the Christian’s circumstances in this world are temporary. It gives hope to those who are suffering. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hope]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “The message of reconciliation”
This refers to the gospel. Paul calls for people who are hostile to God to repent and be reconciled to him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]]) +2CO 5 intro s14p 0 # 2 Corinthians 05 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### New bodies in heaven

Paul knows that when he dies he will receive a much better body. Because of this, he is not afraid of being killed for preaching the gospel. So he tells others that they too can be reconciled to God. Christ will take away their sin and give them his righteousness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### New creation

The old and new creation probably refers to how Paul illustrates the old and new self. These concepts are also the same as the old and new man. The term “old” probably does not refer to the sinful nature with which a person is born. It refers to the old way of living or the Christian formerly being bound to sin. The “new creation” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Home

The Christian’s home is no longer in the world. A Christian’s real home is in heaven. By using this metaphor, Paul emphasizes that the Christian’s circumstances in this world are temporary. It gives hope to those who are suffering. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hope]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “The message of reconciliation”

This refers to the gospel. Paul calls for people who are hostile to God to repent and be reconciled to him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]]) 2CO 5 1 p7b7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues by contrasting believers’ earthly bodies to the heavenly ones God will give. 2CO 5 1 z4vs figs-metaphor ἐὰν ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ, οἰκοδομὴν ἐκ Θεοῦ ἔχομεν 1 if the earthly dwelling that we live in is destroyed, we have a building from God Here a temporary **earthly dwelling** is a metaphor for a person’s physical body. Here a permanent “building from God” is a metaphor for the new body that God will give believers after they die. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2CO 5 1 zy2k figs-activepassive ἐὰν ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ 1 if the earthly dwelling that we live in is destroyed This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “if people destroy the earthly dwelling that we live in” or “if people kill our bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 5 21 ebz2 τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν 1 The one who did not know sin “Christ is the one who never sinned” 2CO 5 21 zm9e δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 the righteousness of God in him “God did this…the righteousness of God in Christ” 2CO 5 21 kmt9 figs-explicit ἵνα ἡμεῖς γενώμεθα δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 so that we might become the righteousness of God in him The phrase **the righteousness of God** refers to the righteousness that God requires and which comes from God. Alternate translation: “so that we might have God’s righteousness in us through Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2CO 6 intro f5qu 0 # 2 Corinthians 06 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 2 and 16-18, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Servants
Paul refers to Christians as servants of God. God calls Christians to serve him in all circumstances. Paul describes some of the difficult circumstances in which he and his companions served God.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Contrasts

Paul uses four pairs of contrasts: righteousness versus lawlessness, light versus darkness, Christ versus Satan, and the temple of God versus idols. These contrasts show a difference between Christians and non-Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]])

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions to teach his readers. All of these questions make essentially the same point: Christians should not intimately fellowship with those who live in sin. Paul repeats these questions for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### We

Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people. +2CO 6 intro f5qu 0 # 2 Corinthians 06 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 2 and 16-18, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Servants

Paul refers to Christians as servants of God. God calls Christians to serve him in all circumstances. Paul describes some of the difficult circumstances in which he and his companions served God.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Contrasts

Paul uses four pairs of contrasts: righteousness versus lawlessness, light versus darkness, Christ versus Satan, and the temple of God versus idols. These contrasts show a difference between Christians and non-Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]])

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions to teach his readers. All of these questions make essentially the same point: Christians should not intimately fellowship with those who live in sin. Paul repeats these questions for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### We

Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people. 2CO 6 1 in53 0 General Information: In verse 2, Paul quotes a portion from the prophet Isaiah. 2CO 6 1 kf1d 0 Connecting Statement: Paul summarizes how working together for God is supposed to be. 2CO 6 1 tbr6 figs-explicit συνεργοῦντες 1 Working together Paul is implying that he and Timothy are working with God. Alternate translation: “Working together with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 6 17 fe1z 0 General Information: Paul quotes portions from the Old Testament prophets, Isaiah and Ezekiel. 2CO 6 17 z5ld figs-activepassive ἀφορίσθητε 1 be separate This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “set yourselves apart” or “allow me to set you apart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 6 17 c8jq figs-doublenegatives ἀκαθάρτου μὴ ἅπτεσθε 1 Touch no unclean thing This can be stated in positive terms. Alternate translation: “Touch only things that are clean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -2CO 7 intro hg36 0 # 2 Corinthians 07 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In verses 2-4, Paul finishes his defense. He then writes about Titus’ return and the comfort it brought.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Clean and unclean

Christians are “clean” in the sense that God has cleansed them from sin. They do not need to be concerned with being clean according to the law of Moses. Ungodly living can still make a Christian unclean. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Sadness and sorrow
The words “sad” and “sorrow” in this chapter indicate that the Corinthians were upset to the point of repenting. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### We

Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.

### Original situation

This chapter discusses in detail a previous situation. We can figure out some aspects of this situation from the information in this chapter. But it is best not to include this type of implicit information in a translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2CO 7 intro hg36 0 # 2 Corinthians 07 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In verses 2-4, Paul finishes his defense. He then writes about Titus’ return and the comfort it brought.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Clean and unclean

Christians are “clean” in the sense that God has cleansed them from sin. They do not need to be concerned with being clean according to the law of Moses. Ungodly living can still make a Christian unclean. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Sadness and sorrow

The words “sad” and “sorrow” in this chapter indicate that the Corinthians were upset to the point of repenting. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### We

Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.

### Original situation

This chapter discusses in detail a previous situation. We can figure out some aspects of this situation from the information in this chapter. But it is best not to include this type of implicit information in a translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2CO 7 1 e7t9 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to remind them to be separated from sin and to seek holiness purposefully. 2CO 7 1 h5xv ἀγαπητοί 1 Beloved “You whom I love” or “Dear friends” 2CO 7 1 fv49 καθαρίσωμεν ἑαυτοὺς 1 let us cleanse ourselves Here Paul is saying to stay away from any form of sin that would affect one’s relationship with God. @@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 9 13 plj4 figs-activepassive διὰ τῆς δοκιμῆς τῆς διακονίας ταύτης 1 Because of the proof of this ministry This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Because this service has tested and proven you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 9 13 ze14 δοξάζοντες τὸν Θεὸν ἐπὶ τῇ ὑποταγῇ τῆς ὁμολογίας ὑμῶν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἁπλότητι τῆς κοινωνίας εἰς αὐτοὺς καὶ εἰς πάντας 1 they glorify God for your obedience…the generosity of your sharing with them and with everyone Paul says that the Corinthians will glorify God both by being faithful to Jesus and by giving generously to other believers who have need. 2CO 9 15 es8c ἐπὶ τῇ ἀνεκδιηγήτῳ αὐτοῦ δωρεᾷ 1 for his inexpressible gift “for his gift, which words cannot describe.” Possible meanings are (1) that this gift refers to “the very great grace” that God has given to the Corinthians, which has led them to be so generous or (2) that this gift refers to Jesus Christ, whom God gave to all believers. -2CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 2 Corinthians 10 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 17.

In this chapter, Paul returns to defending his authority. He also compares the way he speaks and the way he writes.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Boasting
“Boasting” is often thought of as bragging, which is not good. But in this letter “boasting” means confidently exulting or rejoicing.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

In verses 3-6, Paul uses many metaphors from war. He probably uses them as part of a larger metaphor about Christians being spiritually at war. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

“Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]]) +2CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 2 Corinthians 10 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 17.

In this chapter, Paul returns to defending his authority. He also compares the way he speaks and the way he writes.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Boasting

“Boasting” is often thought of as bragging, which is not good. But in this letter “boasting” means confidently exulting or rejoicing.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

In verses 3-6, Paul uses many metaphors from war. He probably uses them as part of a larger metaphor about Christians being spiritually at war. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

“Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]]) 2CO 10 1 yc1g 0 Connecting Statement: Paul shifts the subject from giving to affirming his authority to teach as he does. 2CO 10 1 gq7j figs-abstractnouns διὰ τῆς πραΰτητος καὶ ἐπιεικείας τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 by the meekness and gentleness of Christ The word **humility** and **gentleness** are abstract nouns, and can be expressed in another way. Alternate translation: “I am humble and gentle as I do so, because Christ has made me that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2CO 10 2 i6hh τοὺς λογιζομένους 1 those who regard “who think that” @@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 10 18 h81t ὁ ἑαυτὸν συνιστάνων 1 who commends himself This means that he provides enough evidence for each person who hears him to decide whether he is right or wrong. See how “recommend ourselves” is translated in [2 Corinthians 4:2](../04/02.md). 2CO 10 18 n5v6 figs-activepassive ἐστιν δόκιμος 1 is approved This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord approves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 10 18 sy2r figs-ellipsis ὃν ὁ Κύριος συνίστησιν 1 the one whom the Lord commends You can make clear the understood information. Alternate translation: “the one whom the Lord recommends is the one of whom the Lord approves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -2CO 11 intro abce 0 # 2 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul continues defending his authority.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### False teaching
The Corinthians were quick to accept false teachers. They taught things about Jesus and the gospel that were different and not true. Unlike these false teachers, Paul sacrificially served the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])

### Light
Light is commonly used in the New Testament as a metaphor. Paul here uses light to indicate the revealing of God and his righteousness. Darkness describes sin. Sin seeks to remain hidden from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Paul begins this chapter with an extended metaphor. He compares himself to the father of a bride who is giving a pure, virgin bride to her bridegroom. Wedding practices change depending on the cultural background. But the idea of helping to present someone as a grown and holy child is explicitly pictured in this passage. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Irony

This chapter is full of irony. Paul is hoping to shame the Corinthian believers with his irony.

“You tolerate these things well enough!” Paul thinks that they should not tolerate the way the false apostles treated them. Paul does not think they are really apostles at all.

The statement, “For you gladly put up with fools. You are wise yourselves!” means that the Corinthian believers think they were very wise but Paul does not agree.

“I will say to our shame that we were too weak to do that.” Paul is speaking about behavior he thinks is very wrong in order to avoid it. He is speaking as if he thinks he is wrong for not doing it. He uses a rhetorical question also as irony. “Did I sin by humbling myself so you might be exalted?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Rhetorical questions

In refuting the false apostles claiming to be superior, Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions. Each question is coupled with an answer: “Are they Hebrews? So am I. Are they Israelites? So am I. Are they descendants of Abraham? So am I. Are they servants of Christ? (I speak as though I were out of my mind.) I am more.”

He also uses a series of rhetorical questions to empathize with his converts: “Who is weak, and I am not weak? Who has caused another to fall into sin, and I do not burn within?”

### “Are they servants of Christ?”
This is sarcasm, a special type of irony used to mock or insult. Paul does not believe these false teachers actually serve Christ, only that they pretend to do so.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in verse 30 is a paradox: “If I must boast, I will boast about what shows my weaknesses.” Paul does not explain why he would boast in his weakness until 2 Corinthians 12:9. ([2 Corinthians 11:30](./30.md)) +2CO 11 intro abce 0 # 2 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul continues defending his authority.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### False teaching

The Corinthians were quick to accept false teachers. They taught things about Jesus and the gospel that were different and not true. Unlike these false teachers, Paul sacrificially served the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])

### Light

Light is commonly used in the New Testament as a metaphor. Paul here uses light to indicate the revealing of God and his righteousness. Darkness describes sin. Sin seeks to remain hidden from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Paul begins this chapter with an extended metaphor. He compares himself to the father of a bride who is giving a pure, virgin bride to her bridegroom. Wedding practices change depending on the cultural background. But the idea of helping to present someone as a grown and holy child is explicitly pictured in this passage. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Irony

This chapter is full of irony. Paul is hoping to shame the Corinthian believers with his irony.

“You tolerate these things well enough!” Paul thinks that they should not tolerate the way the false apostles treated them. Paul does not think they are really apostles at all.

The statement, “For you gladly put up with fools. You are wise yourselves!” means that the Corinthian believers think they were very wise but Paul does not agree.

“I will say to our shame that we were too weak to do that.” Paul is speaking about behavior he thinks is very wrong in order to avoid it. He is speaking as if he thinks he is wrong for not doing it. He uses a rhetorical question also as irony. “Did I sin by humbling myself so you might be exalted?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Rhetorical questions

In refuting the false apostles claiming to be superior, Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions. Each question is coupled with an answer: “Are they Hebrews? So am I. Are they Israelites? So am I. Are they descendants of Abraham? So am I. Are they servants of Christ? (I speak as though I were out of my mind.) I am more.”

He also uses a series of rhetorical questions to empathize with his converts: “Who is weak, and I am not weak? Who has caused another to fall into sin, and I do not burn within?”

### “Are they servants of Christ?”

This is sarcasm, a special type of irony used to mock or insult. Paul does not believe these false teachers actually serve Christ, only that they pretend to do so.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in verse 30 is a paradox: “If I must boast, I will boast about what shows my weaknesses.” Paul does not explain why he would boast in his weakness until 2 Corinthians 12:9. ([2 Corinthians 11:30](./30.md)) 2CO 11 1 t7ks 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to affirm his apostleship. 2CO 11 1 r4q6 ἀνείχεσθέ μου μικρόν τι ἀφροσύνης 1 bear with me in a little bit of foolishness “allow me to act like a fool” 2CO 11 2 m6vl ζηλῶ…ζήλῳ 1 jealous…jealousy These words speak of a good, strong desire that the Corinthians be faithful to Christ, and that no one should persuade them to leave him. @@ -538,7 +538,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 11 32 j7de πιάσαι με 1 to arrest me “so that they might catch and arrest me” 2CO 11 33 i8xa figs-activepassive ἐν σαργάνῃ, ἐχαλάσθην 1 I was lowered in a basket This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “some people put me in a basket and lowered me to the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 11 33 aw7d figs-metonymy τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῦ 1 from his hands Paul uses the governor’s hands as metonymy for the governor. Alternate translation: “from the governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2CO 12 intro abcf 0 # 2 Corinthians 12 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul continues defending his authority in this chapter.

When Paul was with the Corinthians, he proved himself to be an apostle by his powerful deeds. He had not ever taken anything from them. Now that he is coming for the third time, he will still not take anything. He hopes that when he visits, he will not need to be harsh with them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Paul’s vision

Paul now defends his authority by telling about a wonderful vision of heaven. Although he speaks in the third person in verses 2-5, verse 7 indicates that he was the person who experienced the vision. It was so great, God gave him a physical handicap to keep him humble. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])

### Third heaven
Many scholars believe the “third” heaven is the dwelling place of God. This is because Scripture also uses “heaven” to refer to the sky (the “first” heaven) and the universe (the “second” heaven).

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses many rhetorical questions as he defends himself against his enemies who accused him: “For how were you less important than the rest of the churches, except that I was not a burden to you?” “Did Titus take advantage of you? Did we not walk in the same way? Did we not walk in the same steps?” and “Do you think all of this time we have been defending ourselves to you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Sarcasm

Paul uses sarcasm, a special type of irony, when he reminds them how he had helped them at no cost. He says, “Forgive me for this wrong!” He also uses regular irony when he says: “But, since I am so crafty, I am the one who caught you by deceit.” He uses it to introduce his defense against this accusation by showing how impossible it was to be true. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in verse 5 is a paradox: “I will not boast, except about my weaknesses.” Most people do not boast about being weak. This sentence in verse 10 is also a paradox: “For whenever I am weak, then I am strong.” In verse 9, Paul explains why both of these statements are true. ([2 Corinthians 12:5](./05.md)) +2CO 12 intro abcf 0 # 2 Corinthians 12 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul continues defending his authority in this chapter.

When Paul was with the Corinthians, he proved himself to be an apostle by his powerful deeds. He had not ever taken anything from them. Now that he is coming for the third time, he will still not take anything. He hopes that when he visits, he will not need to be harsh with them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Paul’s vision

Paul now defends his authority by telling about a wonderful vision of heaven. Although he speaks in the third person in verses 2-5, verse 7 indicates that he was the person who experienced the vision. It was so great, God gave him a physical handicap to keep him humble. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])

### Third heaven

Many scholars believe the “third” heaven is the dwelling place of God. This is because Scripture also uses “heaven” to refer to the sky (the “first” heaven) and the universe (the “second” heaven).

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses many rhetorical questions as he defends himself against his enemies who accused him: “For how were you less important than the rest of the churches, except that I was not a burden to you?” “Did Titus take advantage of you? Did we not walk in the same way? Did we not walk in the same steps?” and “Do you think all of this time we have been defending ourselves to you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Sarcasm

Paul uses sarcasm, a special type of irony, when he reminds them how he had helped them at no cost. He says, “Forgive me for this wrong!” He also uses regular irony when he says: “But, since I am so crafty, I am the one who caught you by deceit.” He uses it to introduce his defense against this accusation by showing how impossible it was to be true. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in verse 5 is a paradox: “I will not boast, except about my weaknesses.” Most people do not boast about being weak. This sentence in verse 10 is also a paradox: “For whenever I am weak, then I am strong.” In verse 9, Paul explains why both of these statements are true. ([2 Corinthians 12:5](./05.md)) 2CO 12 1 iwn3 0 Connecting Statement: In defending his apostleship from God, Paul continues to state specific things that have happened to him since he became a believer. 2CO 12 1 iur3 ἐλεύσομαι 1 I will go on to “I will continue talking, but now about” 2CO 12 1 rb42 figs-hendiadys ὀπτασίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεις Κυρίου 1 visions and revelations from the Lord Possible meanings are (1) Paul uses the words **visions** and **revelations** to mean the same thing in hendiadys for emphasis. Alternate translation: “things that the Lord has allowed only me to see” or (2) Paul is speaking of two different things. Alternate translation: “secret things that the Lord has let me see with my eyes and other secrets that he has told me about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) @@ -606,7 +606,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 12 21 rh22 figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ 1 of the impurity The abstract noun impurity can be translated as “things that do not please God.” Alternate translation: “of secretly thinking about and desiring things that do not please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2CO 12 21 rn6u figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ…πορνείᾳ 1 of the…sexual immorality The abstract noun “immorality” can be translated as “immoral deeds.” Alternate translation: “of doing sexually immoral deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2CO 12 21 yyr5 figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ…ἀσελγείᾳ 1 of the…lustful indulgence The abstract noun “indulgence” can be translated using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “of…doing things that satisfy immoral sexual desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2CO 13 intro abcg 0 # 2 Corinthians 13 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul finishes defending his authority. He then concludes the letter with a final greeting and blessing.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Preparation
Paul instructs the Corinthians as he prepares to visit them. He is hoping to avoid needing to discipline anyone in the church so he can visit them joyfully. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Power and weakness
Paul repeatedly uses the contrasting words “power” and “weakness” in this chapter. The translator should use words that are understood to be opposites of each other.

### “Examine yourselves to see if you are in the faith. Test yourselves.”
Scholars are divided over what these sentences mean. Some scholars say that Christians are to test themselves to see whether their actions align with their Christian faith. The context favors this understanding. Others say these sentences mean that Christians should look at their actions and question whether they are genuinely saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) +2CO 13 intro abcg 0 # 2 Corinthians 13 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul finishes defending his authority. He then concludes the letter with a final greeting and blessing.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Preparation

Paul instructs the Corinthians as he prepares to visit them. He is hoping to avoid needing to discipline anyone in the church so he can visit them joyfully. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Power and weakness

Paul repeatedly uses the contrasting words “power” and “weakness” in this chapter. The translator should use words that are understood to be opposites of each other.

### “Examine yourselves to see if you are in the faith. Test yourselves.”

Scholars are divided over what these sentences mean. Some scholars say that Christians are to test themselves to see whether their actions align with their Christian faith. The context favors this understanding. Others say these sentences mean that Christians should look at their actions and question whether they are genuinely saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) 2CO 13 1 y8fz 0 Connecting Statement: Paul establishes that Christ is speaking through him and that Paul is wanting to restore them, encourage them, and unify them. 2CO 13 1 slj1 figs-activepassive ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων καὶ τριῶν σταθήσεται πᾶν ῥῆμα 1 Every matter must be established by the evidence of two or three witnesses This can be stated as active. Alternate translation: “Believe that someone has done something wrong only after two or three people have said the same thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 13 2 fxl6 τοῖς λοιποῖς πᾶσιν 1 all the rest “all you other people” diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 2b8406ae39..4b1fe029aa 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -GAL front intro i6u9 0 # Introduction to Galatians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Galatians

1. Paul declares his authority as an apostle of Jesus Christ; he says that he is surprised by the false teachings that the Christians in Galatia have accepted from other people (1:1-10).
1. Paul says that people are saved by trusting in Christ alone, not by keeping the law (1:11-2:21).
1. God puts people right with himself only when they trust in Christ; the example of Abraham; the curse which the law brings (and not a means of salvation); slavery and freedom compared and illustrated by Hagar and Sarah (3:1-4:31).
1. When people are joined to Christ, they become free from having to keep the law of Moses. They are also free to live as the Holy Spirit guides them. They are free to refuse the demands of sin. They are free to bear each other’s burdens (5:1-6:10).
1. Paul warns the Christians not to trust in being circumcised and in keeping the law of Moses. Instead, they must trust in Christ (6:11-18).

### Who wrote the Book of Galatians?

Paul from the city of Tarsus was the author. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he began to trust in Jesus Christ, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

It is uncertain when Paul wrote this letter and where he was when he wrote it. Some scholars think Paul was in the city of Ephesus and wrote this letter after the second time he traveled to tell people about Jesus. Other scholars think Paul was in the city of Antioch in Syria and wrote the letter soon after the first time he traveled.

### What is the Book of Galatians about?

Paul wrote this letter to both Jewish and non-Jewish Christians in the region of Galatia. He wanted to write against the false teachers who said that Christians need to follow the law of Moses. Paul defended the gospel by explaining that a person is saved by believing in Jesus Christ. People are saved as result of God being kind and not as a result of people doing good works. No person can perfectly obey the law. Any attempt to please God by obeying the law of Moses will only result in God condemning them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]])

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Galatians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Galatia.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What does it mean to “live like Jews” (2:14)?

To “live like Jews” means to obey the law of Moses, even though one trusts in Christ. The people among the early Christians who taught that this was necessary were called “Judaizers.”

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How did Paul use the terms “law” and “grace” in the Book of Galatians?

These terms are used in a unique way in Galatians. There is an important teaching in Galatians about Christian living. Under the law of Moses, righteous or holy living required a person to obey a set of rules and regulations. As Christians, holy living is now motivated by grace. This means that Christians have freedom in Christ and are not required to obey a specific set of rules. Instead, Christians are to live a holy life because they are thankful that God has been so kind to them. This is called “the law of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:22; 2:4, 17; 3:14, 26, 28; 5:6, 10. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “when we seek for God to justify us in Christ” (2:17), where Paul spoke of being justified by means of Christ.

Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Galatians?

* “Foolish Galatians, whose evil eye has harmed you? Was not Jesus Christ depicted as crucified before your eyes” (3:1)? The ULT, UST, and the other modern versions have this reading. However, older versions of the Bible add, “[so] that ye should not obey the truth.” Translators are advised not to include this expression. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have the passage, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -GAL 1 intro f3n5 0 # Galatians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul started this letter differently than his other letters. He adds that he was “not an apostle from men nor by human agency, but through Jesus Christ and God the Father, who raised him from the dead ones.” Paul probably included these words because false teachers were opposing him and trying to undermine his authority.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Heresy
God eternally saves people only through the true, biblical gospel. God condemns any other version of the gospel. Paul asks God to curse those who teach a false gospel. They might not be saved. They should be treated as non-Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/curse]])

### Paul’s qualifications

Some people in the early church were teaching that Gentiles needed to obey the law of Moses. To refute this teaching, in verses 13-16 Paul explains how he was formerly a zealous Jew. But God still needed to save him and show him the true gospel. As a Jew, and the apostle to Gentile people, Paul was uniquely qualified to address this issue. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “You are turning so quickly to a different gospel”
The Book of Galatians is one of Paul’s earliest letters in Scripture. It shows that heresies troubled even the early church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL front intro i6u9 0 # Introduction to Galatians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Galatians

1. Paul declares his authority as an apostle of Jesus Christ; he says that he is surprised by the false teachings that the Christians in Galatia have accepted from other people (1:1-10).
1. Paul says that people are saved by trusting in Christ alone, not by keeping the law (1:11-2:21).
1. God puts people right with himself only when they trust in Christ; the example of Abraham; the curse which the law brings (and not a means of salvation); slavery and freedom compared and illustrated by Hagar and Sarah (3:1-4:31).
1. When people are joined to Christ, they become free from having to keep the law of Moses. They are also free to live as the Holy Spirit guides them. They are free to refuse the demands of sin. They are free to bear each other’s burdens (5:1-6:10).
1. Paul warns the Christians not to trust in being circumcised and in keeping the law of Moses. Instead, they must trust in Christ (6:11-18).

### Who wrote the Book of Galatians?

Paul from the city of Tarsus was the author. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he began to trust in Jesus Christ, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

It is uncertain when Paul wrote this letter and where he was when he wrote it. Some scholars think Paul was in the city of Ephesus and wrote this letter after the second time he traveled to tell people about Jesus. Other scholars think Paul was in the city of Antioch in Syria and wrote the letter soon after the first time he traveled.

### What is the Book of Galatians about?

Paul wrote this letter to both Jewish and non-Jewish Christians in the region of Galatia. He wanted to write against the false teachers who said that Christians need to follow the law of Moses. Paul defended the gospel by explaining that a person is saved by believing in Jesus Christ. People are saved as result of God being kind and not as a result of people doing good works. No person can perfectly obey the law. Any attempt to please God by obeying the law of Moses will only result in God condemning them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]])

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Galatians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Galatia.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What does it mean to “live like Jews” (2:14)?

To “live like Jews” means to obey the law of Moses, even though one trusts in Christ. The people among the early Christians who taught that this was necessary were called “Judaizers.”

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How did Paul use the terms “law” and “grace” in the Book of Galatians?

These terms are used in a unique way in Galatians. There is an important teaching in Galatians about Christian living. Under the law of Moses, righteous or holy living required a person to obey a set of rules and regulations. As Christians, holy living is now motivated by grace. This means that Christians have freedom in Christ and are not required to obey a specific set of rules. Instead, Christians are to live a holy life because they are thankful that God has been so kind to them. This is called “the law of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:22; 2:4, 17; 3:14, 26, 28; 5:6, 10. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “when we seek for God to justify us in Christ” (2:17), where Paul spoke of being justified by means of Christ.

Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Galatians?
* “Foolish Galatians, whose evil eye has harmed you? Was not Jesus Christ depicted as crucified before your eyes” (3:1)? The ULT, UST, and the other modern versions have this reading. However, older versions of the Bible add, “[so] that ye should not obey the truth.” Translators are advised not to include this expression. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have the passage, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +GAL 1 intro f3n5 0 # Galatians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul started this letter differently than his other letters. He adds that he was “not an apostle from men nor by human agency, but through Jesus Christ and God the Father, who raised him from the dead ones.” Paul probably included these words because false teachers were opposing him and trying to undermine his authority.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Heresy

God eternally saves people only through the true, biblical gospel. God condemns any other version of the gospel. Paul asks God to curse those who teach a false gospel. They might not be saved. They should be treated as non-Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/curse]])

### Paul’s qualifications

Some people in the early church were teaching that Gentiles needed to obey the law of Moses. To refute this teaching, in verses 13-16 Paul explains how he was formerly a zealous Jew. But God still needed to save him and show him the true gospel. As a Jew, and the apostle to Gentile people, Paul was uniquely qualified to address this issue. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “You are turning so quickly to a different gospel”

The Book of Galatians is one of Paul’s earliest letters in Scripture. It shows that heresies troubled even the early church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 1 1 m4ss figs-you 0 General Information: Paul, an apostle, writes this letter to the churches in the area of Galatia. Unless noted otherwise, all instances of “you” and “your” in this letter refer to the Galatians and are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) GAL 1 1 d1kd τοῦ ἐγείραντος αὐτὸν 1 the one who raised him “the one who caused him to live again” GAL 1 2 d737 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women, since all believers in Christ are members of one spiritual family, with God as their heavenly Father. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states GAL 2 21 yl3c figs-hypo εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness is through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is describing a situation that never existed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) GAL 2 21 k6bg εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη 1 if righteousness is through the law “if people could become righteous by obeying the law” GAL 2 21 rku5 ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 then Christ died for nothing “then Christ would have accomplished nothing by dying” -GAL 3 intro xd92 0 # Galatians 03 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Equality in Christ
All Christians are equally united to Christ. Ancestry, gender, and status do not matter. All are equal with each other. All are equal in the eyes of God.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions
Paul uses many different rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to convince the Galatians of their sin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh
This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. “Flesh” is used in this chapter to contrast with that which is spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

### “Those of faith are children of Abraham”
Scholars are divided on what this means. Some believe Christians inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham, so Christians replace the physical descendants of Israel. Others believe Christians spiritually follow Abraham, but they do not inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham. In light of Paul’s other teachings and the context here, Paul is probably writing about the Jewish and Gentile Christians sharing the same faith as Abraham did. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 3 intro xd92 0 # Galatians 03 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Equality in Christ

All Christians are equally united to Christ. Ancestry, gender, and status do not matter. All are equal with each other. All are equal in the eyes of God.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul uses many different rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to convince the Galatians of their sin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. “Flesh” is used in this chapter to contrast with that which is spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

### “Those of faith are children of Abraham”

Scholars are divided on what this means. Some believe Christians inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham, so Christians replace the physical descendants of Israel. Others believe Christians spiritually follow Abraham, but they do not inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham. In light of Paul’s other teachings and the context here, Paul is probably writing about the Jewish and Gentile Christians sharing the same faith as Abraham did. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 3 1 p7uw 0 General Information: Paul is rebuking the Galatians by asking rhetorical questions. GAL 3 1 x4gd 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds the believers in Galatia that God gave them God’s Spirit when they believed the gospel by faith, not by their doing God’s law. GAL 3 1 ryu7 figs-irony τίς ὑμᾶς ἐβάσκανεν, οἷς κατ’ ὀφθαλμοὺς Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς προεγράφη ἐσταυρωμένος? 1 Who bewitched you, before whose eyes Jesus Christ was publicly portrayed as crucified? Paul is using irony. He does not really believe that someone has put a spell on the Galatians. Alternate translation: “Why are you behaving as if someone has put a spell on you, even though it was clearly described to you how Jesus Christ was crucified?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ GAL 3 27 v6n1 ὅσοι γὰρ εἰς Χριστὸν ἐβαπτίσθητε GAL 3 27 di9v figs-metaphor Χριστὸν ἐνεδύσασθε 1 have put on Christ Possible meanings are (1) this is a metaphor meaning that they have been united to Christ. Alternate translation: “have become united with Christ” or “belong to Christ” or (2) this is a metaphor meaning that they have become like Christ. Alternate translation: “have become like Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 3 28 tyb8 οὐκ ἔνι Ἰουδαῖος οὐδὲ Ἕλλην, οὐκ ἔνι δοῦλος οὐδὲ ἐλεύθερος, οὐκ ἔνι ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ 1 There is neither Jew nor Greek, there is neither slave nor free, there is neither male nor female “God sees no difference between Jew and Greek, slave and free, male and female” GAL 3 29 qp4z figs-metaphor κληρονόμοι 1 heirs The people to whom God has made promises are spoken of as if they were to inherit property and wealth from a family member. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -GAL 4 intro h6gw 0 # Galatians 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 27, which is quoted from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sonship
Sonship is a complex issue. Scholars have many views on Israel’s sonship. Paul uses sonship to teach how being under the law differs from being free in Christ. Not all of Abraham’s physical descendants inherited God’s promises to him. Only his descendants through Isaac and Jacob inherited the promises. And God only adopts into his family those who follow Abraham spiritually through faith. They are children of God with an inheritance. Paul calls them “children of promise.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inherit]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Abba, Father
“Abba” is an Aramaic word. In ancient Israel, people used it to informally refer to their fathers. Paul “transliterates” its sounds by writing them with Greek letters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) +GAL 4 intro h6gw 0 # Galatians 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 27, which is quoted from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sonship

Sonship is a complex issue. Scholars have many views on Israel’s sonship. Paul uses sonship to teach how being under the law differs from being free in Christ. Not all of Abraham’s physical descendants inherited God’s promises to him. Only his descendants through Isaac and Jacob inherited the promises. And God only adopts into his family those who follow Abraham spiritually through faith. They are children of God with an inheritance. Paul calls them “children of promise.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inherit]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Abba, Father
“Abba” is an Aramaic word. In ancient Israel, people used it to informally refer to their fathers. Paul “transliterates” its sounds by writing them with Greek letters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) GAL 4 1 fr5u 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to remind the Galatian believers that Christ came to redeem those who were under the law, and that he made them no more slaves but sons. GAL 4 1 n5yb οὐδὲν διαφέρει 1 he is no different from “he is the same as” GAL 4 2 bd5a ἐπιτρόπους 1 guardians people with legal responsibility for children @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ GAL 4 29 c9lf figs-metaphor κατὰ σάρκα 1 according to the flesh This r GAL 4 29 gt1e κατὰ Πνεῦμα 1 according to the Spirit “because of something the Spirit did” GAL 4 31 sy8u ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated this in [Galatians 1:2](../01/02.md). GAL 4 31 y3c2 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τῆς ἐλευθέρας 1 but of the free woman The words “we are children” are understood from the previous phrase. This can be translated as a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “rather, we are children of the free woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -GAL 5 intro bcg3 0 # Galatians 05 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul continues writing about the law of Moses as something that traps or enslaves a person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Fruit of the Spirit
The phrase “the fruit of the Spirit” is not plural, even though it begins a list of several things. Translators should keep the singular form if possible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Illustrations
Paul uses several metaphors in this chapter to illustrate his points and help explain complicated issues. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “You are cut off from Christ, you who would be justified by the law; you no longer experience grace.”
Some scholars think Paul teaches that being circumcised causes a person to lose their salvation. Other scholars think Paul means that obeying the law to try to get right with God will keep a person from being saved by grace. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]]) +GAL 5 intro bcg3 0 # Galatians 05 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul continues writing about the law of Moses as something that traps or enslaves a person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Fruit of the Spirit

The phrase “the fruit of the Spirit” is not plural, even though it begins a list of several things. Translators should keep the singular form if possible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Illustrations

Paul uses several metaphors in this chapter to illustrate his points and help explain complicated issues. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “You are cut off from Christ, you who would be justified by the law; you no longer experience grace.”

Some scholars think Paul teaches that being circumcised causes a person to lose their salvation. Other scholars think Paul means that obeying the law to try to get right with God will keep a person from being saved by grace. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]]) GAL 5 1 up16 0 Connecting Statement: Paul applies the allegory by reminding the believers to use their liberty in Christ because all the law is fulfilled in loving neighbors as ourselves. GAL 5 1 kuu9 figs-explicit τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ, ἡμᾶς Χριστὸς ἠλευθέρωσεν 1 For freedom Christ has set us free “It is so that we can be free that Christ has set us free.” It is implied that **Christ** sets believers **free** from the old covenant. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 5 1 xd2m figs-metaphor τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ, ἡμᾶς Χριστὸς ἠλευθέρωσεν 1 For freedom Christ has set us free Here, **freedom** from the old covenant is a metaphor for not being obligated to obey it. Alternate translation: “Christ has set us free from the old covenant so that we might be free” or “Christ has set us free so that we might live as free people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ GAL 5 24 m3nm figs-personification τὴν σάρκα…σὺν τοῖς παθ GAL 5 25 h9hd εἰ ζῶμεν Πνεύματι 1 If we live by the Spirit “Since God’s Spirit has caused us to be alive” GAL 5 25 sq7b figs-metaphor Πνεύματι καὶ στοιχῶμεν 1 let us also walk by the Spirit Here, **walk** is a metaphor for living every day. Alternate translation: “let us allow the Holy Spirit to guide us so we do things that please and honor God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 5 26 a9x9 μὴ γινώμεθα 1 Let us not become “We should not be” -GAL 6 intro bv8h 0 # Galatians 06 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter concludes Paul’s letter. His final words address some issues that do not seem to be connected to the rest of his letter.

### Brothers
Paul writes the words in this chapter to Christians. He calls them “brothers.” This refers to Paul’s Christian brothers and not his Jewish brothers.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### New Creation

People who are born again are a new creation in Christ. Christians have been given new life in Christ. They have a new nature in them after they come to faith in Christ. To Paul, this is more significant than a person’s ancestry. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is contrasted with “spirit.” In this chapter, flesh is also used to refer to the physical body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]]) +GAL 6 intro bv8h 0 # Galatians 06 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter concludes Paul’s letter. His final words address some issues that do not seem to be connected to the rest of his letter.

### Brothers

Paul writes the words in this chapter to Christians. He calls them “brothers.” This refers to Paul’s Christian brothers and not his Jewish brothers.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### New Creation

People who are born again are a new creation in Christ. Christians have been given new life in Christ. They have a new nature in them after they come to faith in Christ. To Paul, this is more significant than a person’s ancestry. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is contrasted with “spirit.” In this chapter, flesh is also used to refer to the physical body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]]) GAL 6 1 x8zg 0 Connecting Statement: Paul teaches believers how they should treat other believers and how God rewards. GAL 6 1 ss7l ἀδελφοί 1 Brothers See how you translated this in [Galatians 1:2](../01/02.md). GAL 6 1 vm8f ἐὰν…ἄνθρωπος 1 if a man “if anyone among you” diff --git a/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv b/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv index af089d3902..2212fd2e74 100644 --- a/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -EPH front intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of Ephesians

1. Greeting and prayer for the spiritual blessings in Christ (1:1-23)
1. Sin and salvation (2:1-10)
1. Unity and peace (2:11-22)
1. Mystery of Christ in the believers, made known (3:1-13)
1. Prayer for riches of his glory to make the believers strong (3:14-21)
1. Unity of the Spirit, building up the Body of Christ (4:1-16)
1. New life (4:17-32)
1. Imitators of God (5:1-21)
1. 1 Wives and husbands; children and parents; slaves and masters (5:22-6:9)
11. Armor of God (6:10-20)
1. Final greeting (6:21-24)

### Who wrote the Book of Ephesians?

Paul wrote Ephesians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

The Apostle Paul helped start the church in Ephesus on one of his trips. He also lived in Ephesus for a year and a half and helped the believers there. Paul probably wrote this letter while he was in prison in Rome.

### What is the Book of Ephesians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Ephesus to explain God’s love for them in Christ Jesus. He described the blessings that God was giving them because they were now united with Christ. He explained that all believers are united together, whether Jew or Gentile. Paul also wanted to encourage them to live in a way that pleases God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Ephesians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Ephesus” or “A Letter to the Christians in Ephesus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the “mystery” in the book of Ephesians?

The expression translated in the ULT as “mystery” or “hidden” occurs six times. By it, Paul always meant something that God had to reveal to human beings because they could not know it on their own. It always referred to something about how God planned to save mankind. Sometimes it was about his plan to bring about peace between himself and mankind. Sometimes it was more specifically about his plan to save both Jews and Gentiles by uniting them through Christ. This hidden truth was that Gentiles are now able to benefit from the promises of Christ as equals with the Jews.

### What did Paul say about salvation and righteous living?

Paul said much about salvation and righteous living in this letter and in many of his letters. He said that God has been very kind and saved Christians because they believe in Jesus. Therefore, after they become Christians, they should live in a righteous way to show that they have faith in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers who may read this letter. The three exceptions to this are: 5:14, 6:2, and 6:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What did Paul mean by the “new self” or the “new man”?

When Paul spoke of the “new self” or the “new man,” he meant the new nature that a believer receives from the Holy Spirit. This new nature was created in God’s image (See: 4:24). The phrase “new man” is also used for God bringing about peace between Jews and Gentiles. God brought them together as one people group that belong to him (See: 2:15).

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Ephesians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of several ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:

* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the use of “holy” to express the fact that God views Christians as sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another use of “holy” is to express the idea that God is perfect and faultless. A third use is to express the idea that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “saints.” (See: 1:1, 4)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “saint” or “saints.”
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.” (See: 3:5)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 20; 2:6, 7, 10, 13, 15, 16, 18, 21, 22; 3:5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 21; 4:1, 17, 21, 32; 5:8, 18, 19; 6:1, 10, 18, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Ephesians?

* “in Ephesus” (1:1). Some of the earliest manuscripts do not include this phrase. It is likely that Paul intended this letter to be read in many churches, including Ephesus and many other cities. He may have originally left a blank space for the city name to be filled in by those copying the letter and carrying it to different cities. But “Ephesus” is the only name found on manuscripts that have a city name. Therefore, the ULT, UST, and many modern versions include it.
* “because we are members of his body” (5:30). Most modern versions, including the ULT and UST, read in this way. Some older versions read, “because we are members of his body and of his bones.” Translators might decide to choose the second reading if other versions in their area have it that way. If translators choose the second reading, they should put the additional words inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they are probably not original to the book of Ephesians.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -EPH 1 intro fg42 0 # Ephesians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

### “I pray”

Paul structures part of this chapter like a prayer of praise to God. But Paul is not just talking to God. He is teaching the church in Ephesus. He also tells the Ephesians how he is praying for them.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Predestination
Many scholars believe this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” See the use of the word “predestine” in 1:5, 11. Some scholars take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject, so translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]]) +EPH front intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of Ephesians

1. Greeting and prayer for the spiritual blessings in Christ (1:1-23)
1. Sin and salvation (2:1-10)
1. Unity and peace (2:11-22)
1. Mystery of Christ in the believers, made known (3:1-13)
1. Prayer for riches of his glory to make the believers strong (3:14-21)
1. Unity of the Spirit, building up the Body of Christ (4:1-16)
1. New life (4:17-32)
1. Imitators of God (5:1-21)
1. 1 Wives and husbands; children and parents; slaves and masters (5:22-6:9)
11. Armor of God (6:10-20)
1. Final greeting (6:21-24)

### Who wrote the Book of Ephesians?

Paul wrote Ephesians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

The Apostle Paul helped start the church in Ephesus on one of his trips. He also lived in Ephesus for a year and a half and helped the believers there. Paul probably wrote this letter while he was in prison in Rome.

### What is the Book of Ephesians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Ephesus to explain God’s love for them in Christ Jesus. He described the blessings that God was giving them because they were now united with Christ. He explained that all believers are united together, whether Jew or Gentile. Paul also wanted to encourage them to live in a way that pleases God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Ephesians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Ephesus” or “A Letter to the Christians in Ephesus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the “mystery” in the book of Ephesians?

The expression translated in the ULT as “mystery” or “hidden” occurs six times. By it, Paul always meant something that God had to reveal to human beings because they could not know it on their own. It always referred to something about how God planned to save mankind. Sometimes it was about his plan to bring about peace between himself and mankind. Sometimes it was more specifically about his plan to save both Jews and Gentiles by uniting them through Christ. This hidden truth was that Gentiles are now able to benefit from the promises of Christ as equals with the Jews.

### What did Paul say about salvation and righteous living?

Paul said much about salvation and righteous living in this letter and in many of his letters. He said that God has been very kind and saved Christians because they believe in Jesus. Therefore, after they become Christians, they should live in a righteous way to show that they have faith in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers who may read this letter. The three exceptions to this are: 5:14, 6:2, and 6:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What did Paul mean by the “new self” or the “new man”?

When Paul spoke of the “new self” or the “new man,” he meant the new nature that a believer receives from the Holy Spirit. This new nature was created in God’s image (See: 4:24). The phrase “new man” is also used for God bringing about peace between Jews and Gentiles. God brought them together as one people group that belong to him (See: 2:15).

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Ephesians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of several ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the use of “holy” to express the fact that God views Christians as sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another use of “holy” is to express the idea that God is perfect and faultless. A third use is to express the idea that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “saints.” (See: 1:1, 4)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “saint” or “saints.”
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.” (See: 3:5)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 20; 2:6, 7, 10, 13, 15, 16, 18, 21, 22; 3:5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 21; 4:1, 17, 21, 32; 5:8, 18, 19; 6:1, 10, 18, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Ephesians?
* “in Ephesus” (1:1). Some of the earliest manuscripts do not include this phrase. It is likely that Paul intended this letter to be read in many churches, including Ephesus and many other cities. He may have originally left a blank space for the city name to be filled in by those copying the letter and carrying it to different cities. But “Ephesus” is the only name found on manuscripts that have a city name. Therefore, the ULT, UST, and many modern versions include it.
* “because we are members of his body” (5:30). Most modern versions, including the ULT and UST, read in this way. Some older versions read, “because we are members of his body and of his bones.” Translators might decide to choose the second reading if other versions in their area have it that way. If translators choose the second reading, they should put the additional words inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they are probably not original to the book of Ephesians.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +EPH 1 intro fg42 0 # Ephesians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

### “I pray”

Paul structures part of this chapter like a prayer of praise to God. But Paul is not just talking to God. He is teaching the church in Ephesus. He also tells the Ephesians how he is praying for them.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Predestination

Many scholars believe this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” See the use of the word “predestine” in 1:5, 11. Some scholars take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject, so translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]]) EPH 1 1 kx1g figs-you 0 General Information: Paul names himself as the writer of this letter to the believers in the church at Ephesus (and elsewhere). Except where noted, all instances of “you” and “your” refer to the Ephesian believers as well as to all believers, and so are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EPH 1 1 ilf2 Παῦλος, ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ…τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν 1 Paul, an apostle of Christ Jesus … to the saints who are Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and the intended audience. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, an apostle of Jesus Christ … write this letter to you, God’s holy people” EPH 1 1 u73p figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in Christ Jesus The phrase **in Christ Jesus** and similar expressions are metaphors that frequently occur in the New Testament letters. They express the strongest kind of relationship possible between Christ and those who believe in him, picturing believers as being surrounded by Christ. Alternate Translation: “in close relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ EPH 2 21 ljt5 figs-metaphor ἐν ᾧ…ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 In whom … in the L EPH 2 22 u55j figs-metaphor ἐν ᾧ 1 in whom This can be translated as “in Christ,” which is a metaphor that expresses the strongest kind of relationship possible between Christ and those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EPH 2 22 b4c8 figs-metaphor καὶ ὑμεῖς συνοικοδομεῖσθε, εἰς κατοικητήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν Πνεύματι 1 you also are being built together as a dwelling place for God in the Spirit This describes how believers are being put together to become a **place** where **God** will permanently live through the power of the Holy **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “you also are being joined to this group where God lives by his Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EPH 2 22 e52h figs-activepassive καὶ ὑμεῖς συνοικοδομεῖσθε 1 you also are being built together This can be stated as active. Alternate translation: “God is also building you together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EPH 3 intro gha7 0 # Ephesians 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

### “I pray”

Paul structures part of this chapter as a prayer to God. But Paul is not just talking to God. He is both praying for and instructing the church in Ephesus.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Mystery
Paul refers to the church as a “mystery.” The role of the church in the plans of God was once not known. But God has now revealed it. Part of this mystery involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. +EPH 3 intro gha7 0 # Ephesians 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

### “I pray”

Paul structures part of this chapter as a prayer to God. But Paul is not just talking to God. He is both praying for and instructing the church in Ephesus.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Mystery

Paul refers to the church as a “mystery.” The role of the church in the plans of God was once not known. But God has now revealed it. Part of this mystery involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. EPH 3 1 w896 0 Connecting Statement: To make clear the hidden truth about the church to believers, Paul refers back to the oneness of Jews and Gentiles and how believers from both groups form part of the one group that worships God, like the stones that form one temple. EPH 3 1 jb9u grammar-connect-logic-result τούτου χάριν 1 For this reason The connecting phrase **For this reason** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is what Paul talked about in Chapter 2, that Christ showed his grace by removing the division between Jews and Gentiles and making them into one group. The result is that Paul prays for the Gentiles. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EPH 3 1 abd6 figs-explicit τούτου χάριν 1 For this reason You may need to make explicit what the reason is. Alternate translation: “because of God’s grace to you” You may also need to make explicit here what the result is, as in the UST, because Paul does not state the result until 3:14, that he prays for them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ EPH 3 20 m7gi 0 Connecting Statement: Paul concludes his prayer with a blessin EPH 3 20 zxj3 τῷ δὲ 1 And to him “Now to God, who” EPH 3 20 zxt3 ποιῆσαι ὑπέρ ἐκ περισσοῦ ὧν αἰτούμεθα ἢ νοοῦμεν 1 to do exceedingly abundantly above all that we ask or think “to do much more than all that we ask or think” or “to do things that are much greater than anything that we ask him for or think about” EPH 3 21 ab12 figs-abstractnouns αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 to him be the glory in the church The word **glory** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “may God’s people glorify him” or “may God’s people praise him for how great he is” See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -EPH 4 intro ang8 0 # Ephesians 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 8, which is quoted from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual gifts
Spiritual gifts are specific supernatural abilities that the Holy Spirit gives to Christians after they come to believe in Jesus. These spiritual gifts were foundational to developing the church. Paul lists here only some of the spiritual gifts. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Unity
Paul considers it very important that the church is united. This is a major theme of this chapter.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Old man and new man
The term “old man” probably refers to the sinful nature with which a person is born. The “new man” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. +EPH 4 intro ang8 0 # Ephesians 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 8, which is quoted from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual gifts

Spiritual gifts are specific supernatural abilities that the Holy Spirit gives to Christians after they come to believe in Jesus. These spiritual gifts were foundational to developing the church. Paul lists here only some of the spiritual gifts. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Unity

Paul considers it very important that the church is united. This is a major theme of this chapter.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Old man and new man

The term “old man” probably refers to the sinful nature with which a person is born. The “new man” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. EPH 4 1 sb64 0 Connecting Statement: Because of what Paul has been writing to the Ephesians, he tells them how they should live their lives as believers and again emphasizes that believers are to agree with each other. EPH 4 1 abda grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore The connecting word **Therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that God will be glorified in the church for all generations. The result is that believers should walk in a way that is worthy of the Lord. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EPH 4 1 uss5 ὁ δέσμιος ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 the prisoner for the Lord “someone who is in prison because he serves the Lord” @@ -397,7 +397,7 @@ EPH 5 30 h44f figs-metaphor μέλη ἐσμὲν τοῦ σώματος αὐτ EPH 5 31 yp23 0 General Information: The quotation is from the writings of Moses in the Old Testament. EPH 5 31 yp24 0 General Information: The words **his** and **himself** refer to a male believer who marries. EPH 5 31 abef grammar-connect-logic-result ἀντὶ τούτου 1 For this reason The connecting phrase **For this reason** introduces the result of a reason-result relationship. In this case, this phrase is part of a quotation from Genesis 2:24 and so the reason is not stated here, but it is stated in Genesis 2:23 that woman was created out of man. The result is that a man will leave his father and mother and be joined to his wife. If it is confusing to not state the reason, you can include a footnote that says, “the reason for this is that woman was created out of man. See Genesis 2:23” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EPH 6 intro r7c3 0 # Ephesians 06 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Slavery
Paul does not write in this chapter about whether slavery is good or bad. Paul teaches about working to please God whether as a slave or as a master. What Paul teaches here about slavery would have been surprising. In his time, masters were not expected to treat their slaves with respect and not threaten them.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Armor of God
This extended metaphor describes how Christians can protect themselves when spiritually attacked. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +EPH 6 intro r7c3 0 # Ephesians 06 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Slavery

Paul does not write in this chapter about whether slavery is good or bad. Paul teaches about working to please God whether as a slave or as a master. What Paul teaches here about slavery would have been surprising. In his time, masters were not expected to treat their slaves with respect and not threaten them.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Armor of God

This extended metaphor describes how Christians can protect themselves when spiritually attacked. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EPH 6 1 wq46 figs-you 0 General Information: The command in verse one is plural. Then in verses two and three Paul quotes from the law of Moses. Moses was talking to the people of Israel as though they were one person, so **your** and **you** are singular there. If that does not make sense, you may need to translate them as plurals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EPH 6 1 jf17 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to explain how Christians are to submit themselves to each other. He gives instructions to children, fathers, workers, and masters. EPH 6 1 ev8m ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 in the Lord “because you belong to the Lord” or “as followers of the Lord” diff --git a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv index e235ef07c1..0fe6571faf 100644 --- a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv +++ b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -PHP front intro pv9j 0 # Introduction to Philippians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of the Philippians

1. Greeting, thanksgiving and prayer (1:1-11)
1. Paul’s report on his ministry (1:12-26)
1. Instructions
- To be steadfast (1:27-30)
- To be united (2:1-2)
- To be humble (2:3-11)
- To work out our salvation with God working in you (2:12-13)
- To be innocent and light (2:14-18)
1. Timothy and Epaphroditus (2:19-30)
1. Warning about false teachers (3:1-4:1)
1. Personal instruction (4:2-5)
1. Rejoice and do not be anxious (4:4-6)
1. Final remarks
- Values (4:8-9)
- Contentment (4:10-20)
- Final Greetings (4:21-23)

### Who wrote the Book Philippians?

Paul wrote Philippians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.

### What is the Book of Philippians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in Philippi, a city in Macedonia. He wrote it to thank the Philippians for the gift they had sent him. He wanted to tell them about how he was doing in prison and to encourage them to rejoice even if they are suffering. He also wrote to them about a man named Epaphroditus. He was the one who brought the gift to Paul. While visiting Paul, Epaphroditus became ill. So, Paul decided to send him back to Philippi. Paul encouraged the believers in Philippi to welcome and to be kind to Epaphroditus when he returns.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philippians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Philippi,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Philippi.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Philippi like?

Philip, the father of Alexander the Great, founded Philippi in the region of Macedonia. This meant that the citizens of Philippi were also considered citizens of Rome. The people of Philippi were proud of being citizens of Rome. But Paul told the believers that they are citizens of heaven (3:20).

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Philippi. The exception to this is 4:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### Who were the “enemies of the cross of Christ” (3:18) in this letter?

The “enemies of the cross of Christ” were probably people who called themselves believers, but they did not obey God’s commands. They thought that freedom in Christ meant that believers could do whatever they desired and God would not punish them (3:19).

### Why were the words “joy” and “rejoice” frequently used in this letter?

Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter (1:7). Even though he suffered, Paul said many times that he was joyful because God had been kind to him through Jesus Christ. He wanted to encourage his readers to have the same trust in Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 8, 13, 14, 26, 27; 2:1, 5, 19, 24, 29; 3:1, 3, 9, 14; 4:1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Philippians?

* Some versions have “Amen” at the end of the final verse in the letter (4:23). The ULT, UST, and other many modern versions do not. If “Amen” is included, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Philippians.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -PHP 1 intro kd3g 0 # Philippians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul includes a prayer in the beginning of this letter. At that time, religious leaders sometimes began informal letters with a prayer.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The day of Christ
This probably refers to the day when Christ returns. Paul often connected the return of Christ with motivating godly living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This statement in verse 21 is a paradox: “to die is gain.” In verse 23 Paul explains why this is true. ([Philippians 1:21](../../php/01/21.md)) +PHP front intro pv9j 0 # Introduction to Philippians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of the Philippians

1. Greeting, thanksgiving and prayer (1:1-11)
1. Paul’s report on his ministry (1:12-26)
1. Instructions
- To be steadfast (1:27-30)
- To be united (2:1-2)
- To be humble (2:3-11)
- To work out our salvation with God working in you (2:12-13)
- To be innocent and light (2:14-18)
1. Timothy and Epaphroditus (2:19-30)
1. Warning about false teachers (3:1-4:1)
1. Personal instruction (4:2-5)
1. Rejoice and do not be anxious (4:4-6)
1. Final remarks
- Values (4:8-9)
- Contentment (4:10-20)
- Final Greetings (4:21-23)

### Who wrote the Book Philippians?

Paul wrote Philippians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.

### What is the Book of Philippians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in Philippi, a city in Macedonia. He wrote it to thank the Philippians for the gift they had sent him. He wanted to tell them about how he was doing in prison and to encourage them to rejoice even if they are suffering. He also wrote to them about a man named Epaphroditus. He was the one who brought the gift to Paul. While visiting Paul, Epaphroditus became ill. So, Paul decided to send him back to Philippi. Paul encouraged the believers in Philippi to welcome and to be kind to Epaphroditus when he returns.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philippians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Philippi,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Philippi.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Philippi like?

Philip, the father of Alexander the Great, founded Philippi in the region of Macedonia. This meant that the citizens of Philippi were also considered citizens of Rome. The people of Philippi were proud of being citizens of Rome. But Paul told the believers that they are citizens of heaven (3:20).

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Philippi. The exception to this is 4:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### Who were the “enemies of the cross of Christ” (3:18) in this letter?

The “enemies of the cross of Christ” were probably people who called themselves believers, but they did not obey God’s commands. They thought that freedom in Christ meant that believers could do whatever they desired and God would not punish them (3:19).

### Why were the words “joy” and “rejoice” frequently used in this letter?

Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter (1:7). Even though he suffered, Paul said many times that he was joyful because God had been kind to him through Jesus Christ. He wanted to encourage his readers to have the same trust in Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 8, 13, 14, 26, 27; 2:1, 5, 19, 24, 29; 3:1, 3, 9, 14; 4:1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Philippians?
* Some versions have “Amen” at the end of the final verse in the letter (4:23). The ULT, UST, and other many modern versions do not. If “Amen” is included, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Philippians.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +PHP 1 intro kd3g 0 # Philippians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul includes a prayer in the beginning of this letter. At that time, religious leaders sometimes began informal letters with a prayer.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The day of Christ

This probably refers to the day when Christ returns. Paul often connected the return of Christ with motivating godly living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This statement in verse 21 is a paradox: “to die is gain.” In verse 23 Paul explains why this is true. ([Philippians 1:21](../../php/01/21.md)) PHP 1 1 c255 0 General Information: Paul and Timothy wrote this letter to the church at Philippi. Because Paul writes later in the letter saying “I,” it is generally assumed that he is the author and that Timothy, who is with him, writes as Paul speaks. PHP 1 1 law0 figs-you 0 General Information: All instances of “you” and “your” in the letter refer to the believers in the Philippian church and are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) PHP 1 1 xk9z figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The word **our** probably refers to all believers in Christ, including Paul, Timothy, and the Philippian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ PHP 1 28 i9yt figs-you μὴ πτυρόμενοι ἐν μηδενὶ 1 do not b PHP 1 28 l495 ἥτις ἐστὶν αὐτοῖς ἔνδειξις ἀπωλείας, ὑμῶν δὲ σωτηρίας, καὶ τοῦτο ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 This is a sign to them of their destruction, but of your salvation—and this from God “Your courage will show them that God will destroy them. It will also show you that God will save you” PHP 1 28 nb4b καὶ τοῦτο ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 and this from God “and this is from God.” Possible meanings are the word **this** refers to (1) the believers’ courage or (2) the sign or (3) destruction and salvation. PHP 1 30 x4z3 τὸν αὐτὸν ἀγῶνα ἔχοντες, οἷον εἴδετε ἐν ἐμοὶ, καὶ νῦν ἀκούετε ἐν ἐμοί 1 having the same struggle which you saw in me, and now you hear in me “suffering in the same way that you saw me suffer, and that you hear I am still suffering” -PHP 2 intro ixw8 0 # Philippians 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations, like the ULT, set apart the lines of verses 6-11. These verses describe the example of Christ. They teach important truths about the person of Jesus.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Practical instructions
In this chapter Paul gives many practical instructions to the church in Philippi.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “If there is any”
This appears to be a type of hypothetical statement. However, it is not a hypothetical statement, because it expresses something that is true. The translator may also translate this phrase as “Since there is.” +PHP 2 intro ixw8 0 # Philippians 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations, like the ULT, set apart the lines of verses 6-11. These verses describe the example of Christ. They teach important truths about the person of Jesus.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Practical instructions

In this chapter Paul gives many practical instructions to the church in Philippi.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “If there is any”

This appears to be a type of hypothetical statement. However, it is not a hypothetical statement, because it expresses something that is true. The translator may also translate this phrase as “Since there is.” PHP 2 1 xye5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul advises the believers to have unity and humility and reminds them of Christ’s example. PHP 2 1 b1q7 εἴ τις…παράκλησις ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If there is any encouragement in Christ “if Christ has encouraged you” or “if you are encouraged because of Christ” PHP 2 1 k1b2 εἴ τι παραμύθιον ἀγάπης 1 if any comfort of love The phrase **of love** probably refers to Christ’s love for the Philippians. Alternate translation: “if his love has given you any comfort” or “if his love for you has comforted you in any way” @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ PHP 2 29 y95x προσδέχεσθε οὖν αὐτὸν 1 Therefore welcome h PHP 2 29 qx14 ἐν Κυρίῳ μετὰ πάσης χαρᾶς 1 in the Lord with all joy “as a fellow believer in the Lord with all joy” or “with the great joy we have because the Lord Jesus loves us” PHP 2 30 ns1y figs-metaphor μέχρι θανάτου ἤγγισεν 1 that he came near even to death Paul here speaks of **death** as if it were a place that one could go to. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 2 30 g98z figs-metaphor ἀναπληρώσῃ τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα, τῆς πρός με λειτουργίας 1 he might make up your lack of service to me Paul speaks of his needs as if they were a container that Epaphroditus filled with good things for Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -PHP 3 intro btx3 0 # Philippians 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In verses 4-8, Paul lists how he qualifies for being considered a righteous Jew. In every way, Paul was an exemplary Jew. But he contrasts this with the greatness of knowing Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Dogs
The people of the ancient Near East used dogs as an image to refer to people in a negative way. Not all cultures use the term “dogs” in this way.

### Resurrected Bodies
We know very little about what people will be like in heaven. Paul teaches here that Christians will have some kind of glorious body and will be free from sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Prize
Paul uses an extended illustration to describe the Christian life. The goal of the Christian life is attempting to grow to be like Christ until a person dies. We can never achieve this goal perfectly, but we must strive for it. +PHP 3 intro btx3 0 # Philippians 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In verses 4-8, Paul lists how he qualifies for being considered a righteous Jew. In every way, Paul was an exemplary Jew. But he contrasts this with the greatness of knowing Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Dogs

The people of the ancient Near East used dogs as an image to refer to people in a negative way. Not all cultures use the term “dogs” in this way.

### Resurrected Bodies

We know very little about what people will be like in heaven. Paul teaches here that Christians will have some kind of glorious body and will be free from sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Prize

Paul uses an extended illustration to describe the Christian life. The goal of the Christian life is attempting to grow to be like Christ until a person dies. We can never achieve this goal perfectly, but we must strive for it. PHP 3 1 e79h 0 Connecting Statement: In order to warn his fellow believers about Jews who would try to get them to follow the old laws, Paul gives his own testimony about when he persecuted believers. PHP 3 1 s3bx τὸ λοιπόν, ἀδελφοί μου 1 As to the rest, my brothers “Now moving along, my brothers” or “Concerning other matters, my brothers” PHP 3 1 zu9l ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated this in [Philippians 1:12](../01/12.md). @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ PHP 3 20 n2lh ἡμῶν…τὸ πολίτευμα ἐν οὐρανοῖς PHP 3 21 eye2 ὃς μετασχηματίσει τὸ σῶμα τῆς ταπεινώσεως ἡμῶν 1 who will transform our lowly body “who will change our weak, earthly body” PHP 3 21 b2bc σύμμορφον τῷ σώματι τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ 1 to confirmity to his glorious body “into a body like his glorious body” PHP 3 21 qz6p figs-activepassive τῷ σώματι…κατὰ τὴν ἐνέργειαν τοῦ δύνασθαι αὐτὸν, καὶ ὑποτάξαι αὑτῷ τὰ πάντα 1 to … body, according to the working of his power even to subject all things to himself This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “to … body. He will change our bodies with the same power he uses to control all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -PHP 4 intro rp5c 0 # Philippians 04 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### “My joy and my crown”
Paul had helped the Philippians become spiritually mature. As a result, Paul rejoiced and God honored him and his work. He considered discipling other Christians and encouraging them to grow spiritually as important to Christian living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Euodia and Syntyche
Apparently, these two women disagreed with each other. Paul was encouraging them to agree. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +PHP 4 intro rp5c 0 # Philippians 04 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “My joy and my crown”

Paul had helped the Philippians become spiritually mature. As a result, Paul rejoiced and God honored him and his work. He considered discipling other Christians and encouraging them to grow spiritually as important to Christian living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Euodia and Syntyche

Apparently, these two women disagreed with each other. Paul was encouraging them to agree. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) PHP 4 1 zk6q figs-you 0 General Information: When Paul says, “my true companion,” The word **you** is singular. Paul does not say the name of the person. He calls him that to show he worked with Paul to spread the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) PHP 4 1 xmc4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues with some specific instructions to the believers in Philippi on unity and then gives instructions to help them live for the Lord. PHP 4 1 fe2y ἀδελφοί μου ἀγαπητοὶ καὶ ἐπιπόθητοι 1 my brothers, beloved and longed for “my fellow believers, I love you and I greatly desire to see you” diff --git a/en_tn_52-COL.tsv b/en_tn_52-COL.tsv index 94c580dcd9..e271b53db1 100644 --- a/en_tn_52-COL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_52-COL.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -COL front intro d9hy 0 # Introduction to Colossians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Colossians

1. Greeting, thanksgiving, and prayer (1:1-12)
1. The person and work of Christ
- Deliverance and redemption (1:13-14)
- Christ: the Image of the invisible God, and the One who is over all creation (1:15-17)
- Christ is the Head of the Church, and the Church trusts in him (1:18-2:7)
1. Tests of faithfulness
- Warnings against false teachers (2:8-19)
- True godliness is not rigid rules and unbending traditions (2:20-23)
1. Teaching and living
- Life in Christ (3:1-4)
- Old and new life (3:5-17)
- Christian family (3:18-4:1)
1. Christian behavior (4:2-6)
1. Closing and greetings
- Paul thanks Tychicus and Onesimus (4:7-9)
- Paul sends greetings from his associates (4:10-14)
- Paul gives directions to Archippus and the Christians in Laodicea (4:15-17)
- Paul’s personal greeting (4:18)

### Who wrote the Book of Colossians?

Paul wrote the Book of Colossians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.

### What is the Book of Colossians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the Asia Minor city of Colossae. The main purpose of this letter was to defend the gospel against false teachers. He did this by praising Jesus as the image of God, sustainer of all things, and head of the church. Paul wanted them to understand that only Christ is needed for God to accept them.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Colossians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Colossae,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Colossae.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What were the religious issues that the church in Colossae struggled with?

In the church in Colossae, there were false teachers. Their exact teaching is unknown. But they probably taught their followers to worship angels and to obey strict rules about religious ceremonies. They probably also taught that a person must be circumcised and can only eat certain types of food. Paul said these false teachings came from the minds of men and not from God.

### How did Paul use the imagery of heaven and earth?

In this letter, Paul frequently spoke of heaven as “above.” He distinguished it from the earth, which Scripture speaks of as being “below.” The purpose of this imagery was to teach Christians to live in a way that honors God who lives in heaven above. Paul is not teaching that the earth or the physical world is evil. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Colossians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In Colossians, these words usually indicate a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. So Colossians in the ULT uses “believers” or “those who believe in him.” (See: 1:2, 12, 26)

### Was Jesus created or is he eternal?

Jesus was not a created being but has always existed as God. Jesus also became a human being. There is potential for confusion in Colossians 1:15 where it says Jesus “is the firstborn of all creation.” This statement means that Jesus is dominant over all of creation. It does not mean that he was the first thing God created. Translators should be careful not to imply that Jesus is a created being.

### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Colossians?

For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

* “May grace be to you, and peace from God our Father” (1:2). Some older versions have a longer reading: “Grace to you and peace from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”
* “Epaphras, our beloved fellow servant, who is a faithful servant of Christ on our behalf” (1:7). Some older versions read “for you”: “Epaphras, our beloved fellow servant, a faithful servant of Christ for you.”
* “the Father, who has made you able to have a share in the inheritance of the believers in light” (1:12). Some older versions read, “the Father, who has qualified us for a share in the inheritance in light.”
* “In his Son we have redemption” (1:14). Some older versions read, “In his Son we have redemption through his blood.”
* “and forgave us all of our trespasses” (2:13). Some older versions read: “and forgave you all of your trespasses.”
* “When Christ appears, who is your life” (3:4). Some older versions read, “When Christ appears, who is our life.”
* “It is for these things that the wrath of God is coming on the sons of disobedience” (3:6). The ULT, UST, and many other modern versions read this way. However, some modern and older versions read, “It is for these things that the wrath of God is coming.”
* “I sent him to you for this, that you might know the matters about us” (4:8). Some older versions read, “I sent him to you for this, that he might know the matters about you.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -COL 1 intro gtm3 0 # Colossians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

As in a typical letter, Paul begins his letter in verses 1-2 by introducing Timothy and himself to the Christians in Colossae.

Paul writes much of this chapter around two subjects: who Christ is, and what Christ has done for the Christian.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Secret truth

Paul refers to a “secret truth” in this chapter. The role of the church in the plans of God was once unknown. But God has now revealed it. Part of this involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Images for Christian living
Paul uses many different images to describe Christian living. In this chapter, he uses the images of “walking” and “bearing fruit.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Verse 24 is a paradox: “Now I rejoice in my sufferings for you.” People do not usually rejoice when they suffer. But in verses 25-29 Paul explains why his suffering is good. ([Colossians 1:24](../../col/01/24.md)) +COL front intro d9hy 0 # Introduction to Colossians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Colossians

1. Greeting, thanksgiving, and prayer (1:1-12)
1. The person and work of Christ
- Deliverance and redemption (1:13-14)
- Christ: the Image of the invisible God, and the One who is over all creation (1:15-17)
- Christ is the Head of the Church, and the Church trusts in him (1:18-2:7)
1. Tests of faithfulness
- Warnings against false teachers (2:8-19)
- True godliness is not rigid rules and unbending traditions (2:20-23)
1. Teaching and living
- Life in Christ (3:1-4)
- Old and new life (3:5-17)
- Christian family (3:18-4:1)
1. Christian behavior (4:2-6)
1. Closing and greetings
- Paul thanks Tychicus and Onesimus (4:7-9)
- Paul sends greetings from his associates (4:10-14)
- Paul gives directions to Archippus and the Christians in Laodicea (4:15-17)
- Paul’s personal greeting (4:18)

### Who wrote the Book of Colossians?

Paul wrote the Book of Colossians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.

### What is the Book of Colossians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the Asia Minor city of Colossae. The main purpose of this letter was to defend the gospel against false teachers. He did this by praising Jesus as the image of God, sustainer of all things, and head of the church. Paul wanted them to understand that only Christ is needed for God to accept them.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Colossians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Colossae,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Colossae.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What were the religious issues that the church in Colossae struggled with?

In the church in Colossae, there were false teachers. Their exact teaching is unknown. But they probably taught their followers to worship angels and to obey strict rules about religious ceremonies. They probably also taught that a person must be circumcised and can only eat certain types of food. Paul said these false teachings came from the minds of men and not from God.

### How did Paul use the imagery of heaven and earth?

In this letter, Paul frequently spoke of heaven as “above.” He distinguished it from the earth, which Scripture speaks of as being “below.” The purpose of this imagery was to teach Christians to live in a way that honors God who lives in heaven above. Paul is not teaching that the earth or the physical world is evil. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Colossians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In Colossians, these words usually indicate a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. So Colossians in the ULT uses “believers” or “those who believe in him.” (See: 1:2, 12, 26)

### Was Jesus created or is he eternal?

Jesus was not a created being but has always existed as God. Jesus also became a human being. There is potential for confusion in Colossians 1:15 where it says Jesus “is the firstborn of all creation.” This statement means that Jesus is dominant over all of creation. It does not mean that he was the first thing God created. Translators should be careful not to imply that Jesus is a created being.

### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Colossians?

For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “May grace be to you, and peace from God our Father” (1:2). Some older versions have a longer reading: “Grace to you and peace from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”
* “Epaphras, our beloved fellow servant, who is a faithful servant of Christ on our behalf” (1:7). Some older versions read “for you”: “Epaphras, our beloved fellow servant, a faithful servant of Christ for you.”
* “the Father, who has made you able to have a share in the inheritance of the believers in light” (1:12). Some older versions read, “the Father, who has qualified us for a share in the inheritance in light.”
* “In his Son we have redemption” (1:14). Some older versions read, “In his Son we have redemption through his blood.”
* “and forgave us all of our trespasses” (2:13). Some older versions read: “and forgave you all of your trespasses.”
* “When Christ appears, who is your life” (3:4). Some older versions read, “When Christ appears, who is our life.”
* “It is for these things that the wrath of God is coming on the sons of disobedience” (3:6). The ULT, UST, and many other modern versions read this way. However, some modern and older versions read, “It is for these things that the wrath of God is coming.”
* “I sent him to you for this, that you might know the matters about us” (4:8). Some older versions read, “I sent him to you for this, that he might know the matters about you.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +COL 1 intro gtm3 0 # Colossians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

As in a typical letter, Paul begins his letter in verses 1-2 by introducing Timothy and himself to the Christians in Colossae.

Paul writes much of this chapter around two subjects: who Christ is, and what Christ has done for the Christian.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Secret truth

Paul refers to a “secret truth” in this chapter. The role of the church in the plans of God was once unknown. But God has now revealed it. Part of this involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Images for Christian living

Paul uses many different images to describe Christian living. In this chapter, he uses the images of “walking” and “bearing fruit.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Verse 24 is a paradox: “Now I rejoice in my sufferings for you.” People do not usually rejoice when they suffer. But in verses 25-29 Paul explains why his suffering is good. ([Colossians 1:24](../../col/01/24.md)) COL 1 1 h5gl 0 General Information: Though this letter is from Paul and Timothy to the Colossian believers, later in the letter Paul makes it clear that he is the writer. Most likely Timothy was with him and wrote the words down as Paul spoke. COL 1 1 nlf1 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Throughout this letter the words “we,” “our,” and “ours” include the Colossians unless noted otherwise. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) COL 1 1 bqvt figs-you 0 General Information: The words “you,” “your,” and “yours” refer to the Colossian believers and so are plural unless noted otherwise. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ COL 1 28 va1x figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς καταγγέλλομεν…παρα COL 1 28 na8w νουθετοῦντες πάντα ἄνθρωπον 1 admonishing every man “warning everyone” COL 1 28 lyz1 figs-explicit ἵνα παραστήσωμεν πάντα ἄνθρωπον 1 so that we may present every man You may need to make explicit to whom they will present every person. Alternate translation: “so that we may present to God every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) COL 1 28 uk2i figs-metaphor τέλειον 1 complete Being **complete** is a metaphor for being spiritually mature. Alternate translation: “spiritually mature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -COL 2 intro p3uc 0 # Colossians 02 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Circumcision and baptism
In verses 11-12, Paul uses both the old covenant sign of circumcision and the new covenant sign of baptism to show how Christians are united with Christ and freed from sin.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that, while Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. Paul also uses “flesh” in this chapter to refer to the physical body.

### Implicit information
Paul mentions several issues in this chapter that imply information about the context of the church in Colossae. It is best to allow the text to remain uncertain over the actual details. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +COL 2 intro p3uc 0 # Colossians 02 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Circumcision and baptism

In verses 11-12, Paul uses both the old covenant sign of circumcision and the new covenant sign of baptism to show how Christians are united with Christ and freed from sin.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that, while Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. Paul also uses “flesh” in this chapter to refer to the physical body.

### Implicit information

Paul mentions several issues in this chapter that imply information about the context of the church in Colossae. It is best to allow the text to remain uncertain over the actual details. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) COL 2 1 tt6v 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to encourage the believers in Colossae and Laodicea to understand that Christ is God and that he lives in believers, so they should live in the same way they received him. COL 2 1 dqg5 ἡλίκον ἀγῶνα ἔχω ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν 1 how great a struggle I have for you Paul has exerted much effort in developing their purity and understanding of the gospel. COL 2 1 fn4z τῶν ἐν Λαοδικίᾳ 1 those at Laodicea This was a city very close to Colossae where there was also a church for which Paul was praying. @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ COL 2 21 v9e7 0 Connecting Statement: The rhetorical question that begins with COL 2 21 b392 μὴ ἅψῃ! μηδὲ γεύσῃ! μηδὲ θίγῃς! 1 You may not handle, nor taste, nor touch! Paul is quoting what other people have been telling the Colossians. COL 2 23 y2dc ἅτινά…λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας ἐν ἐθελοθρησκείᾳ καὶ ταπεινοφροσύνῃ, ἀφειδίᾳ σώματος 1 These, having indeed a word of wisdom in self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body “These rules that seem wise to unbelieving people because they allow those who follow them to appear humble because they hurt their own bodies” COL 2 23 e7p5 ἐστιν…οὐκ ἐν τιμῇ τινι πρὸς πλησμονὴν τῆς σαρκός 1 are not of any value against the indulgence of the flesh “do not help you stop following your human desires” -COL 3 intro qtl2 0 # Colossians 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The second part of this chapter parallels Ephesians 5 and 6.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Old and new self
The old and new self mean the same as the old and new man. The term “old man” probably refers to the sinful nature with which a person is born. The “new man” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Character
Many of the things Paul encourages his readers to pursue or avoid are not actions but character qualities. Because of this, they may be difficult to translate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

### “The things above”

Where God dwells is often pictured as being located “above.” Paul says to “seek the things above” and to “think about the things above.” He is implying Christians should seek and think about heavenly and godly things. +COL 3 intro qtl2 0 # Colossians 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The second part of this chapter parallels Ephesians 5 and 6.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Old and new self

The old and new self mean the same as the old and new man. The term “old man” probably refers to the sinful nature with which a person is born. The “new man” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Character
Many of the things Paul encourages his readers to pursue or avoid are not actions but character qualities. Because of this, they may be difficult to translate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

### “The things above”

Where God dwells is often pictured as being located “above.” Paul says to “seek the things above” and to “think about the things above.” He is implying Christians should seek and think about heavenly and godly things. COL 3 1 ya97 0 Connecting Statement: Paul warns the believers that because they are one with Christ, they ought not do certain things. COL 3 1 r5yh figs-idiom εἰ οὖν 1 If, therefore This is an idiom that means “Because.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 3 1 t1jv figs-idiom συνηγέρθητε τῷ Χριστῷ 1 you have been raised with Christ Here to be **raised** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Possible meanings are (1) because God has caused Christ to come alive again, God has already given the believers in Colossae new spiritual life. Alternate translation: “God has given you new life because you belong to Christ” or (2) because God has caused Christ to come alive again, the believers in Colossae can know that after they die they will live with Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ COL 3 24 p3pw figs-metaphor τῆς κληρονομίας 1 of the inheritance COL 3 25 u5lx ὁ…ἀδικῶν, κομιεῖται ὃ ἠδίκησεν 1 the one who does unrighteousness will receive what he did unrighteously The phrase **receive the what he did unrighteously** means to be punished for bad actions. Alternate translation: “anyone who does unrighteousness will be punished for those things” or “God will punish anyone who does what is unrighteous” COL 3 25 ak8j ἀδικῶν 1 who does unrighteousness who actively does wrong of any kind COL 3 25 c9fx figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἔστιν προσωπολημψία 1 there is no favoritism The abstract noun **favoritism** can be expressed with the verb “favor.” To favor some people is to judge them by different standards so the result is better for them than for others who do the same actions. Alternate translation: “God does not favor anyone” or “God judges everyone by the same standard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -COL 4 intro nm3y 0 # Colossians 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

[Colossians 4:1](../../col/04/01.md) appears to belong with the topics of Chapter 3 instead of Chapter 4.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “In my own hand”
It was common in the ancient Near East for the author to speak and someone else to write down the words. Many of the New Testament letters were written this way. Paul wrote the final greeting himself.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Secret truth

Paul refers to a “secret truth” in this chapter. The role of the church in the plans of God was once unknown. But God has now revealed it. Part of this involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]]) +COL 4 intro nm3y 0 # Colossians 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

[Colossians 4:1](../../col/04/01.md) appears to belong with the topics of Chapter 3 instead of Chapter 4.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “In my own hand”

It was common in the ancient Near East for the author to speak and someone else to write down the words. Many of the New Testament letters were written this way. Paul wrote the final greeting himself.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Secret truth

Paul refers to a “secret truth” in this chapter. The role of the church in the plans of God was once unknown. But God has now revealed it. Part of this involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]]) COL 4 1 qhd2 0 Connecting Statement: After speaking to masters, Paul ends his special instructions to the different kinds of believers in the church at Colossae. COL 4 1 ae3y figs-doublet τὸ δίκαιον καὶ τὴν ἰσότητα 1 what is right and fair These words mean almost the same thing and are used to emphasize the things that are morally correct. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) COL 4 1 t9wy καὶ ὑμεῖς ἔχετε Κύριον ἐν οὐρανῷ 1 you also have a master in heaven God wants the relationship between an earthly master and his slave to be loving the way God, the heavenly **master**, loves his earthly servants, including the earthly slaves’ masters. diff --git a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv index 217716e158..24e11beb32 100644 --- a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -1TH front intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Thessalonians

1. Greeting (1:1)
1. Prayer of thanksgiving for the Thessalonian Christians (1:2-10)
1. Paul’s ministry in Thessalonica (2:1-16)
1. Paul’s concerns for their spiritual growth
- Like a mother (2:7)
- Like a father (2:11)
1. Paul sends Timothy to the Thessalonians and Timothy reports back to Paul (3:1-13)
1. Practical instructions
- Live to please God (4:1-12)
- Comfort regarding those who have died (4:12-18)
- Christ’s return is a motive for godly living (5:1-11)
1. Closing blessings, thanks, and prayers (5:12-28)

### Who wrote 1 Thessalonians?

Paul wrote 1 Thessalonians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth. Of all Paul’s letters that are in the Bible, many scholars think 1 Thessalonians was the first letter Paul wrote.

### What is the Book of 1 Thessalonians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He wrote it after the Jews in the city forced him to leave. In this letter he said he considered his visit to them a success, even though he was forced to leave.

Paul responded to the news from Timothy about the Thessalonian believers. The believers there were being persecuted. He encouraged them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also comforted them by explaining what happens to those who die before Christ returns.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 Thessalonians” or “First Thessalonians.” They may instead prefer to choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The First Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?

Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation, and there will be peace everywhere.

### What happens to those who die before the return of Christ?

Paul made clear that those who die before Christ’s return will come back to life and be with Jesus. They will not remain dead forever. Paul wrote this to encourage the Thessalonians. For some of them worried that those who died would miss the great day when Jesus returns.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord.”?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very a close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Thessalonians?

For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

* “May grace and peace be to you” (1:1). Some older versions read: “Grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”
* “Instead, we were as gentle among you as a mother comforting her own children.” (2:7) Other modern versions and older versions read, “Instead, we were like babies among you, as when a mother comforts her own children.”
* “Timothy, our brother and fellow worker for God” (3:2). Some other versions read: “Timothy, our brother and servant of God.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1TH 1 intro y8c5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Verse 1 formally introduces this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Hardship
Other people persecuted the Christians in Thessalonica. But the Christians there handled it well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TH front intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Thessalonians

1. Greeting (1:1)
1. Prayer of thanksgiving for the Thessalonian Christians (1:2-10)
1. Paul’s ministry in Thessalonica (2:1-16)
1. Paul’s concerns for their spiritual growth
- Like a mother (2:7)
- Like a father (2:11)
1. Paul sends Timothy to the Thessalonians and Timothy reports back to Paul (3:1-13)
1. Practical instructions
- Live to please God (4:1-12)
- Comfort regarding those who have died (4:12-18)
- Christ’s return is a motive for godly living (5:1-11)
1. Closing blessings, thanks, and prayers (5:12-28)

### Who wrote 1 Thessalonians?

Paul wrote 1 Thessalonians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth. Of all Paul’s letters that are in the Bible, many scholars think 1 Thessalonians was the first letter Paul wrote.

### What is the Book of 1 Thessalonians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He wrote it after the Jews in the city forced him to leave. In this letter he said he considered his visit to them a success, even though he was forced to leave.

Paul responded to the news from Timothy about the Thessalonian believers. The believers there were being persecuted. He encouraged them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also comforted them by explaining what happens to those who die before Christ returns.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 Thessalonians” or “First Thessalonians.” They may instead prefer to choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The First Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?

Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation, and there will be peace everywhere.

### What happens to those who die before the return of Christ?

Paul made clear that those who die before Christ’s return will come back to life and be with Jesus. They will not remain dead forever. Paul wrote this to encourage the Thessalonians. For some of them worried that those who died would miss the great day when Jesus returns.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord.”?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very a close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Thessalonians?

For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “May grace and peace be to you” (1:1). Some older versions read: “Grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”
* “Instead, we were as gentle among you as a mother comforting her own children.” (2:7) Other modern versions and older versions read, “Instead, we were like babies among you, as when a mother comforts her own children.”
* “Timothy, our brother and fellow worker for God” (3:2). Some other versions read: “Timothy, our brother and servant of God.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1TH 1 intro y8c5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Verse 1 formally introduces this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Hardship

Other people persecuted the Christians in Thessalonica. But the Christians there handled it well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 1 1 dp37 0 General Information: Paul identifies himself as the writer of the letter and greets the church at Thessalonica. 1TH 1 1 ms5e figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Paul and Silvanus and Timothy to the church The UST makes clear that it was Paul who wrote this letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 1 1 luw5 figs-metonymy χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 Grace and peace to you The terms **Grace** and **peace** are metonyms for the person who acts toward people in a kindly and peaceful manner. Alternate translation: “May God be kind to you and give you peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 1 10 pmi8 ὃν ἤγειρεν 1 whom he raised “whom God caused to live again” 1TH 1 10 wba8 ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 from the dead “so that he was no longer dead.” This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again. 1TH 1 10 pt1s figs-exclusive τὸν ῥυόμενον ἡμᾶς 1 the one rescuing us Here, **us** includes Paul and the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1TH 2 intro kt5l 0 # 1 Thessalonians 02 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Christian witness
Paul values his “Christian witness” as evidence that the gospel is true. Paul says that being godly or holy bears witness to the non-Christian. Paul defends his character, so that his witness is not affected. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/testimony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]]) +1TH 2 intro kt5l 0 # 1 Thessalonians 02 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Christian witness

Paul values his “Christian witness” as evidence that the gospel is true. Paul says that being godly or holy bears witness to the non-Christian. Paul defends his character, so that his witness is not affected. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/testimony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]]) 1TH 2 1 pt75 0 Connecting Statement: Paul defines the believers’ service and reward. 1TH 2 1 gpr4 figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ…οἴδατε 1 you yourselves know The words **you** and **yourselves** refer to the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 1TH 2 1 tdl3 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women. @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 2 19 mj9n figs-metonymy ἡμῶν ἐλπὶς…ἢ οὐχὶ καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 our hope … Is it not even you By **hope** Paul means the assurance he has that God will reward him for his work. The Thessalonian Christians are the reason for his hope. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TH 2 19 ty78 figs-metonymy ἢ χαρὰ 1 or joy The Thessalonians are the reason for his joy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TH 2 19 e7tl figs-metonymy στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 crown of boasting Here, **crown** refers to a laurel wreath awarded to victorious athletes. The expression **crown of boasting** means a reward for victory, or having done well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1TH 3 intro j379 0 # 1 Thessalonians 03 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Standing
In this chapter, Paul uses “stand firm” to illustrate being steadfast. This is a common way to describe being steadfast or faithful. Paul uses “be shaken” as the opposite of being steadfast. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]]) +1TH 3 intro j379 0 # 1 Thessalonians 03 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Standing

In this chapter, Paul uses “stand firm” to illustrate being steadfast. This is a common way to describe being steadfast or faithful. Paul uses “be shaken” as the opposite of being steadfast. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]]) 1TH 3 1 nal1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul tells the believers he has sent Timothy to strengthen their faith. 1TH 3 1 fqe3 μηκέτι στέγοντες 1 enduring it no longer “when we could no longer endure worrying about you” 1TH 3 1 t3vt ηὐδοκήσαμεν καταλειφθῆναι ἐν Ἀθήναις μόνοι 1 we thought it good to be left behind at Athens alone “we thought only Silvanus and me should stay behind in Athens” @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 3 13 ly21 figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ στηρίξαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, ἀμέμπτους 1 to strengthen your hearts, blameless Here, **heart** is a metonym for one’s beliefs and convictions. Alternate translation: “to strengthen you, so that you will be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TH 3 13 xsd3 ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus “when Jesus comes back to earth” 1TH 3 13 jlc5 μετὰ πάντων τῶν ἁγίων αὐτοῦ 1 with all his saints “with all those who belong to him” -1TH 4 intro b1z5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 04 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sexual immorality
Different cultures have different standards of sexual morality. These different cultural standards may make translating this passage difficult. Translators must also be aware of cultural taboos. These are topics considered improper to discuss.

### Dying before the return of Christ
In the early church, people apparently wondered what would happen if a believer died before Christ returned. They may have worried whether those dying before Christ returned would be part of the kingdom of God. Paul answers that concern.

### “Caught up in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air”
This passage refers to a time when Jesus calls to himself those who have believed in him. Scholars differ on whether or not this refers to Christ’s final glorious return. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]]) +1TH 4 intro b1z5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 04 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sexual immorality

Different cultures have different standards of sexual morality. These different cultural standards may make translating this passage difficult. Translators must also be aware of cultural taboos. These are topics considered improper to discuss.

### Dying before the return of Christ

In the early church, people apparently wondered what would happen if a believer died before Christ returned. They may have worried whether those dying before Christ returned would be part of the kingdom of God. Paul answers that concern.

### “Caught up in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air”

This passage refers to a time when Jesus calls to himself those who have believed in him. Scholars differ on whether or not this refers to Christ’s final glorious return. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]]) 1TH 4 1 wk39 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians. 1TH 4 1 u2lw figs-doublet ἐρωτῶμεν ὑμᾶς καὶ παρακαλοῦμεν 1 we beg and exhort you Paul uses **beg** and **exhort** to emphasize how strongly they encourage the believers. Alternate translation: “we strongly encourage you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1TH 4 1 iij6 figs-activepassive παρελάβετε παρ’ ἡμῶν 1 you received from us This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “we taught you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 4 17 l5l1 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες 1 we who are alive Here, **we** refers to all believers who have not died. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1TH 4 17 wvi8 σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 with them The word **them** refers to the dead believers who were made alive again. 1TH 4 17 se1y ἁρπαγησόμεθα ἐν νεφέλαις εἰς ἀπάντησιν τοῦ Κυρίου εἰς ἀέρα 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air “will be pulled up … to meet the Lord Jesus in the sky” -1TH 5 intro ay3d 0 # 1 Thessalonians 05 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul concludes his letter in a way that was typical of letters in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Day of the Lord
The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will be a surprise to the world. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to live prepared for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

### Quench the Spirit
This means to ignore or work against the Holy Spirit’s guidance and work. +1TH 5 intro ay3d 0 # 1 Thessalonians 05 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul concludes his letter in a way that was typical of letters in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Day of the Lord

The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will be a surprise to the world. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to live prepared for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

### Quench the Spirit

This means to ignore or work against the Holy Spirit’s guidance and work. 1TH 5 1 i2vm figs-exclusive 0 General Information: In this chapter the words “we” and “us” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1TH 5 1 caue figs-you 0 General Information: The word **you** is plural and refers to the believers at the church of Thessalonica. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1TH 5 1 z1s6 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues talking about the day Jesus will come back. diff --git a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv index 66e52738d0..c59ca92a95 100644 --- a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -2TH front intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 Thessalonians

1. Greetings and thanksgiving (1:1-3)
1. Christians suffering from persecution
- They are worthy of the kingdom of God and of his promise of relief from trials (1:4-7)
- God will judge those who persecute Christians (1:8-12)
1. Some believers’ misunderstanding about the second coming of Christ
- Christ’s return has not yet happened (2:1-2)
- Instruction about the events that will precede the return of Christ (2:3-12)
1. Paul’s confidence that God will save the Thessalonian Christians
- His call to “stand firm” (2:13-15)
- His prayer that God will comfort them (2:16-17)
1. Paul requests that the Thessalonian believers pray for him (3:1-5)
1. Paul give commands about idle believers (3:6-15)
1. Closing (3:16-17)

### Who wrote 2 Thessalonians?

Paul wrote 2 Thessalonians. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth.

### What is the Book of 2 Thessalonians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He encouraged the believers because they were being persecuted. He told them to continue living in a way that pleased God. And he wanted to teach them again about Christ’s return.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Thessalonians” or “Second Thessalonians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The Second Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?

Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation. And he will cause there to be peace everywhere. Paul also explained that a “man of lawlessness” will come before Christ’s return. This person will obey Satan and cause many people to oppose God. But Jesus will destroy this person when he returns.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Thessalonians?

For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

* “and the man of lawlessness is revealed” (2:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Older versions have, “and the man of sin is revealed.”
* “For God chose you as the firstfruits for salvation” (2:13) The ULT, UST, and some other versions read this way. Other versions have, “For God chose you from the first for salvation.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +2TH front intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 Thessalonians

1. Greetings and thanksgiving (1:1-3)
1. Christians suffering from persecution
- They are worthy of the kingdom of God and of his promise of relief from trials (1:4-7)
- God will judge those who persecute Christians (1:8-12)
1. Some believers’ misunderstanding about the second coming of Christ
- Christ’s return has not yet happened (2:1-2)
- Instruction about the events that will precede the return of Christ (2:3-12)
1. Paul’s confidence that God will save the Thessalonian Christians
- His call to “stand firm” (2:13-15)
- His prayer that God will comfort them (2:16-17)
1. Paul requests that the Thessalonian believers pray for him (3:1-5)
1. Paul give commands about idle believers (3:6-15)
1. Closing (3:16-17)

### Who wrote 2 Thessalonians?

Paul wrote 2 Thessalonians. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth.

### What is the Book of 2 Thessalonians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He encouraged the believers because they were being persecuted. He told them to continue living in a way that pleased God. And he wanted to teach them again about Christ’s return.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Thessalonians” or “Second Thessalonians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The Second Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?

Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation. And he will cause there to be peace everywhere. Paul also explained that a “man of lawlessness” will come before Christ’s return. This person will obey Satan and cause many people to oppose God. But Jesus will destroy this person when he returns.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Thessalonians?

For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “and the man of lawlessness is revealed” (2:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Older versions have, “and the man of sin is revealed.”
* “For God chose you as the firstfruits for salvation” (2:13) The ULT, UST, and some other versions read this way. Other versions have, “For God chose you from the first for salvation.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 2TH 1 intro m987 0 # 2 Thessalonians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Verses 1-2 formally introduce this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in verses 4-5: “We talk about your patience and faith in all your persecutions. We talk about the afflictions that you endure. This is a sign of God’s righteous judgment.” People would not normally think that believing in God while being persecuted is a sign of God’s righteous judgment. But in verses 5-10, Paul explains how God will reward those who believe in him and how he will judge those who afflict them. ([2 Thessalonians 1:4-5](./04.md)) 2TH 1 1 b6vf 0 General Information: Paul is the author of this letter, but he includes Silvanus and Timothy as senders of the letter. He begins by greeting the church at Thessalonica. 2TH 1 1 nrxt figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The words “we” and “us” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 1 12 q994 figs-activepassive ὅπως ἐνδοξασθῇ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν ὑμῖν 1 so that the name of our Lord Jesus may be glorified in you This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “so that you may glorify the name of our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 1 12 pg2i figs-activepassive καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 and you in him This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “and Jesus will glorify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 1 12 z8k9 κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 according to the grace of our God “because of God’s grace” -2TH 2 intro jq9r 0 # 2 Thessalonians 02 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Being gathered together to be with him”

This passage refers to a time when Jesus calls to himself those who have believed in him. Scholars differ on whether or not this refers to Christ’s final glorious return. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### Man of lawlessness
This is the same as “son of destruction” and “lawless one” in this chapter. Paul associates him with Satan actively working in the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]])

### Sits in the temple of God
Paul could be referring to the Jerusalem temple that the Romans destroyed several years after he wrote this letter. Or he could be referring to a future physical temple, or to the church as the spiritual temple of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2TH 2 intro jq9r 0 # 2 Thessalonians 02 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Being gathered together to be with him”

This passage refers to a time when Jesus calls to himself those who have believed in him. Scholars differ on whether or not this refers to Christ’s final glorious return. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### Man of lawlessness

This is the same as “son of destruction” and “lawless one” in this chapter. Paul associates him with Satan actively working in the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]])

### Sits in the temple of God

Paul could be referring to the Jerusalem temple that the Romans destroyed several years after he wrote this letter. Or he could be referring to a future physical temple, or to the church as the spiritual temple of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TH 2 1 r36t 0 General Information: Paul exhorts believers not to be deceived about the day Jesus will come back. 2TH 2 1 q1uq δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** marks a change of topic in Paul’s instructions. 2TH 2 1 cvg5 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 2 16 cm54 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς…Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς 1 our Lord Jesus Christ himself Here, **himself** gives additional emphasis to the phrase **Lord Jesus Christ.** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 2TH 2 17 x3rr figs-metonymy παρακαλέσαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, καὶ στηρίξαι 1 may he comfort and strengthen your hearts Here, **hearts** represents the seat of emotions. Alternate translation: “may he comfort you and strengthen you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TH 2 17 yw5f παντὶ ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ ἀγαθῷ 1 every good work and word “every good thing you do and say” -2TH 3 intro b8hk 0 # 2 Thessalonians 03 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Idle and lazy persons
In Thessalonica, there apparently was a problem with people in the church who were able to work but refused to do so. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### What should you do if your brother sins?

In this chapter, Paul teaches that Christians need to live in a way that honors God. Christians should also encourage one another and hold each other accountable for what they do. The church is also responsible for encouraging believers to repent if they sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) +2TH 3 intro b8hk 0 # 2 Thessalonians 03 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Idle and lazy persons

In Thessalonica, there apparently was a problem with people in the church who were able to work but refused to do so. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### What should you do if your brother sins?

In this chapter, Paul teaches that Christians need to live in a way that honors God. Christians should also encourage one another and hold each other accountable for what they do. The church is also responsible for encouraging believers to repent if they sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) 2TH 3 1 k33i 0 General Information: Paul asks the believers to pray for him and his companions. 2TH 3 1 jy75 τὸ λοιπὸν 1 Finally Paul uses the word **Finally** to mark a change in topic. 2TH 3 1 m1s5 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) diff --git a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv index be1fe6e15c..d2d8af6007 100644 --- a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 1TI front intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Timothy

In this letter, Paul alternates between personal commands to Timothy that empower him to act as his representative and with his authority, and instructions for how followers of Jesus should live in community.

1. Greetings (1:1-2)
2. Paul commands Timothy to tell people not to teach false doctrines (1:3-20)
3. Paul gives instructions about how to re-establish order and decency in the church (2:1-15)
4. Paul gives instructions about how to ensure that elders and deacons are properly qualified (3:1-13)
5. Paul commands Timothy regarding his own personal conduct (3:14-5:2)
6. Paul gives instructions to ensure church support for worthy widows (5:3-16) and elders (5:17-20)
7. Paul commands Timothy that he must be impartial (5:21-25)
8. Paul gives instructions to ensure order in master-servant relationships (6:1-2a)
9. Paul commands Timothy regarding how he should teach and conduct himself (6:2b-16)
10. Paul gives instructions for how people who are rich should live (6:17-19)
11. Paul commands Timothy to guard what has been entrusted to his care (6:20-21a)
12. Closing blessing to the whole church (6:21b)

### Who wrote the Book of 1 Timothy?

A man named Paul wrote 1 Timothy. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul may have written other letters to Timothy, but this is the earliest one that we still have. That is why it is known as 1 Timothy or First Timothy. Timothy was Paul’s disciple and close friend. Paul probably wrote this letter near the end of his life.

### What is the Book of 1 Timothy about?

Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed included church worship, qualifications for church leaders, and warnings against false teachers. This letter shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches while Timothy himself trained other leaders.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its customary title, “1 Timothy” or “First Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is discipleship?

Discipleship is the process of making people to be disciples of Christ. The goal of discipleship is to encourage other Christians to be more like Christ. This letter gives many instructions about how a leader should train a less mature Christian. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ”?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 Timothy?

In [6:5](../06/05.md), the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1TI 1 intro a4v2 0 # 1 Timothy 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual children
In this chapter, Paul calls Timothy a “son” and his “child.” Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul called Timothy his “son in the faith.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Metaphor

In this chapter Paul speaks figuratively of people who are not fulfilling the purpose of their faith as if they had “missed the mark” that they were aiming at, as if they had “turned away” down a wrong path, and as if they had been “shipwrecked.” He speaks figuratively of following Jesus faithfully as “fighting the good fight.” +1TI 1 intro a4v2 0 # 1 Timothy 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual children

In this chapter, Paul calls Timothy a “son” and his “child.” Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul called Timothy his “son in the faith.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Metaphor

In this chapter Paul speaks figuratively of people who are not fulfilling the purpose of their faith as if they had “missed the mark” that they were aiming at, as if they had “turned away” down a wrong path, and as if they had been “shipwrecked.” He speaks figuratively of following Jesus faithfully as “fighting the good fight.” 1TI 1 1 i3zz Παῦλος 1 Paul In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Immediately after introducing the writer, you might also want to indicate to whom the letter was written. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am the one writing this letter to you, Timothy” 1TI 1 1 xl6d κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν Θεοῦ 1 by the command of God Alternate translation: “by the authority of God” 1TI 1 1 wb8j Θεοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν 1 God our Savior Alternate translation: “God, who saves us” @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 1 20 ty7n figs-metaphor οὓς παρέδωκα τῷ Σατανᾷ 1 whom I have given over to Satan Paul speaks figuratively as if he physically took hold of these men and handed them to Satan. If this does not make sense in your language, you can state it plainly. Alternate translation: “I have allowed Satan to command them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 1 20 az10 figs-explicit οὓς παρέδωκα τῷ Σατανᾷ 1 This probably means that Paul expelled them from the community of believers. Since they are no longer a part of the community, Satan has access to them and can harm them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you may want to include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “I have allowed Satan to make them suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TI 1 20 s76c figs-activepassive ἵνα παιδευθῶσι 1 so that they may be taught If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God may teach them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1TI 2 intro c6rf 0 # 1 Timothy 02 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Peace
Paul encourages Christians to pray for everyone. They should pray for rulers so that Christians can live peacefully, in a godly and dignified way.

### Women in the church

Scholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe that God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Other scholars believe that God wants women to use the gifts He gives them on an equal basis with men. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage. +1TI 2 intro c6rf 0 # 1 Timothy 02 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Peace

Paul encourages Christians to pray for everyone. They should pray for rulers so that Christians can live peacefully, in a godly and dignified way.

### Women in the church

Scholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe that God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Other scholars believe that God wants women to use the gifts He gives them on an equal basis with men. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage. 1TI 2 1 yk2z figs-idiom πρῶτον πάντων 1 first of all As in [1:15](../01/15.md), the term **first** figuratively means the superlative example of a class. Alternate translation: “most importantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TI 2 1 iag7 παρακαλῶ 1 I urge Alternate translation: “I encourage” or “I exhort” 1TI 2 1 ql7a figs-activepassive ποιεῖσθαι δεήσεις, προσευχάς, ἐντεύξεις, εὐχαριστίας 1 for requests, prayers, intercessions, and thanksgivings to be made If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action and who would receive the action. Alternate translation: “I urge all believers to make requests, prayers, intercessions, and thanksgivings to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 2 15 gh3c ἐὰν μείνωσιν 1 if they remain Here, **they** refers to women. Paul switches from the singular to the plural as he switches from talking about Eve as the representative of women to women in general. Alternate translation: “if women continue living” 1TI 2 15 sl57 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πίστει, καὶ ἀγάπῃ, καὶ ἁγιασμῷ 1 in faith and love and holiness If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **faith**, **love**, and **holiness** with verbs. Alternate translation: “trusting Jesus, loving others, and living in a holy way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TI 2 15 dcf3 figs-idiom μετὰ σωφροσύνης 1 with self-control Possible meanings of this expression here are: (1) “with good judgment,” (2) “with modesty,” or (3) “with clear thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TI 3 intro d9db 0 # 1 Timothy 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

[3:16](../03/16.md) was probably a song, poem, or creed the early church used to express what it understood to be the meaning of who Jesus was and what he did.

### Overseers and deacons
The church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include elder, pastor, and bishop. The word “overseer” reflects the Greek term in verses 1-2, which means literally an “over-seer.” The word “bishop” is derived directly from the letters of this Greek term. Paul writes about another kind of church leader, a “deacon,” in verses 8 and 12.

### Character qualities
This chapter lists several qualities that an overseer or deacon in the church must have. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1TI 3 intro d9db 0 # 1 Timothy 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

[3:16](../03/16.md) was probably a song, poem, or creed the early church used to express what it understood to be the meaning of who Jesus was and what he did.

### Overseers and deacons

The church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include elder, pastor, and bishop. The word “overseer” reflects the Greek term in verses 1-2, which means literally an “over-seer.” The word “bishop” is derived directly from the letters of this Greek term. Paul writes about another kind of church leader, a “deacon,” in verses 8 and 12.

### Character qualities

This chapter lists several qualities that an overseer or deacon in the church must have. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TI 3 1 t227 πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 This word is trustworthy As in [1:15](../01/15.md), in this context the term **word** has a meaning more like “statement” or “message.” Alternate translation: “this statement is dependable” 1TI 3 1 t228 figs-quotemarks πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 This word is trustworthy Paul uses this phrase to introduce a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by setting off the words that follow in the rest of the verse with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language may use to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1TI 3 1 t229 translate-unknown ἐπισκοπῆς 1 overseer This term describes a leader of the early Christian church whose work was to take care of the spiritual needs of believers and make sure that they received accurate biblical teaching. Alternate translation: “spiritual leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index 2d245c364e..316c643633 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -2TI front intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 2 Timothy

1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1-2:13).
2. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14–26).
3. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1-4:8).
4. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9-22).

### Who wrote the book of 2 Timothy?

Paul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

This book is the second letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.

### What is the book of 2 Timothy about?

Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and advice about enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Timothy” or “Second Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy” or “The Second Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?

As Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he spoke of being a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers have to obey to their leaders. In the same way, Christians have to obey Jesus. As “soldiers” of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.

### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?

God is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why the Bible is also referred to as God’s word. This implies several things about it. First, everything that the Bible teaches is free from error and can be trusted. Second, God will always preserve his Scripture for every generation of people. Third, God’s word should be translated into all the world’s languages.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Here the word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### Inclusive and exclusive “we” and “us”

In this book, “we” and “us” include the writer, Paul, the recipient, Timothy, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 2 Timothy?

For the following verses, the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts, and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible already exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text.

* “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher” (1:11). Some later manuscripts read, “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles.”
* “Warn them before God” (2:14). Some later manuscripts read, “Warn them before the Lord.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +2TI front intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 2 Timothy

1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1-2:13).
2. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14–26).
3. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1-4:8).
4. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9-22).

### Who wrote the book of 2 Timothy?

Paul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

This book is the second letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.

### What is the book of 2 Timothy about?

Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and advice about enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Timothy” or “Second Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy” or “The Second Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?

As Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he spoke of being a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers have to obey to their leaders. In the same way, Christians have to obey Jesus. As “soldiers” of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.

### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?

God is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why the Bible is also referred to as God’s word. This implies several things about it. First, everything that the Bible teaches is free from error and can be trusted. Second, God will always preserve his Scripture for every generation of people. Third, God’s word should be translated into all the world’s languages.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Here the word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### Inclusive and exclusive “we” and “us”

In this book, “we” and “us” include the writer, Paul, the recipient, Timothy, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 2 Timothy?

For the following verses, the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts, and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible already exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text.
* “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher” (1:11). Some later manuscripts read, “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles.”
* “Warn them before God” (2:14). Some later manuscripts read, “Warn them before the Lord.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 2TI 1 intro p5lf 0 # 2 Timothy 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual children

Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul calls Timothy “beloved child.” So even though Paul was not Timothy’s father, Paul speaks of his relationship with Timothy as that of a father and son in a spiritual sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Persecution

Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter. Paul encourages Timothy to be willing to suffer for the gospel. 2TI 1 1 p001 translate-names Παῦλος 1 Paul This is the name of a man, the author of the letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 1 ha4l Παῦλος 1 Paul This letter follows the normal custom of the time by beginning with the name and identity of the author, then mentioning the recipient (in verse 2). Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. If so, you can use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am writing this letter” @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 1 18 f3ep figs-explicit ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 in that day The expression **that day** refers to the day when God will judge all people; at that time they will receive mercy from the Lord, as Paul mentions, or wrath. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 1 18 p024 translate-names Ἐφέσῳ 1 Ephesus This is the name of a city, the place where Timothy, the recipient of the letter, is located. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 18 p025 figs-explicit ὅσα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ διηκόνησεν, βέλτιον σὺ γινώσκεις 1 how much he served in Ephesus, you know very well Paul is reminding Timothy that Onesiphorus helped him earlier, in Ephesus. So, Paul is asking the Lord to bless Onesiphorus because he helped Paul several times. Alternate translation: “you know well how much he also helped me earlier when I was in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 2 intro k3zn 0 # 2 Timothy 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In verses 11b-13, Paul may be quoting a poem or hymn. To show the reader that this may be a quotation, in your translation you may choose to set these verses farther to the right than the other verses in the chapter.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### We will reign with him
Faithful Christians will reign with Christ in the future. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Analogies
In this chapter, Paul makes several analogies to teach about living as a Christian. He uses analogies of soldiers, athletes, and farmers. Later in the chapter, he uses the analogy of different kinds of containers in a house. +2TI 2 intro k3zn 0 # 2 Timothy 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In verses 11b-13, Paul may be quoting a poem or hymn. To show the reader that this may be a quotation, in your translation you may choose to set these verses farther to the right than the other verses in the chapter.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### We will reign with him

Faithful Christians will reign with Christ in the future. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Analogies

In this chapter, Paul makes several analogies to teach about living as a Christian. He uses analogies of soldiers, athletes, and farmers. Later in the chapter, he uses the analogy of different kinds of containers in a house. 2TI 2 1 bll5 figs-metaphor τέκνον μου 1 my child Here, **child** is a term of great love and approval. Timothy is not Paul’s biological child. It is also likely that Paul introduced Timothy to Christ, and so this is why Paul considered him like his own child. Alternate translation: “who are like my child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 1 p026 figs-activepassive ἐνδυναμοῦ 1 be strengthened You could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “let God make you strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 2 1 e6ex figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ χάριτι τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the grace that is in Christ Jesus Paul wants Timothy to experience the strength that God provides through his **grace** or kindness. Believers experience God’s grace through knowing Jesus Christ. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “as you allow Christ Jesus to kindly empower you through your relationship to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) diff --git a/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv b/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv index 1751c97ad7..6e5e911502 100644 --- a/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv +++ b/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -HEB front intro xy4n 0 # Introduction to Hebrews

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Hebrews

1. Jesus is superior to God’s prophets and angels (1:1-4:13)
1. Jesus is superior to the priests who serve in the temple in Jerusalem (4:14-7:28)
1. Jesus’ ministry is superior to the old covenant that God made with his people (8:1-10:39)
1. What faith is like (11:1-40)
1. Encouragement to be faithful to God (12:1-29)
1. Concluding encouragements and greetings (13:1-25)

### Who wrote the Book of Hebrews?

No one knows who wrote Hebrews. Scholars have suggested several different people who could possibly be the author. Possible authors are Paul, Luke, and Barnabas. The date of writing is also not known. Most scholars think it was written before A.D. 70. Jerusalem was destroyed in A.D. 70, but the writer of this letter spoke about Jerusalem as if it had not yet been destroyed.

### What is the Book of Hebrews about?

In the Book of Hebrews, the author shows that Jesus fulfilled Old Testament prophecies. The author did this in order to encourage the Jewish Christians and to explain that Jesus is better than anything that the old covenant had to offer. Jesus is the perfect High Priest. Jesus was also the perfect sacrifice. Animal sacrifices became useless because Jesus’ sacrifice was once and for all time. Therefore, Jesus is the one and only way for people to be accepted by God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Hebrews.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Letter to the Hebrews” or “A Letter to the Jewish Christians.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Can readers understand this book without knowing about the sacrifices and the work of the priests required in the Old Testament?

It would be very difficult for readers to understand this book without understanding these matters. Translators might consider explaining some of these Old Testament concepts in notes or in an introduction to this book.

### How is the idea of blood used in the Book of Hebrews?

Beginning in [Hebrews 9:7](../../heb/09/07.md), the idea of blood is often used as metonymy to represent the death of any animal that was sacrificed according to God’s covenant with Israel. The author also used blood to represent the death of Jesus Christ. Jesus became the perfect sacrifice so that God would forgive people for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

Beginning in [Hebrews 9:19](../../heb/09/19.md), the author used the idea of sprinkling as a symbolic action. Old Testament priests sprinkled the blood of the animals sacrificed. This was a symbol of the benefits of the animal’s death being applied to the people or to an object. This showed that the people or the object was acceptable to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Hebrews in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:

* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God views Christians as sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.”
* Sometimes the meaning indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 6:10; 13:24)
* Sometimes the meaning implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “sanctify,” “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.” (See: 2:11: 9:13; 10:10, 14, 29; 13:12)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Hebrews?

For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

* “you crowned him with glory and honor” (2:7). Some older versions read, “you crowned him with glory and honor and you have put him over the works of your hands.”
* “those who did not unite in faith with those who obeyed” (4:2). Some older versions read, “those who heard it without joining faith to it.”
* “Christ came as a high priest of the good things that have come” (9:11). Some modern versions and older versions read, “Christ came as a high priest of the good things that are to come.”
* “on those who were prisoners” (10:34). Some older versions read, “of me in my chains.”
* “They were stoned. They were sawn in two. They were killed with the sword” (11:37). Some older versions read, “They were stoned. They were sawn in two. They were tempted. They were killed with the sword.”
* “If even an animal touches the mountain, it must be stoned” (12:20). Some older versions read, “If even an animal touches the mountain, it must be stoned or shot with an arrow.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +HEB front intro xy4n 0 # Introduction to Hebrews

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Hebrews

1. Jesus is superior to God’s prophets and angels (1:1-4:13)
1. Jesus is superior to the priests who serve in the temple in Jerusalem (4:14-7:28)
1. Jesus’ ministry is superior to the old covenant that God made with his people (8:1-10:39)
1. What faith is like (11:1-40)
1. Encouragement to be faithful to God (12:1-29)
1. Concluding encouragements and greetings (13:1-25)

### Who wrote the Book of Hebrews?

No one knows who wrote Hebrews. Scholars have suggested several different people who could possibly be the author. Possible authors are Paul, Luke, and Barnabas. The date of writing is also not known. Most scholars think it was written before A.D. 70. Jerusalem was destroyed in A.D. 70, but the writer of this letter spoke about Jerusalem as if it had not yet been destroyed.

### What is the Book of Hebrews about?

In the Book of Hebrews, the author shows that Jesus fulfilled Old Testament prophecies. The author did this in order to encourage the Jewish Christians and to explain that Jesus is better than anything that the old covenant had to offer. Jesus is the perfect High Priest. Jesus was also the perfect sacrifice. Animal sacrifices became useless because Jesus’ sacrifice was once and for all time. Therefore, Jesus is the one and only way for people to be accepted by God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Hebrews.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Letter to the Hebrews” or “A Letter to the Jewish Christians.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Can readers understand this book without knowing about the sacrifices and the work of the priests required in the Old Testament?

It would be very difficult for readers to understand this book without understanding these matters. Translators might consider explaining some of these Old Testament concepts in notes or in an introduction to this book.

### How is the idea of blood used in the Book of Hebrews?

Beginning in [Hebrews 9:7](../../heb/09/07.md), the idea of blood is often used as metonymy to represent the death of any animal that was sacrificed according to God’s covenant with Israel. The author also used blood to represent the death of Jesus Christ. Jesus became the perfect sacrifice so that God would forgive people for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

Beginning in [Hebrews 9:19](../../heb/09/19.md), the author used the idea of sprinkling as a symbolic action. Old Testament priests sprinkled the blood of the animals sacrificed. This was a symbol of the benefits of the animal’s death being applied to the people or to an object. This showed that the people or the object was acceptable to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Hebrews in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God views Christians as sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.”
* Sometimes the meaning indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 6:10; 13:24)
* Sometimes the meaning implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “sanctify,” “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.” (See: 2:11: 9:13; 10:10, 14, 29; 13:12)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Hebrews?

For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “you crowned him with glory and honor” (2:7). Some older versions read, “you crowned him with glory and honor and you have put him over the works of your hands.”
* “those who did not unite in faith with those who obeyed” (4:2). Some older versions read, “those who heard it without joining faith to it.”
* “Christ came as a high priest of the good things that have come” (9:11). Some modern versions and older versions read, “Christ came as a high priest of the good things that are to come.”
* “on those who were prisoners” (10:34). Some older versions read, “of me in my chains.”
* “They were stoned. They were sawn in two. They were killed with the sword” (11:37). Some older versions read, “They were stoned. They were sawn in two. They were tempted. They were killed with the sword.”
* “If even an animal touches the mountain, it must be stoned” (12:20). Some older versions read, “If even an animal touches the mountain, it must be stoned or shot with an arrow.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) HEB 1 intro aaf9 0 # Hebrews 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter describes how Jesus is more important to us than the angels are.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:5, 7-13, which are words from the Old Testament.

### “Our ancestors”

The writer wrote this letter to Christians who had grown up as Jews. This is why the letter is called “Hebrews.”

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

The author uses rhetorical questions as a way of proving Jesus is better than the angels. Both he and the readers know the answers to the questions, and the writer knows that as the readers think about the answers to the questions, they will realize that God’s Son is more important than any of the angels.

### Poetry

Jewish teachers, like the Old Testament prophets, would put their most important teachings in the form of poetry so that the hearers would be able to learn and remember them. HEB 1 1 c5f3 0 General Information: Although this letter does not mention the recipients to whom it was sent, the author wrote particularly to Hebrews (Jews), who would have understood the many Old Testament references. HEB 1 1 c5f4 0 General Information: This prologue lays the background for the whole book: the unsurpassing greatness of the Son — the Son is greater than all. The book begins with emphasizing that the Son is better than the prophets and the angels. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ HEB 5 12 yk1q figs-metaphor γάλακτος, οὐ στερεᾶς τροφῆ HEB 5 13 nhx3 figs-metonymy μετέχων γάλακτος 1 takes milk Here, **takes** stands for “drinks.” Alternate translation: “drinks milk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 5 13 vl7k figs-metaphor νήπιος γάρ ἐστιν 1 because he is still a little child Spiritual maturity is compared with the kind of food that a growing child eats. Solid food is not for a tiny baby, and that is a figure describing a young Christian who only learns simple truths; but later, more solid food is given to the little child, just as when a person matures he can learn about matters that are more difficult. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 5 14 e3yh figs-metonymy τῶν διὰ τὴν ἕξιν τὰ αἰσθητήρια γεγυμνασμένα, ἐχόντων πρὸς διάκρισιν, καλοῦ τε καὶ κακοῦ 1 who because of their maturity have their understanding trained for distinguishing good from evil People trained to understand something are spoken of as if their ability to understand had been trained. Alternate translation: “who are mature and can distinguish between good and evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -HEB 6 intro nz5i 0 # Hebrews 06 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Abrahamic Covenant

In the covenant that God made with Abraham, God promised to make Abraham’s descendants into a great nation. He also promised to protect Abraham’s descendants and to give them land of their own. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]]) +HEB 6 intro nz5i 0 # Hebrews 06 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Abrahamic Covenant

In the covenant that God made with Abraham, God promised to make Abraham’s descendants into a great nation. He also promised to protect Abraham’s descendants and to give them land of their own. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]]) HEB 6 1 f1nk 0 Connecting Statement: The writer continues with what immature Hebrew believers need to do to become mature Christians. He reminds them of the foundational teachings. HEB 6 1 i4xr figs-metaphor ἀφέντες τὸν τῆς ἀρχῆς τοῦ Χριστοῦ λόγον, ἐπὶ τὴν τελειότητα φερώμεθα 1 let us leave the beginning of the message of Christ and move forward to maturity This speaks about the basic teachings as if they were the beginning of a journey and the mature teachings as if they were the end of a journey. Alternate translation: “let us stop only discussing what we first learned and start understanding more mature teachings as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 6 1 thw8 figs-metaphor μὴ πάλιν θεμέλιον καταβαλλόμενοι…πίστεως ἐπὶ Θεόν 1 Let us not lay again the foundation…of faith in God Basic teachings are spoken of as if they were a building whose construction begins by laying a foundation. Alternate translation: “Let us not repeat the basic teachings…of faith in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ HEB 9 26 dq7m figs-metaphor εἰς ἀθέτησιν ἁμαρτίας διὰ HEB 9 28 p8b6 figs-activepassive ὁ Χριστός ἅπαξ προσενεχθεὶς 1 Christ was offered once This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Christ offered himself once” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 9 28 hv2t figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ…ἀνενεγκεῖν ἁμαρτίας 1 to take away the sins The act of making us innocent rather than guilty for our sins is spoken of as if our sins were physical objects that Christ could carry away from us. Alternate translation: “so that God would forgive the sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 9 28 p6th figs-metonymy τὸ…ἁμαρτίας 1 the sins Here, **sins** mean the guilt that people have before God because of the sins they committed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -HEB 10 intro nev1 0 # Hebrews 10 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, the writer finishes describing how Jesus’ sacrifice was better than the sacrifices offered in the Temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 10:5-7, 15-17, 37-38, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### God’s judgment and reward

Holy living is important for Christians. God will hold people accountable for how they lived their Christian life. Even though there will not be eternal condemnation for Christians, ungodly actions do and will have consequences. In addition, faithful living will be rewarded. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “For it is impossible for the blood of bulls and goats to take away sins”
The sacrifices themselves had no redeeming power. They were effective because they were a display of faith, which was credited to the person offering the sacrifice. It was ultimately the sacrifice of Jesus which then makes these sacrifices “take away sins.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/redeem]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### “The covenant that I will make”
It is unclear whether this prophecy was being fulfilled as the author was writing or whether it was to occur later. The translator should try to avoid making a claim about the time this covenant begins. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]]) +HEB 10 intro nev1 0 # Hebrews 10 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, the writer finishes describing how Jesus’ sacrifice was better than the sacrifices offered in the Temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 10:5-7, 15-17, 37-38, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### God’s judgment and reward

Holy living is important for Christians. God will hold people accountable for how they lived their Christian life. Even though there will not be eternal condemnation for Christians, ungodly actions do and will have consequences. In addition, faithful living will be rewarded. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “For it is impossible for the blood of bulls and goats to take away sins”

The sacrifices themselves had no redeeming power. They were effective because they were a display of faith, which was credited to the person offering the sacrifice. It was ultimately the sacrifice of Jesus which then makes these sacrifices “take away sins.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/redeem]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### “The covenant that I will make”

It is unclear whether this prophecy was being fulfilled as the author was writing or whether it was to occur later. The translator should try to avoid making a claim about the time this covenant begins. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]]) HEB 10 1 kwq1 0 Connecting Statement: The writer shows the weakness of the law and its sacrifices, why God gave the law, and the perfection of the new priesthood and Christ’s sacrifice. HEB 10 1 kj83 figs-metaphor σκιὰν…ἔχων ὁ νόμος τῶν μελλόντων ἀγαθῶν 1 the law is only a shadow of the good things to come This speaks about the law as if it were a shadow. The author means the law is not the good things that God had promised. It only hints at the good things that God is going to do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 10 1 r6ly οὐκ αὐτὴν τὴν εἰκόνα τῶν πραγμάτων 1 not the real forms of those things themselves “not the real things themselves” diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index 6529c6e9d2..6342bbc629 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -1PE front intro c1uv 0 # Introduction to 1 Peter

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of 1 Peter

1. Introduction (1:1-2)
1. Praise for God’s salvation of the believers (1:3-2:10)
1. Christian living (2:11-4:11)
1. Encouragement to persevere when suffering (4:12-5:11)
1. Closing (5:12-14)


### Who wrote the Book of 1 Peter?

The Book of 1 Peter was written by the Apostle Peter. He wrote the letter to Gentile Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.

### What is the Book of 1 Peter about?

Peter stated that he wrote this letter for the purpose of “encouraging you and testifying that this is the true grace of God” (5:12).
He encouraged Christians to continue obeying God even when they are suffering. He told them to do this because Jesus will return soon. Peter also gave instructions about Christians submitting to persons in authority.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title “1 Peter” or “First Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The First Letter from Peter” or “The First Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### How were Christians treated in Rome?

Peter probably was in Rome when he wrote this letter. He gave Rome the symbolic name of “Babylon” (5:13). It appears that when Peter wrote this letter, Romans were badly persecuting Christians.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”
In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter, except for two places: [1 Peter 1:16](../01/16.md) and [1 Peter 2:6](../02/06.md). The word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Peter?

* “You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth. This was for the purpose of sincere brotherly love; so love one another earnestly from the heart” (1:22). The ULT, UST, and most other modern versions read this way. Some older versions read, “You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth through the Spirit for the purpose of sincere brotherly love, so love one another earnestly from the heart.”

If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1PE front intro c1uv 0 # Introduction to 1 Peter

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of 1 Peter

1. Introduction (1:1-2)
1. Praise for God’s salvation of the believers (1:3-2:10)
1. Christian living (2:11-4:11)
1. Encouragement to persevere when suffering (4:12-5:11)
1. Closing (5:12-14)


### Who wrote the Book of 1 Peter?

The Book of 1 Peter was written by the Apostle Peter. He wrote the letter to Gentile Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.

### What is the Book of 1 Peter about?

Peter stated that he wrote this letter for the purpose of “encouraging you and testifying that this is the true grace of God” (5:12).

He encouraged Christians to continue obeying God even when they are suffering. He told them to do this because Jesus will return soon. Peter also gave instructions about Christians submitting to persons in authority.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title “1 Peter” or “First Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The First Letter from Peter” or “The First Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### How were Christians treated in Rome?

Peter probably was in Rome when he wrote this letter. He gave Rome the symbolic name of “Babylon” (5:13). It appears that when Peter wrote this letter, Romans were badly persecuting Christians.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter, except for two places: [1 Peter 1:16](../01/16.md) and [1 Peter 2:6](../02/06.md). The word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Peter?
* “You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth. This was for the purpose of sincere brotherly love; so love one another earnestly from the heart” (1:22). The ULT, UST, and most other modern versions read this way. Some older versions read, “You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth through the Spirit for the purpose of sincere brotherly love, so love one another earnestly from the heart.”

If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1PE 1 intro ql4i 0 # 1 Peter 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 1:24-25.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### What God reveals

When Jesus comes again, everyone will see how good God’s people were to have faith in Jesus. Then God’s people will see how gracious God has been to them, and all people will praise both God and his people.

### Holiness

God wants his people to be holy because God is holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### Eternity

Peter tells Christians to live for things that will last forever and not to live for the things of this world, which will end. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Peter writes that his readers are glad and sad at the same time ([1 Peter 1:6](../01/06.md)). He can say this because they are sad because they are suffering, but they are glad because they know that God will save them “in the last time” ([1 Peter 1:5](../01/05.md)) 1PE 1 1 g6b4 0 General Information: Peter identifies himself as the writer and identifies and greets the believers to whom he is writing. 1PE 1 1 u3zc figs-metaphor ἐκλεκτοῖς παρεπιδήμοις διασπορᾶς 1 to the elect foreigners of the dispersion Peter speaks of his readers as people who live away from their homes in many different countries. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 3 21 jti3 δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 through the resurrection of Jesus Christ “because of the resurrection of Jesus Christ.” This phrase completes the thought, “This is a symbol of the baptism that saves you now.” 1PE 3 22 g4qh figs-metonymy ὅς ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ Θεοῦ 1 who is at the right hand of God To be at the **right hand of God** is a symbol that God has given Jesus greatest honor and authority over all others. Alternate translation: “who is beside God in the place of honor and authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 22 f6jq ὑποταγέντων αὐτῷ 1 after…had been subjected to him “when…had submitted to Jesus Christ” -1PE 4 intro zh5n 0 # 1 Peter 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:18.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Ungodly Gentiles

This passage uses the term “Gentiles” to refer to all ungodly people who are not Jews. It does not include Gentiles who have become Christians. “Sensuality, passion, drunkenness, carousings, wild parties, and disgusting acts of idolatry” were actions that characterized or typified the ungodly Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

### Martyrdom
It is apparent that Peter is speaking to many Christians who are experiencing great persecution and are facing death for their beliefs.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Let it” and “Let none” and “Let him” and “Let those”

Peter uses these phrases to tell his readers what he wants them to do. They are like commands because he wants his readers to obey. But it is as if he is telling one person what he wants other people to do. +1PE 4 intro zh5n 0 # 1 Peter 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:18.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Ungodly Gentiles

This passage uses the term “Gentiles” to refer to all ungodly people who are not Jews. It does not include Gentiles who have become Christians. “Sensuality, passion, drunkenness, carousings, wild parties, and disgusting acts of idolatry” were actions that characterized or typified the ungodly Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

### Martyrdom

It is apparent that Peter is speaking to many Christians who are experiencing great persecution and are facing death for their beliefs.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Let it” and “Let none” and “Let him” and “Let those”

Peter uses these phrases to tell his readers what he wants them to do. They are like commands because he wants his readers to obey. But it is as if he is telling one person what he wants other people to do. 1PE 4 1 b8d4 0 Connecting Statement: Peter continues to teach the believers about Christian living. He begins by giving a conclusion to his thoughts from the previous chapter about Christ’s sufferings. 1PE 4 1 ess6 σαρκὶ 1 in the flesh “in his body” 1PE 4 1 p2rv figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς τὴν αὐτὴν ἔννοιαν ὁπλίσασθε 1 arm yourselves with the same intention The phrase **arm yourselves** makes readers think of soldiers who get their weapons ready for battle. It also pictures **the same intention** as a weapon or perhaps as a piece of armor. Here this metaphor means that believers should be determined in their mind to suffer as Jesus did. Alternate translation: “prepare yourselves with the same thoughts that Christ had” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index dcabfeb835..1cbc62357c 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -2PE front intro mvk9 0 # Introduction to 2 Peter

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 Peter

1. Introduction (1:1-2)
1. Reminder to live good lives because God has enabled us to (1:3-21)
1. Warning against false teachers (2:1-22)
1. Encouragement to prepare for the second coming of Jesus (3:1-17)

### Who wrote the Book of 2 Peter?

The author identified himself as Simon Peter. Simon Peter was an apostle. He also wrote 1 Peter. Peter probably wrote this letter while in a prison in Rome just before he died. Peter called this letter his second letter, so we can date it after 1 Peter. He addressed the letter to the same audience as his first letter. The audience probably was Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.

### What is the Book of 2 Peter about?

Peter wrote this letter to encourage believers to live good lives. He warned them about false teachers who were saying Jesus was taking too long to return. He told them that Jesus was not slow in returning. Instead, God was giving people time to repent so that they would be saved.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Peter” or “Second Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Second Letter from Peter” or “The Second Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Who were the people Peter spoke against?

It is possible that the people Peter spoke against were those who would become known as Gnostics. These teachers distorted the teachings of scripture for their own gain. They lived in immoral ways and taught others to do the same.

### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?

The doctrine of scripture is a very important one. 2 Peter helps readers to understand that while each writer of scripture had his own distinct way of writing, God is the true author of scripture (1:20-21).

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter. Also, the word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Peter?

For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

* “to be kept in chains of lower darkness until the judgment” (2:4). Some modern versions and older versions have, “to be kept in pits of lower darkness until the judgment.”
* “They enjoy their deceitful actions while they are feasting with you” (2:13). Some versions have, “They enjoy their actions while they are feasting with you in love feasts.”
* “Beor” (2:15). Some other versions read, “Bosor.”
* “The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be revealed” (3:10). Other versions have, “The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be burned up.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -2PE 1 intro wjw5 0 # 2 Peter 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Knowledge of God
Having knowledge of God means to belong to him or to have a relationship with him. Here, “knowledge” is more than just mentally knowing about God. It is a knowledge that causes God to save a person and to give him grace and peace. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/know]])

### Living godly lives
Peter teaches that God has given believers all that they need for living godly lives. Therefore, believers should do everything they can to obey God more and more. If believers continue to do this, then they will be effective and productive through their relationship with Jesus. However, if believers do not continue living godly lives, then it is like they have forgotten what God did through Christ to save them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The truth of Scripture
Peter teaches that the prophecies in Scripture were not made up by men. The Holy Spirit revealed God’s message to the men who spoke them or wrote them down. Also, Peter and the other apostles did not make up the stories they told people about Jesus. They witnessed what Jesus did and heard God call Jesus his son. +2PE front intro mvk9 0 # Introduction to 2 Peter

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 Peter

1. Introduction (1:1-2)
1. Reminder to live good lives because God has enabled us to (1:3-21)
1. Warning against false teachers (2:1-22)
1. Encouragement to prepare for the second coming of Jesus (3:1-17)

### Who wrote the Book of 2 Peter?

The author identified himself as Simon Peter. Simon Peter was an apostle. He also wrote 1 Peter. Peter probably wrote this letter while in a prison in Rome just before he died. Peter called this letter his second letter, so we can date it after 1 Peter. He addressed the letter to the same audience as his first letter. The audience probably was Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.

### What is the Book of 2 Peter about?

Peter wrote this letter to encourage believers to live good lives. He warned them about false teachers who were saying Jesus was taking too long to return. He told them that Jesus was not slow in returning. Instead, God was giving people time to repent so that they would be saved.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Peter” or “Second Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Second Letter from Peter” or “The Second Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Who were the people Peter spoke against?

It is possible that the people Peter spoke against were those who would become known as Gnostics. These teachers distorted the teachings of scripture for their own gain. They lived in immoral ways and taught others to do the same.

### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?

The doctrine of scripture is a very important one. 2 Peter helps readers to understand that while each writer of scripture had his own distinct way of writing, God is the true author of scripture (1:20-21).

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter. Also, the word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Peter?

For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “to be kept in chains of lower darkness until the judgment” (2:4). Some modern versions and older versions have, “to be kept in pits of lower darkness until the judgment.”
* “They enjoy their deceitful actions while they are feasting with you” (2:13). Some versions have, “They enjoy their actions while they are feasting with you in love feasts.”
* “Beor” (2:15). Some other versions read, “Bosor.”
* “The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be revealed” (3:10). Other versions have, “The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be burned up.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +2PE 1 intro wjw5 0 # 2 Peter 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Knowledge of God

Having knowledge of God means to belong to him or to have a relationship with him. Here, “knowledge” is more than just mentally knowing about God. It is a knowledge that causes God to save a person and to give him grace and peace. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/know]])

### Living godly lives

Peter teaches that God has given believers all that they need for living godly lives. Therefore, believers should do everything they can to obey God more and more. If believers continue to do this, then they will be effective and productive through their relationship with Jesus. However, if believers do not continue living godly lives, then it is like they have forgotten what God did through Christ to save them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The truth of Scripture

Peter teaches that the prophecies in Scripture were not made up by men. The Holy Spirit revealed God’s message to the men who spoke them or wrote them down. Also, Peter and the other apostles did not make up the stories they told people about Jesus. They witnessed what Jesus did and heard God call Jesus his son. 2PE 1 1 n1di 0 General Information: Peter identifies himself as the writer and identifies and greets the believers he is writing to. 2PE 1 1 v381 δοῦλος καὶ ἀπόστολος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 a servant and apostle of Jesus Christ Peter speaks of being a **servant of Jesus Christ**. He also was given the position and authority of being Christ’s **apostle**. 2PE 1 1 yy7j figs-explicit τοῖς ἰσότιμον…λαχοῦσιν πίστιν 1 to those who have received the same precious faith That these people have **received** **faith** implies that God has given that faith to them. Alternate translation: “to those to whom God has given the same precious faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 1 20 wcn9 τοῦτο πρῶτον γινώσκοντες 1 Above all, you must understand “Most importantly, you must understand” 2PE 1 20 s4k2 πᾶσα προφητεία Γραφῆς ἰδίας ἐπιλύσεως οὐ γίνεται 1 every prophecy of scripture does not coms from one’s own interpretation Possible meanings are (1) the prophets did not make any of their prophecies on their own or (2) people must rely on the Holy Spirit to understand all the prophecies or (3) people must interpret every prophecy with the help of the entire Christian community of believers. 2PE 1 21 mh2s figs-metaphor ὑπὸ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου φερόμενοι, ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι 1 men spoke from God being carried along by the Holy Spirit Peter speaks of the **Holy Spirit** helping the prophets to write what God wanted them to write as if the Holy Spirit was carrying them from one place to another. Alternate translation: “men spoke from God as the Holy Spirit directed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2PE 2 intro mv79 0 # 2 Peter 02 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Flesh

“Flesh” is a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. It is not the physical part of man that is sinful. “Flesh” represents the human nature that rejects all things godly and desires what is sinful. This is the condition of all humans before they receive the Holy Spirit by believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

### Implicit information
There are several analogies in 2:4-8 that are difficult to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. Further explanation may be necessary. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2PE 2 intro mv79 0 # 2 Peter 02 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Flesh

“Flesh” is a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. It is not the physical part of man that is sinful. “Flesh” represents the human nature that rejects all things godly and desires what is sinful. This is the condition of all humans before they receive the Holy Spirit by believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

### Implicit information

There are several analogies in 2:4-8 that are difficult to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. Further explanation may be necessary. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 2 1 us8u 0 General Information: Peter begins to warn the believers about false teachers. 2PE 2 1 l2cg ἐγένοντο…καὶ ψευδοπροφῆται ἐν τῷ λαῷ, ὡς καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν ἔσονται ψευδοδιδάσκαλοι 1 false prophets also came to the people, as false teachers will also come to you Just as **false prophets** came deceiving Israel with their words, so will false teachers come teaching lies about Christ. 2PE 2 1 tbz8 αἱρέσεις ἀπωλείας 1 destructive heresies The word **heresies** refers to opinions that are contrary to the teaching of Christ and the apostles. These heresies destroy the faith of those who believe them. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 21 blr5 figs-activepassive τῆς παραδοθείσης αὐτοῖς ἁγίας ἐντολῆς 1 the holy commandment delivered to them This can be stated in active terms. Alternate translation: “the holy commandment that God delivered to them” or “the holy commandment that God made sure that they received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 2 22 hqr3 συμβέβηκεν αὐτοῖς τὸ τῆς ἀληθοῦς παροιμίας 1 This has happened to them according to the true proverb “What the true proverb says has happened to them” or “This proverb describes what happened to them” 2PE 2 22 h42r writing-proverbs κύων ἐπιστρέψας ἐπὶ τὸ ἴδιον ἐξέραμα, καί, ὗς λουσαμένη, εἰς κυλισμὸν βορβόρου 1 A dog returns to its own vomit, and a washed pig to wallowing in the mud Peter uses two proverbs to illustrate how the false teachers, although they have known “the way of righteousness,” have turned back to the things that make them morally and spiritually impure. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) -2PE 3 intro c1id 0 # 2 Peter 03 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Fire
People often use fire to destroy things or to make something pure by burning off the dirt and worthless parts. Therefore when God punishes the wicked or purifies his people, it is often associated with fire. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fire]])

### Day of the Lord
The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will come as a surprise to people. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to be prepared for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +2PE 3 intro c1id 0 # 2 Peter 03 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Fire

People often use fire to destroy things or to make something pure by burning off the dirt and worthless parts. Therefore when God punishes the wicked or purifies his people, it is often associated with fire. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fire]])

### Day of the Lord

The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will come as a surprise to people. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to be prepared for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 2PE 3 1 n92f 0 General Information: Peter begins to talk about the last days. 2PE 3 1 gc3m figs-metaphor διεγείρω ὑμῶν…τὴν εἰλικρινῆ διάνοιαν 1 I am stirring up your sincere mind Peter speaks of causing his readers to think about these things as if he were waking them from sleep. Alternate translation: “I am causing you to think pure thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 3 2 gxj7 figs-activepassive τῶν προειρημένων ῥημάτων, ὑπὸ τῶν ἁγίων προφητῶν 1 the words spoken beforehand by the holy prophets This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the words that the holy prophets spoke in the past” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) diff --git a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv index ba6e27b136..6b281b16a2 100644 --- a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -1JN front intro nl27 0 # Introduction to 1 John


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 1 John

This is a letter that the apostle John wrote to challenge and correct false teachings that were leading followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and live in wrong ways. At that time, the letter form had distinct opening and closing sections. The main body of the letter came in between.

1. Opening of Letter (1:1-4)
2. Main Body of Letter (1:5–5:12)

* Genuine believers obey God and love one another (1:5–2:17)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Messiah (2:18–2:27)
* Genuine children of God do not sin (2:28–3:10)
* Genuine believers help one another sacrificially (3:11–18)
* Genuine believers have confidence in prayer (3:19–24)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus became human (4:1–6)
* Genuine believers love one another as God has loved them (4:7–21)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Son of God (5:1–12)

1. Closing of Letter (5:13-21)

### Who wrote the book of 1 John?

The author of this letter does not give his name. However, since early Christian times, the church has widely considered the apostle John to be the author. He wrote the Gospel of John, and there are many similarities between the content of that book and this letter. If John did write this letter, he probably did so near the end of his life.

### To whom was the book of 1 John written?

The author wrote this letter to people whom he addresses as “beloved” and, figuratively, as “my little children.” This probably means believers in various churches located in the area where John was then living.

### What is the book of 1 John about?

False teachers were encouraging followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and to live in wrong ways. John wanted to challenge and correct those false teachings so that the people who received his letter would continue to believe the truth they had been taught and live in right ways. The false teachers were saying that these people were not saved; John wanted to assure them that they were saved.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 John” or “First John.” They may also choose a different title, such as “The First Letter from John” or “The First Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Who were the people whom John spoke against?

The false teachers John was challenging seem to have held beliefs similar to what would later become known as Gnosticism. Those false teachers believed that the physical world was evil. They thought that God would not become human, since they considered the physical body to be evil, so they denied that Jesus was God come to earth in human form. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### “sin”

In chapter 1, John says that we should not deny that we have sinned. Rather, if we confess our sin, God will forgive us. In chapter 2, John says that he is writing this letter so that the recipients will not sin, but he adds that if they do sin, Jesus will advocate on their behalf. But in chapter 3, John says that everyone who has been begotten from God and who remains in God does not commit sin and is not able to sin. And in chapter 5, John says that we should not pray for people who are sinning certain ways, although we should pray for people who are sinning in other ways. This may seem confusing and contradictory.

However, the explanation is that the people whose teachings John was writing to challenge and correct were saying that it did not matter what people did in their bodies. This was because they thought physical matter was evil, and so they thought God did not care about it. In effect, they were saying that there was no such thing as sin. So John needed to say, in chapter 1, that sin is real and that everyone has sinned. Some of the believers may have been deceived by the false teaching and committed sins, so John also needed to reassure them that if they repented and confessed their sins, God would forgive them. John says similar things in chapter 2. Then in chapter 3 he explains that the new nature that believers have as children of God is one that does not want to sin and that does not enjoy sinning. So they should recognize that those who excuse or condone sin are not truly children of God, and that as children of God themselves, they can become more and more obedient and free from sin. Finally, in chapter 5, John warns that if a person sins wantonly and continually, this likely means that they have rejected Jesus and are not influenced by the Holy Spirit. He says that in that case, it may not be effective to pray for them. But he then encourages his readers that if a person sins occasionally but feels remorse, he is influenced by the Spirit, and so the prayers of other believers will help him repent and live in a right way again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]])

### “remain”

In this letter, John often uses the word “remain” (which could also be translated as “reside” or “abide”) as a spatial metaphor. John speaks of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if the word of Jesus “remained” in the believer. He speaks of a person being spiritually joined to someone else as if that person “remained” in the other person: He writes that Christians “remain” in Christ and in God, and he says that the Father “remains” in the Son, the Son “remains” in the Father, the Son “remains” in believers, and the Holy Spirit “remains” in believers.

Translators may find it difficult to represent these ideas in their own languages if they try to use exactly the same words and expressions each time. For example, in [2:6](../02/06.md), when John speaks of a believer “remaining” in God, he intends to express the idea of that believer being spiritually unified with God. Accordingly, UST speaks of the believer being “in union with God.” To give another example, for the statement in [2:13](../02/13.md) that “the word of God remains in you,” UST says, “you continue to obey what God commands.” This shows how other expressions can be found that accurately communicate the various ideas that John is expressing through the term “remain.”

### “appear”

In several places in this letter, John uses a term that ULT usually translates as “appear.” This is actually a passive verbal form in Greek, but as is often the case with such forms in that language, it can have an active meaning. When it has an active meaning, it is important to recognize that it does not simply mean “seemed to be there,” as the word “appeared” might suggest. Rather, it means “was there.” This is illustrated well by the use of the term in another New Testament book, 2 Corinthians, in which Paul writes in [5:10](../2co/05/10.md) that “we must all appear before the judgment seat of Christ.” Clearly this does not mean that we must only seem to be present there. Rather, we must actually be there.

Throughout the epistle, it is a subtle matter of interpretation to decide whether John is using the term “appear” in an active sense or in a passive sense. For example, in [1:2](../01/02.md), John applies the term twice to the “Word of life,” that is, to Jesus. But it is not clear whether he is saying that Jesus himself “appeared,” that is, he came to earth, or that he “was made apparent” (made visible), with the emphasis on the idea that God revealed Jesus to the world and in the process revealed himself to the world through Jesus. At each place where John uses this term, notes will call attention to it and discuss what it likely means in that context.

### “the world”

John also uses the term “world” in a variety of senses in this letter. It can mean the earth, something material, the people who live in the world, the people who do not honor God, or the values of the people who do not honor God. Notes will address the meaning of the term “world” in each instance where John uses it.

### “to know”

The verb “to know” is used in two different ways in this letter. Sometimes it is used about knowing a fact, as in 3:2, 3:5, and 3:19. Sometimes it means to experience and understand someone or something, as in 3:1, 3:6, 3:16, and 3:20. Sometimes John uses it in two different senses in the same sentence, as in 2:3, “in this we know that we have known him.” Your languages may have different words for these different meanings, and it would be appropriate to use them in your translation.

### Major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 John

When ancient manuscripts of the Bible differ, ULT puts the readings that scholars consider to be most accurate in its text, but it puts other possibly accurate readings in footnotes. The introductions to each chapter will discuss places where the ancient manuscripts differ in significant ways, and notes will address those places again where they occur in the book. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using the readings found in that version. If not, we recommend that you follow the readings in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1JN front intro nl27 0 # Introduction to 1 John


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 1 John

This is a letter that the apostle John wrote to challenge and correct false teachings that were leading followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and live in wrong ways. At that time, the letter form had distinct opening and closing sections. The main body of the letter came in between.

1. Opening of Letter (1:1-4)
2. Main Body of Letter (1:5–5:12)
* Genuine believers obey God and love one another (1:5–2:17)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Messiah (2:18–2:27)
* Genuine children of God do not sin (2:28–3:10)
* Genuine believers help one another sacrificially (3:11–18)
* Genuine believers have confidence in prayer (3:19–24)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus became human (4:1–6)
* Genuine believers love one another as God has loved them (4:7–21)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Son of God (5:1–12)

1. Closing of Letter (5:13-21)

### Who wrote the book of 1 John?

The author of this letter does not give his name. However, since early Christian times, the church has widely considered the apostle John to be the author. He wrote the Gospel of John, and there are many similarities between the content of that book and this letter. If John did write this letter, he probably did so near the end of his life.

### To whom was the book of 1 John written?

The author wrote this letter to people whom he addresses as “beloved” and, figuratively, as “my little children.” This probably means believers in various churches located in the area where John was then living.

### What is the book of 1 John about?

False teachers were encouraging followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and to live in wrong ways. John wanted to challenge and correct those false teachings so that the people who received his letter would continue to believe the truth they had been taught and live in right ways. The false teachers were saying that these people were not saved; John wanted to assure them that they were saved.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 John” or “First John.” They may also choose a different title, such as “The First Letter from John” or “The First Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Who were the people whom John spoke against?

The false teachers John was challenging seem to have held beliefs similar to what would later become known as Gnosticism. Those false teachers believed that the physical world was evil. They thought that God would not become human, since they considered the physical body to be evil, so they denied that Jesus was God come to earth in human form. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### “sin”

In chapter 1, John says that we should not deny that we have sinned. Rather, if we confess our sin, God will forgive us. In chapter 2, John says that he is writing this letter so that the recipients will not sin, but he adds that if they do sin, Jesus will advocate on their behalf. But in chapter 3, John says that everyone who has been begotten from God and who remains in God does not commit sin and is not able to sin. And in chapter 5, John says that we should not pray for people who are sinning certain ways, although we should pray for people who are sinning in other ways. This may seem confusing and contradictory.

However, the explanation is that the people whose teachings John was writing to challenge and correct were saying that it did not matter what people did in their bodies. This was because they thought physical matter was evil, and so they thought God did not care about it. In effect, they were saying that there was no such thing as sin. So John needed to say, in chapter 1, that sin is real and that everyone has sinned. Some of the believers may have been deceived by the false teaching and committed sins, so John also needed to reassure them that if they repented and confessed their sins, God would forgive them. John says similar things in chapter 2. Then in chapter 3 he explains that the new nature that believers have as children of God is one that does not want to sin and that does not enjoy sinning. So they should recognize that those who excuse or condone sin are not truly children of God, and that as children of God themselves, they can become more and more obedient and free from sin. Finally, in chapter 5, John warns that if a person sins wantonly and continually, this likely means that they have rejected Jesus and are not influenced by the Holy Spirit. He says that in that case, it may not be effective to pray for them. But he then encourages his readers that if a person sins occasionally but feels remorse, he is influenced by the Spirit, and so the prayers of other believers will help him repent and live in a right way again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]])

### “remain”

In this letter, John often uses the word “remain” (which could also be translated as “reside” or “abide”) as a spatial metaphor. John speaks of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if the word of Jesus “remained” in the believer. He speaks of a person being spiritually joined to someone else as if that person “remained” in the other person: He writes that Christians “remain” in Christ and in God, and he says that the Father “remains” in the Son, the Son “remains” in the Father, the Son “remains” in believers, and the Holy Spirit “remains” in believers.

Translators may find it difficult to represent these ideas in their own languages if they try to use exactly the same words and expressions each time. For example, in [2:6](../02/06.md), when John speaks of a believer “remaining” in God, he intends to express the idea of that believer being spiritually unified with God. Accordingly, UST speaks of the believer being “in union with God.” To give another example, for the statement in [2:13](../02/13.md) that “the word of God remains in you,” UST says, “you continue to obey what God commands.” This shows how other expressions can be found that accurately communicate the various ideas that John is expressing through the term “remain.”

### “appear”

In several places in this letter, John uses a term that ULT usually translates as “appear.” This is actually a passive verbal form in Greek, but as is often the case with such forms in that language, it can have an active meaning. When it has an active meaning, it is important to recognize that it does not simply mean “seemed to be there,” as the word “appeared” might suggest. Rather, it means “was there.” This is illustrated well by the use of the term in another New Testament book, 2 Corinthians, in which Paul writes in [5:10](../2co/05/10.md) that “we must all appear before the judgment seat of Christ.” Clearly this does not mean that we must only seem to be present there. Rather, we must actually be there.

Throughout the epistle, it is a subtle matter of interpretation to decide whether John is using the term “appear” in an active sense or in a passive sense. For example, in [1:2](../01/02.md), John applies the term twice to the “Word of life,” that is, to Jesus. But it is not clear whether he is saying that Jesus himself “appeared,” that is, he came to earth, or that he “was made apparent” (made visible), with the emphasis on the idea that God revealed Jesus to the world and in the process revealed himself to the world through Jesus. At each place where John uses this term, notes will call attention to it and discuss what it likely means in that context.

### “the world”

John also uses the term “world” in a variety of senses in this letter. It can mean the earth, something material, the people who live in the world, the people who do not honor God, or the values of the people who do not honor God. Notes will address the meaning of the term “world” in each instance where John uses it.

### “to know”

The verb “to know” is used in two different ways in this letter. Sometimes it is used about knowing a fact, as in 3:2, 3:5, and 3:19. Sometimes it means to experience and understand someone or something, as in 3:1, 3:6, 3:16, and 3:20. Sometimes John uses it in two different senses in the same sentence, as in 2:3, “in this we know that we have known him.” Your languages may have different words for these different meanings, and it would be appropriate to use them in your translation.

### Major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 John

When ancient manuscripts of the Bible differ, ULT puts the readings that scholars consider to be most accurate in its text, but it puts other possibly accurate readings in footnotes. The introductions to each chapter will discuss places where the ancient manuscripts differ in significant ways, and notes will address those places again where they occur in the book. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using the readings found in that version. If not, we recommend that you follow the readings in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1JN 1 intro ab9v 0 # 1 John 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Opening of the letter (1:1-4)
2. Genuine believers obey God and love one another (1:5–10, continues through 2:17)

## Important translation issues in this chapter

Like many Greek compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes this letter begins with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of [1:1](../01/01.md) to the middle of [1:3](../01/03.md). The parts of this sentence are not in the order that is customary in many languages. The direct object comes first, and it is very long, made up of many different clauses. The subject and verb do not come until near the end. And in the middle, there is a long digression. So it will be a challenge to translate.

One approach that might work well in your language would be to create a verse bridge that includes all of 1:1–3. You could break up this long sentence into several smaller sentences, repeating the subject and verb for clarity. This would allow you to present the parts of the sentence in an order that might be more customary in your language and that your readers might understand better. For example:

“So that you will have fellowship with us, we are declaring to you what we have seen and heard. We are declaring to you what was from the beginning, which we have heard, which we have seen with our eyes, which we have looked at and our hands have touched. It has to do with the Word of life. Indeed, the life appeared, and we have seen it, and we are testifying to it. Yes, we are announcing to you the eternal life that was with the Father and that appeared to us.”

If you take this approach, another way to translate the second sentence would be, “We are declaring to you what was from the beginning, what we have heard, what we have seen with our eyes, what we have looked at and our hands have touched.”

Another approach that could also work well, and which would not require a verse bridge, would be to leave the phrases in their present order, but to divide the sentence into three parts at the verse divisions. If you do that, you could also put your translation of the phrase “regarding the Word of life” at the beginning rather than the end of [1:1](../01/01.md) and present it as a topical introduction to the letter. Otherwise, your readers might not get the sense that this is a letter until they reached [1:4](../01/04.md), where John formally states his purpose for writing.

The notes to [1:1–4](../01/01.md) provide further specific suggestions for how to translate this long opening sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [1:4](../01/04.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts read “so that our joy may be fulfilled.” ULT follows that reading. However, some other ancient manuscripts read “your joy” instead of “our joy.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1JN 1 1 j363 writing-pronouns ὃ ἦν ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς, ὃ ἀκηκόαμεν, ὃ ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν, ὃ ἐθεασάμεθα, καὶ αἱ χεῖρες ἡμῶν ἐψηλάφησαν 1 What was from the beginning, which we have heard, which we have seen with our eyes, which we have looked at and our hands have touched See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter for how to translate the long sentence in [1:1–3](../01/01.md). If you follow the suggestion to translate the phrase “regarding the Word of life” as a topical introduction to this letter, you will already have indicated that the four clauses in this verse refer to a person, Jesus. You could therefore introduce them with the personal pronouns “who” and “whom.” Alternate translation: “He is the one who has existed from all eternity, whom we heard speak, whom we saw with our own eyes, and whom we looked at and touched with our own hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 1 1 j364 figs-idiom ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς 1 from the beginning John uses the phrase **from the beginning** in various ways in this letter. Here it refers to the eternal existence of Jesus. Alternate translation: “from all eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 3 24 j230 figs-metaphor καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 and he in him John is speaking figuratively as if God could be inside of believers. Alternate translation: “and God continues to have a close relationship with that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 24 j231 figs-idiom ἐν τούτῳ γινώσκομεν ὅτι 1 in this we know that This is an idiomatic expression that John uses many times in this letter. Alternate translation: “this is how we know that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 3 24 j232 figs-metaphor μένει ἐν ἡμῖν 1 he remains in us See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, it seems to mean the same thing as it does earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “he continues to have a close relationship with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 4 intro l3qa 0 # 1 John 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. It is false teaching to deny that Jesus became human (4:1–6)
2. Genuine believers love one another as God has loved them (4:7–21)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Spirit” and “spirit”

John uses the word “spirit” in different ways in this chapter.
Sometimes the word “spirit” refers to a supernatural being.
Sometimes the word “spirit” refers to the character of something. The expressions “the spirit of the antichrist,” “the spirit of truth,” and “the spirit of error” refer to what is typical of them.
When the word is written with a capital letter, as in the expressions “the Spirit of God” and “his Spirit,” it refers to the Holy Spirit.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Loving God

If people love God, they should show it in the way they live and the way they treat other people. Doing this may assure us that God has saved us and that we belong to him. But loving others does not save us. Be sure that this is clear in your translation. John says in 4:7 that “everyone who loves is begotten from God and knows God.” As the notes explain, this means that God is the spiritual father of everyone who loves, and everyone who loves is in a close relationship with God. But that love is a sign that they belong to God because of what Jesus did for them on the cross, as John says in 4:10. They were saved by what Jesus did, not because they themselves loved others. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [4:3](../04/03.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts say “acknowledge Jesus.” That is the reading that ULT follows. Some other ancient manuscripts say “acknowledge Jesus Christ having come in the flesh.” (Some of these manuscripts say “Jesus” or “the Lord Jesus” instead of “Jesus Christ.”) If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1JN 4 intro l3qa 0 # 1 John 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. It is false teaching to deny that Jesus became human (4:1–6)
2. Genuine believers love one another as God has loved them (4:7–21)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Spirit” and “spirit”

John uses the word “spirit” in different ways in this chapter.

Sometimes the word “spirit” refers to a supernatural being.

Sometimes the word “spirit” refers to the character of something. The expressions “the spirit of the antichrist,” “the spirit of truth,” and “the spirit of error” refer to what is typical of them.

When the word is written with a capital letter, as in the expressions “the Spirit of God” and “his Spirit,” it refers to the Holy Spirit.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Loving God

If people love God, they should show it in the way they live and the way they treat other people. Doing this may assure us that God has saved us and that we belong to him. But loving others does not save us. Be sure that this is clear in your translation. John says in 4:7 that “everyone who loves is begotten from God and knows God.” As the notes explain, this means that God is the spiritual father of everyone who loves, and everyone who loves is in a close relationship with God. But that love is a sign that they belong to God because of what Jesus did for them on the cross, as John says in 4:10. They were saved by what Jesus did, not because they themselves loved others. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [4:3](../04/03.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts say “acknowledge Jesus.” That is the reading that ULT follows. Some other ancient manuscripts say “acknowledge Jesus Christ having come in the flesh.” (Some of these manuscripts say “Jesus” or “the Lord Jesus” instead of “Jesus Christ.”) If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1JN 4 1 h1lv figs-nominaladj ἀγαπητοί 1 Beloved See how you translated this in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “You people whom I love” or “Dear friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1JN 4 1 zm7f figs-metonymy μὴ παντὶ πνεύματι πιστεύετε, ἀλλὰ δοκιμάζετε τὰ πνεύματα 1 do not believe every spirit, but test the spirits John is speaking figuratively of a prophet by association with the **spirit** that would inspire a prophet to speak. Alternate translation: “do not believe every prophet; instead, consider carefully what prophets say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 4 1 j234 figs-idiom εἰ ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν 1 whether they are from God The expression **from God** is an idiom. John uses it in various ways in this letter. Alternate translation: “in order to determine whether God has sent them” or “in order to determine whether God is inspiring them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) diff --git a/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv b/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv index fbd26926f0..60c02a743f 100644 --- a/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -2JN front intro vpa9 0 # Introduction to 2 John


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 John

1. Opening of letter (1:1-3)
2. Encouragement and the commandment to love one another (1:4-6)
3. Warning about false teachers (1:7–11)
4. Closing of letter (1:12-13)

### Who wrote the Book of 2 John?

The author of this letter identifies himself only as “the elder.” However, the content of 2 John is similar to the content in John’s gospel. This suggests that the apostle John wrote this letter, and he would have done so near the end of his life.

### To whom was the Book of 2 John written?

The author addresses this letter to someone he calls “the chosen lady” and to “her children” (1:1). Although this could refer to a specific woman and her children, that interpretation is unlikely. More probably, this is a figurative way to refer to a specific congregation and its members. This interpretation is supported by the way that John refers to the congregation with him as “the children of your chosen sister” in verse 13. This would be a readily understandable metaphor, since the word for “church” in Greek is a feminine noun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### What is the book of 2 John about?

It appears that John addressed this letter to a specific congregation of believers. John’s purpose in writing this letter to them was to warn his audience about false teachers. John did not want believers helping or giving money to false teachers.
He probably intended this message to be passed on to all believers in general.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 John” or “Second John.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Second Letter from John” or “The Second Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is hospitality?

Hospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. John wanted believers to offer hospitality to guests. However, he did not want believers to offer hospitality to false teachers.

### Who were the people John spoke against?

The people John spoke against may have been those who later became known as Gnostics. These people believed that the physical world was evil. Since the physical body was seen as evil, they did not think that God could become human. Therefore, they believed that Jesus was divine but denied that he was human. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the Book of 2 John?

In [1:12](../01/12.md), most modern versions of the Bible read “our joy.” There is another traditional reading that says “your joy.” If a version of the Bible already exists in your region, you should consider using the reading of that version in your translation. If not, you may wish to follow the reading that most Bible scholars consider to be authentic and say “our joy.” In this case, “our” would include both John and the letter recipients. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +2JN front intro vpa9 0 # Introduction to 2 John


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 John

1. Opening of letter (1:1-3)
2. Encouragement and the commandment to love one another (1:4-6)
3. Warning about false teachers (1:7–11)
4. Closing of letter (1:12-13)

### Who wrote the Book of 2 John?

The author of this letter identifies himself only as “the elder.” However, the content of 2 John is similar to the content in John’s gospel. This suggests that the apostle John wrote this letter, and he would have done so near the end of his life.

### To whom was the Book of 2 John written?

The author addresses this letter to someone he calls “the chosen lady” and to “her children” (1:1). Although this could refer to a specific woman and her children, that interpretation is unlikely. More probably, this is a figurative way to refer to a specific congregation and its members. This interpretation is supported by the way that John refers to the congregation with him as “the children of your chosen sister” in verse 13. This would be a readily understandable metaphor, since the word for “church” in Greek is a feminine noun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### What is the book of 2 John about?

It appears that John addressed this letter to a specific congregation of believers. John’s purpose in writing this letter to them was to warn his audience about false teachers. John did not want believers helping or giving money to false teachers.

He probably intended this message to be passed on to all believers in general.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 John” or “Second John.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Second Letter from John” or “The Second Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is hospitality?

Hospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. John wanted believers to offer hospitality to guests. However, he did not want believers to offer hospitality to false teachers.

### Who were the people John spoke against?

The people John spoke against may have been those who later became known as Gnostics. These people believed that the physical world was evil. Since the physical body was seen as evil, they did not think that God could become human. Therefore, they believed that Jesus was divine but denied that he was human. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the Book of 2 John?

In [1:12](../01/12.md), most modern versions of the Bible read “our joy.” There is another traditional reading that says “your joy.” If a version of the Bible already exists in your region, you should consider using the reading of that version in your translation. If not, you may wish to follow the reading that most Bible scholars consider to be authentic and say “our joy.” In this case, “our” would include both John and the letter recipients. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 2JN 1 1 uspy figs-123person ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 The elder In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, referring to themselves in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you can use the first person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “I, the elder, am writing this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 2JN 1 1 z4tk figs-explicit ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 The elder **The elder** likely means John, the apostle and disciple of Jesus. He refers to himself as **elder** either because of his old age, or because he is a leader in the church, or both. If you have a term for an older, respected leader, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “I, John, am writing this letter” or Alternate translation: “I, John the elder, am writing this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2JN 1 1 y7hw figs-123person ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις αὐτῆς 1 to the chosen lady and her children In this culture, letter writers would name the addressees next, referring to them in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you can use the second person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the person who receives a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “to you, chosen lady, and to your children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) diff --git a/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv b/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv index 889f4e279c..7e952e73ed 100644 --- a/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv +++ b/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ JUD 1 4 wwz3 figs-activepassive οἱ πάλαι προγεγραμμένοι ε JUD 1 4 c642 figs-metaphor τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν χάριτα μετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν 1 changing the grace of our God into sensuality God’s **grace** is spoken of as if it were a thing that could be changed into something horrible. Alternate translation: “teaching that God’s grace permits one to continue to live in sexual sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JUD 1 4 ws1b τὸν μόνον Δεσπότην καὶ Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν, ἀρνούμενοι 1 denying our only Master and Lord, Jesus Christ Possible meanings are (1) they teach that Jesus is not God or (2) these men do not obey Jesus Christ. JUD 1 5 fa5e 0 Connecting Statement: Jude gives examples from the past of those who did not follow the Lord. -JUD 1 5 f4mm figs-explicit Ἰησοῦς λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας 1 Jesus, having saved a people out of the land of Egypt You can state explicitly who the people were that he saved. Alternate translation: “the Lord, who rescued the Israelites long ago from Egypt”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JUD 1 5 f4mm figs-explicit Ἰησοῦς λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας 1 Jesus, having saved a people out of the land of Egypt You can state explicitly who the people were that he saved. Alternate translation: “the Lord, who rescued the Israelites long ago from Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JUD 1 6 pt1k τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν 1 their own domain “their own position of authority” or “the responsibilities God entrusted to them” JUD 1 6 s3cn δεσμοῖς ἀϊδίοις ὑπὸ ζόφον τετήρηκεν 1 he has kept in everlasting chains, under thick darkness “God has put these angels in a dark prison from which they will never escape” JUD 1 6 s1j9 figs-metonymy ὑπὸ ζόφον 1 under thick darkness Here, **darkness** is a metonym which represents the place of the dead or hell. Alternate translation: “in utter darkness in hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) diff --git a/en_tn_67-REV.tsv b/en_tn_67-REV.tsv index c6c293a907..232439f266 100644 --- a/en_tn_67-REV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_67-REV.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -REV front intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Revelation

1. Opening (1:1-20)
1. Letters to the seven churches (2:1-3:22)
1. Vision of God in heaven, and a vision of the Lamb (4:1-11)
1. The seven seals (6:1-8:1)
1. The seven trumpets (8:2-13:18)
1. Worshipers of the Lamb, the martyrs, and the harvest of wrath (14:1-20)
1. The seven bowls (15:1-18:24)
1. Worship in heaven (19:1-10)
1. The Lamb’s judgment, the destruction of the beast, the thousand years, the destruction of Satan, and the final judgment (20:11-15)
1. The new creation and the new Jerusalem (21:1-22:5)
1. Jesus’ promise to return, the witness from the angels, John’s closing words, Christ’s message to his church, the invitation and the warning (22:6-21)

### Who wrote the Book of Revelation?

The author identified himself as John. This was probably the Apostle John. He wrote the Book of Revelation while on the island of Patmos. The Romans exiled John there for teaching people about Jesus.

### What is the Book of Revelation about?

John wrote the Book of Revelation to encourage believers to remain faithful even when they are suffering. John described visions he had of Satan and his followers fighting against and killing believers. In the visions God causes many terrible things to happen on the earth to punish wicked people. In the end, Jesus defeats Satan and his followers. Then Jesus comforts those who were faithful. And the believers will live forever with God in the new heavens and earth.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by one of its traditional titles, “Revelation,” “The Revelation of Jesus Christ,” “The Revelation to Saint John,” or “The Apocalypse of John.” Or they may choose a possibly clearer title, such as “The Things that Jesus Christ Showed to John.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### What type of writing is the Book of Revelation?

John used a special style of writing to describe his visions. John described what he saw by using many symbols. This style of writing is called symbolic prophecy or apocalyptic literature. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Are the events of Revelation past or future?

Since early Christian times, scholars have interpreted Revelation differently. Some scholars think John described events that happened during his time. Some scholars think John described events happening from his time until the return of Jesus. Other scholars think John described events that will happen in a short period of time just before Christ returns.

Translators will not need to decide how to interpret the book before they translate it. Translators should leave the prophecies in the tenses that are used in the ULT.

### Are there any other books in the Bible like Revelation?

No other book of the Bible is like the Book of Revelation. But, passages in Ezekiel, Zechariah, and especially Daniel are similar in content and style to Revelation. It may be beneficial to translate Revelation at the same time as Daniel since they have some imagery and style in common.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Does one need to understand the Book of Revelation to translate it?

One does not need to understand all of the symbols in the Book of Revelation to translate it properly. Translators should not give possible meanings for the symbols or numbers in their translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Revelation in the ULT?

The scriptures use these words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating Revelation into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* The meaning in two passages indicates moral holiness. Here, the ULT uses “holy.” (See: 14:12; 22:11)
* Usually the meaning in Revelation indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 5:8; 8:3, 4; 11:18; 13:7; 16:6; 17:6; 18:20, 24; 19:8; 20:9)
* Sometimes the meaning implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “sanctify,” “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.”

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### Periods of time

John referred to various periods of time in Revelation. For example, there are many references to forty-two months, seven years, and three and a half days. Some scholars think these time periods are symbolic. Other scholars think these are actual time periods. The translator should treat these time periods as referencing actual periods of time. It is then up to the interpreter to determine their significance or what they may represent.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Revelation?

For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

* “‘I am the alpha and the omega,’ says the Lord God, ‘the one who is, and who was, and who is to come, the Almighty’” (1:8). Some versions add the phrase “the Beginning and the End.”
* “the elders prostrated themselves and worshiped” (5:14). Some older versions read, “the twenty-four elders prostrated themselves and worshiped the one who lives forever and ever.”
* “so that a third of it [the earth] was burned up” (8:7). Some older versions do not include this phrase.
* “the one who is and who was” (11:17). Some versions add the phrase “and who is to come.”
* “they are blameless” (14:5). Some versions add the phrase “before the throne of God” (14:5).
* “the one who is and who was, the Holy One” (16:5). Some older versions read, “O Lord, the One who is and who was and who is to be.”
* “The nations will walk by the light of that city” (21:24). Some older versions read, “The nations that are saved will walk by the light of that city.”
* “Blessed are those who wash their robes” (22:14). Some older versions read “Blessed are those who do his commandments.”
* “God will take away his share in the tree of life and in the holy city” (22:19). Some older versions read, “God will take away his share in the book of life and in the holy city.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +REV front intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Revelation

1. Opening (1:1-20)
1. Letters to the seven churches (2:1-3:22)
1. Vision of God in heaven, and a vision of the Lamb (4:1-11)
1. The seven seals (6:1-8:1)
1. The seven trumpets (8:2-13:18)
1. Worshipers of the Lamb, the martyrs, and the harvest of wrath (14:1-20)
1. The seven bowls (15:1-18:24)
1. Worship in heaven (19:1-10)
1. The Lamb’s judgment, the destruction of the beast, the thousand years, the destruction of Satan, and the final judgment (20:11-15)
1. The new creation and the new Jerusalem (21:1-22:5)
1. Jesus’ promise to return, the witness from the angels, John’s closing words, Christ’s message to his church, the invitation and the warning (22:6-21)

### Who wrote the Book of Revelation?

The author identified himself as John. This was probably the Apostle John. He wrote the Book of Revelation while on the island of Patmos. The Romans exiled John there for teaching people about Jesus.

### What is the Book of Revelation about?

John wrote the Book of Revelation to encourage believers to remain faithful even when they are suffering. John described visions he had of Satan and his followers fighting against and killing believers. In the visions God causes many terrible things to happen on the earth to punish wicked people. In the end, Jesus defeats Satan and his followers. Then Jesus comforts those who were faithful. And the believers will live forever with God in the new heavens and earth.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by one of its traditional titles, “Revelation,” “The Revelation of Jesus Christ,” “The Revelation to Saint John,” or “The Apocalypse of John.” Or they may choose a possibly clearer title, such as “The Things that Jesus Christ Showed to John.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### What type of writing is the Book of Revelation?

John used a special style of writing to describe his visions. John described what he saw by using many symbols. This style of writing is called symbolic prophecy or apocalyptic literature. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Are the events of Revelation past or future?

Since early Christian times, scholars have interpreted Revelation differently. Some scholars think John described events that happened during his time. Some scholars think John described events happening from his time until the return of Jesus. Other scholars think John described events that will happen in a short period of time just before Christ returns.

Translators will not need to decide how to interpret the book before they translate it. Translators should leave the prophecies in the tenses that are used in the ULT.

### Are there any other books in the Bible like Revelation?

No other book of the Bible is like the Book of Revelation. But, passages in Ezekiel, Zechariah, and especially Daniel are similar in content and style to Revelation. It may be beneficial to translate Revelation at the same time as Daniel since they have some imagery and style in common.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Does one need to understand the Book of Revelation to translate it?

One does not need to understand all of the symbols in the Book of Revelation to translate it properly. Translators should not give possible meanings for the symbols or numbers in their translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Revelation in the ULT?

The scriptures use these words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating Revelation into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* The meaning in two passages indicates moral holiness. Here, the ULT uses “holy.” (See: 14:12; 22:11)
* Usually the meaning in Revelation indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 5:8; 8:3, 4; 11:18; 13:7; 16:6; 17:6; 18:20, 24; 19:8; 20:9)
* Sometimes the meaning implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “sanctify,” “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.”

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### Periods of time

John referred to various periods of time in Revelation. For example, there are many references to forty-two months, seven years, and three and a half days. Some scholars think these time periods are symbolic. Other scholars think these are actual time periods. The translator should treat these time periods as referencing actual periods of time. It is then up to the interpreter to determine their significance or what they may represent.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Revelation?

For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “‘I am the alpha and the omega,’ says the Lord God, ‘the one who is, and who was, and who is to come, the Almighty’” (1:8). Some versions add the phrase “the Beginning and the End.”
* “the elders prostrated themselves and worshiped” (5:14). Some older versions read, “the twenty-four elders prostrated themselves and worshiped the one who lives forever and ever.”
* “so that a third of it [the earth] was burned up” (8:7). Some older versions do not include this phrase.
* “the one who is and who was” (11:17). Some versions add the phrase “and who is to come.”
* “they are blameless” (14:5). Some versions add the phrase “before the throne of God” (14:5).
* “the one who is and who was, the Holy One” (16:5). Some older versions read, “O Lord, the One who is and who was and who is to be.”
* “The nations will walk by the light of that city” (21:24). Some older versions read, “The nations that are saved will walk by the light of that city.”
* “Blessed are those who wash their robes” (22:14). Some older versions read “Blessed are those who do his commandments.”
* “God will take away his share in the tree of life and in the holy city” (22:19). Some older versions read, “God will take away his share in the book of life and in the holy city.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) REV 1 intro u1e2 0 # Revelation 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter explains how the Book of Revelation records the vision John received on the island of Patmos.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 7.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Seven churches

John wrote this book to seven actual churches in Asia Minor, which is now the country of Turkey.

### White

The Bible often speaks of something that belongs to a person as being “white.” This is metaphor and metonym for that person living rightly and pleasing God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### “Him who is, and who was, and who is to come”

God exists now. He has always existed. He will always exist. Your language may have a different way of saying this.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Blood

Blood is a metonym for death. Jesus “has released us from our sins by his blood.” John means that Jesus saved us from our sins by dying for us. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “He is coming with the clouds”

Jesus went into the clouds when he went up to heaven after God raised him from the dead. When Jesus returns, he will also be “with the clouds.” It is not clear whether he will be sitting or riding on clouds or coming in the clouds or “with the clouds” in some other way. Your translation should express this in a way that is natural in your language.

### “One like a son of man”

This refers to Jesus. You should translate the words “son of man” using the same words as you did in the Gospels for when Jesus called himself the “Son of Man.”

### “The angels of the seven churches”

The word “angels” here can also mean “messengers.” This might refer to heavenly beings, or to the messengers or leaders of these seven churches. John uses the same word “angel” (singular) in verse 1 and in many other places throughout the book. Your translation should also use the same word. REV 1 1 kv41 0 General Information: This is an introduction to the book of Revelation. It explains that it is a revelation from Jesus Christ and it gives a blessing to those who read it. REV 1 1 ik5v τοῖς δούλοις αὐτοῦ 1 his servants This refers to people who believe in Christ. @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ REV 5 12 gnv1 ἄξιόν ἐστιν τὸ Ἀρνίον τὸ ἐσφαγμέ REV 5 12 mt28 figs-metonymy λαβεῖν τὴν δύναμιν, καὶ πλοῦτον, καὶ σοφίαν, καὶ ἰσχὺν, καὶ τιμὴν, καὶ δόξαν, καὶ εὐλογίαν 1 to receive power, wealth, wisdom, strength, honor, glory, and praise These are all things that the Lamb has. Being praised for having them is spoken of as receiving them. This can be restated to remove the abstract nouns. See how you translated a similar sentence in [Revelation 4:11](../04/11.md). Alternate translation: “for everyone to honor, glorify, and praise him because he is powerful, wealthy, wise, and strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) REV 5 13 sad6 figs-merism ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ ὑποκάτω τῆς γῆς 1 in heaven and on the earth and under the earth This means everywhere: the place where God and the angels live, the place where people and animals live, and the place where those who have died are. See how you translated this in [Revelation 5:3](../05/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) REV 5 13 t3zy τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπὶ τῷ θρόνῳ καὶ τῷ Ἀρνίῳ 1 To the one who sits on the throne and to the Lamb “May he who sits on the throne and the Lamb have” -REV 6 intro zkn7 0 # Revelation 06 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The author describes what happened after the Lamb opens each of the first six seals. The Lamb does not open the seventh seal until Chapter 8.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Seven Seals
Kings and important people in John’s time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, the Lamb opens the seals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### The Four Horsemen
As the Lamb opens each of the first four seals, the author describes horsemen riding different colored horses. The colors of the horses seem to symbolize how the rider will affect the earth.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### The Lamb
This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lamb]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Similes
In verses 12-14, the author uses several similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +REV 6 intro zkn7 0 # Revelation 06 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The author describes what happened after the Lamb opens each of the first six seals. The Lamb does not open the seventh seal until Chapter 8.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Seven Seals

Kings and important people in John’s time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, the Lamb opens the seals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### The Four Horsemen

As the Lamb opens each of the first four seals, the author describes horsemen riding different colored horses. The colors of the horses seem to symbolize how the rider will affect the earth.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### The Lamb
This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lamb]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Similes

In verses 12-14, the author uses several similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) REV 6 1 i392 0 Connecting Statement: John continues to describe the events that happened before the throne of God. The Lamb begins to open the seals on the scroll. REV 6 1 be7p ἔρχου! 1 Come! This is a command to one person, apparently the rider of the white horse who is spoken of in verse 2. REV 6 2 t2qg figs-activepassive ἐδόθη αὐτῷ στέφανος 1 he was given a crown This kind of crown was a likeness of wreaths of olive branches or laurel leaves, probably hammered out in gold. Examples actually made of leaves were given to victorious athletes to wear on their heads. This can be translated with an active verb. Alternate translation: “he received a crown” or “God gave him a crown (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ REV 6 17 bd8v figs-metonymy ἦλθεν ἡ ἡμέρα ἡ μεγάλη τῆς REV 6 17 i7t4 figs-metaphor ἦλθεν 1 has come Existing now is spoken of as having come. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) REV 6 17 cq9e ὀργῆς αὐτῶν 1 their wrath “Their” refers to the one on the throne and the Lamb. REV 6 17 r1ta figs-metonymy τίς δύναται σταθῆναι? 1 Who is able to stand? Surviving, or staying alive, is spoken of as standing. This question is used to express their great sadness and fear that no one will be able to survive when God punishes them. Alternate translation: “No one can survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -REV 7 intro f27i 0 # Revelation 07 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Scholars have interpreted parts of this chapter in many different ways. Translators do not need to fully understand what this chapter means to accurately translate its contents. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

It is important to accurately translate the large numbers in this chapter. The number 144,000 is twelve times twelve thousand.

Translators should be aware that the tribes of the people of Israel are not listed in this chapter the same as they are generally listed in the Old Testament.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 5-8 and 15-17.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Worship
God saves his people and keeps them through times of trouble. His people respond by worshipping him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### The Lamb
This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +REV 7 intro f27i 0 # Revelation 07 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Scholars have interpreted parts of this chapter in many different ways. Translators do not need to fully understand what this chapter means to accurately translate its contents. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

It is important to accurately translate the large numbers in this chapter. The number 144,000 is twelve times twelve thousand.

Translators should be aware that the tribes of the people of Israel are not listed in this chapter the same as they are generally listed in the Old Testament.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 5-8 and 15-17.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Worship

God saves his people and keeps them through times of trouble. His people respond by worshipping him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### The Lamb
This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) REV 7 1 b1yl 0 General Information: John begins to describe a vision of 144,000 servants of God who become marked with seals. Their marking takes place after the Lamb opens the sixth seal and before he opens the seventh seal. REV 7 1 id3y τὰς τέσσαρας γωνίας τῆς γῆς 1 the four corners of the earth The earth is spoken of as if it were flat and square like a sheet of paper. The phrase **the four corners** refers to the north, south, east, and west. REV 7 2 sgq7 figs-metonymy σφραγῖδα Θεοῦ ζῶντος 1 the seal of the living God The word **seal** here refers to a tool that is used to press a mark onto a wax seal. In this case the tool would be used to put a mark on God’s people. Alternate translation: “the marker” or “stamp” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ REV 7 17 b5rp τὸ Ἀρνίον τὸ ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ θρόνο REV 7 17 bi5i figs-metaphor ὅτι τὸ Ἀρνίον…ποιμανεῖ αὐτούς 1 For the Lamb…will be their shepherd The elder speaks of the Lamb’s care for his people as if it were a shepherd’s care for his sheep. Alternate translation: “For the Lamb…will be like a shepherd to them” or “For the Lamb…will care for them as a shepherd cares for his sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) REV 7 17 m6m8 figs-metaphor ὁδηγήσει αὐτοὺς ἐπὶ ζωῆς πηγὰς ὑδάτων 1 he will guide them to springs of living water The elder speaks of what gives life as if it were springs of fresh water. Alternate translation: “he will guide them like a shepherd guiding his sheep to fresh water” or “he will guide them to life like a shepherd guiding his sheep to living water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) REV 7 17 g3d2 figs-metonymy ἐξαλείψει ὁ Θεὸς πᾶν δάκρυον ἐκ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν 1 God will wipe away every tear from their eyes **Tears** here represent sadness. Alternate translation: “God will wipe away their sadness, like wiping away tears” or “God will cause them to not be sad anymore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -REV 8 intro ma7f 0 # Revelation 08 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Seven seals and seven trumpets
This chapter begins to show what happens when the Lamb opens the seventh seal. God uses the prayers of all believers to cause dramatic things to happen on earth. John then describes what happens when angels sound the first four of seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Passive voice
John uses the passive voice several times in this chapter. This hides who performs the action. This will be difficult to convey if the translator’s language does not have a passive voice. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### Similes
In verses 8 and 10, John uses similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +REV 8 intro ma7f 0 # Revelation 08 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Seven seals and seven trumpets

This chapter begins to show what happens when the Lamb opens the seventh seal. God uses the prayers of all believers to cause dramatic things to happen on earth. John then describes what happens when angels sound the first four of seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Passive voice

John uses the passive voice several times in this chapter. This hides who performs the action. This will be difficult to convey if the translator’s language does not have a passive voice. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### Similes

In verses 8 and 10, John uses similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) REV 8 1 d652 0 Connecting Statement: The Lamb opens the seventh seal. REV 8 1 mh2b translate-ordinal τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν ἑβδόμην 1 the seventh seal This is the last of the seven seals on the scroll. Alternate translation: “the next seal” or “the final seal” or “seal number seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) REV 8 2 fri9 figs-activepassive ἐδόθησαν αὐτοῖς ἑπτὰ σάλπιγγες 1 seven trumpets were given to them They were each given one trumpet. This can be stated in active form. Possible meanings are (1) “God gave them seven trumpets” or (2) “the Lamb gave them seven trumpets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ REV 8 12 z936 figs-metaphor ἐπλήγη τὸ τρίτον τοῦ ἡλίου REV 8 12 ukh6 σκοτισθῇ τὸ τρίτον αὐτῶν 1 a third of them turned dark Possible meanings are (1) “one third of the time they were dark” or (2) “one third of the sun, one third of the moon, and one third of the stars became dark” REV 8 12 t1ag ἡ ἡμέρα μὴ φάνῃ τὸ τρίτον αὐτῆς, καὶ ἡ νὺξ ὁμοίως 1 a third of the day and a third of the night had no light “there was no light during one third of the day and one third of the night” or “they did not shine during one third of the day and one third of the night” REV 8 13 x375 figs-activepassive ἐκ τῶν λοιπῶν φωνῶν τῆς σάλπιγγος…σαλπίζειν 1 because of the remaining trumpet…angels This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “because the three angels who have not yet sounded their trumpets are about to sound them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -REV 9 intro sq5c 0 # Revelation 09 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, John continues to describe what happens when angels sound seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### Woe
John describes several “woes” in the Book of Revelation. This chapter begins to describe three “woes” announced at the end of Chapter 8.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Animal imagery
This chapter includes several animals: locusts, scorpions, horses, lions, and snakes. Animals convey different qualities or traits. For example, a lion is powerful and dangerous. Translators should use the same animals in their translation if possible. If the animal is unknown, one with similar qualities or traits should be used.

### Bottomless pit
This image is seen several times in the Book of Revelation. It is a picture of hell as being inescapable and the opposite direction as heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])

### Abaddon and Apollyon

“Abaddon” is a Hebrew word. “Apollyon” is a Greek word. Both words mean “Destroyer.” John used the sounds of the Hebrew word and wrote them with Greek letters. The ULT and UST write the sounds of both words with English letters. Translators are encouraged to transliterate these words using the letters of the target language. The original Greek readers would have understood “Apollyon” to mean “Destroyer.” So translators may also supply what it means in the text or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])

### Repentance
Despite great signs, people are described as not repenting and so remain in their sin. People refusing to repent are also mentioned in Chapter 16. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Simile
John uses many similes in this chapter. They help to describe the images that he sees in his vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +REV 9 intro sq5c 0 # Revelation 09 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, John continues to describe what happens when angels sound seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### Woe

John describes several “woes” in the Book of Revelation. This chapter begins to describe three “woes” announced at the end of Chapter 8.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Animal imagery

This chapter includes several animals: locusts, scorpions, horses, lions, and snakes. Animals convey different qualities or traits. For example, a lion is powerful and dangerous. Translators should use the same animals in their translation if possible. If the animal is unknown, one with similar qualities or traits should be used.

### Bottomless pit

This image is seen several times in the Book of Revelation. It is a picture of hell as being inescapable and the opposite direction as heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])

### Abaddon and Apollyon

“Abaddon” is a Hebrew word. “Apollyon” is a Greek word. Both words mean “Destroyer.” John used the sounds of the Hebrew word and wrote them with Greek letters. The ULT and UST write the sounds of both words with English letters. Translators are encouraged to transliterate these words using the letters of the target language. The original Greek readers would have understood “Apollyon” to mean “Destroyer.” So translators may also supply what it means in the text or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])

### Repentance

Despite great signs, people are described as not repenting and so remain in their sin. People refusing to repent are also mentioned in Chapter 16. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Simile

John uses many similes in this chapter. They help to describe the images that he sees in his vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) REV 9 1 d26c 0 Connecting Statement: The fifth of the seven angels begins to sound his trumpet. REV 9 1 jim6 εἶδον ἀστέρα ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ πεπτωκότα 1 I saw a star from heaven that had fallen John saw the star after it had fallen. He did not watch if fall. REV 9 1 v12j ἡ κλεὶς τοῦ φρέατος τῆς Ἀβύσσου 1 the key to the shaft of the bottomless pit “the key that unlocks the shaft of the bottomless pit” @@ -439,7 +439,7 @@ REV 9 18 q9mp 0 Connecting Statement: John continues to describe the horses an REV 9 18 x4fr translate-fraction τὸ τρίτον τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 A third of the people “One third of the people.” See how you translated “A third” in [Revelation 8:7](../08/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) REV 9 20 xf3t figs-activepassive οἳ οὐκ ἀπεκτάνθησαν ἐν ταῖς πληγαῖς ταύταις 1 those who were not killed by these plagues This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “those whom the plagues had not killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) REV 9 20 d3vn figs-distinguish τὰ ξύλινα, ἃ οὔτε βλέπειν δύνανται, οὔτε ἀκούειν, οὔτε περιπατεῖν 1 things that cannot see, hear, or walk This phrase reminds us that idols are not alive and do not deserve to be worshiped. But the people did not stop worshiping them. Alternate translation: “even though idols cannot see, hear, or walk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -REV 10 intro ys3l 0 # Revelation 10 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Seven thunders
John here describes the seven thunders as making sounds that he could understand as words. However, translators should use their normal word for “thunder” when translating these verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### “The mystery of God”
This refers to some aspect of the hidden plan of God. It is not necessary to know what this mystery is to translate it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Simile
John uses similes to help him describe the face, legs, and voice of the mighty angel. Translators should understand other objects in this chapter, such as the rainbow and the cloud, with their normal meanings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +REV 10 intro ys3l 0 # Revelation 10 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Seven thunders

John here describes the seven thunders as making sounds that he could understand as words. However, translators should use their normal word for “thunder” when translating these verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### “The mystery of God”

This refers to some aspect of the hidden plan of God. It is not necessary to know what this mystery is to translate it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Simile

John uses similes to help him describe the face, legs, and voice of the mighty angel. Translators should understand other objects in this chapter, such as the rainbow and the cloud, with their normal meanings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) REV 10 1 xr6f 0 General Information: John begins to describe a vision of a mighty angel holding a scroll. In John’s vision he is viewing what is happening from earth. This takes place between the blowing of the sixth and seventh trumpets. REV 10 1 jj2e figs-metaphor περιβεβλημένον νεφέλην 1 He was robed in a cloud John speaks of the angel as if he were wearing a cloud as his clothing. This expression may be understood as metaphor. However, because very unusual things were often seen in visions, it might be understood as a literally true statement in its context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) REV 10 1 qax6 figs-simile τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ ὡς ὁ ἥλιος 1 His face was like the sun John compares the brightness of his face with the brightness of the sun. Alternate translation: “His face was bright like the sun” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) @@ -460,7 +460,7 @@ REV 10 8 tkq7 ἤκουσα 1 I heard John heard REV 10 9 x13b λέγει μοι 1 He said to me “The angel said to me” REV 10 9 tg31 πικρανεῖ 1 make…bitter “make…sour” or “make…acid.” This refers to a bad taste from the stomach after eating something that is not good. REV 10 11 ahb4 figs-metonymy γλώσσαις 1 languages This refers to the people who speak the languages. Alternate translation: “many language communities” or “many groups of people who speak their own languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -REV 11 intro s117 0 # Revelation 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 15 and 17-18.

### Woe

John describes several “woes” in the book of Revelation. This chapter describes a second and third “woe” announced at the end of Chapter 8.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Gentiles
The word “Gentiles” here refers to ungodly people groups and not Gentile Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

### Two witnesses
Scholars have suggested many different ideas about these two witnesses. Translators do not need to understand this passage to accurately translate it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

### Bottomless pit
This image is seen several times in the Book of Revelation. It is a picture of hell as being inescapable and the opposite direction as heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]]) +REV 11 intro s117 0 # Revelation 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 15 and 17-18.

### Woe

John describes several “woes” in the book of Revelation. This chapter describes a second and third “woe” announced at the end of Chapter 8.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Gentiles

The word “Gentiles” here refers to ungodly people groups and not Gentile Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

### Two witnesses

Scholars have suggested many different ideas about these two witnesses. Translators do not need to understand this passage to accurately translate it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

### Bottomless pit

This image is seen several times in the Book of Revelation. It is a picture of hell as being inescapable and the opposite direction as heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]]) REV 11 1 ba9b 0 General Information: John begins to describe a vision about receiving a measuring rod and two witnesses that God appointed. This vision also takes place between the blowing of the sixth and seventh trumpets. REV 11 1 lkn6 figs-activepassive ἐδόθη μοι κάλαμος 1 A reed was given to me This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Someone gave me a reed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) REV 11 1 tl86 ἐδόθη μοι…λέγων 1 given to me…I was told The words **me** and **I** refer to John. @@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ REV 11 19 c7pd figs-activepassive καὶ ἠνοίγη ὁ ναὸς τοῦ Θ REV 11 19 d9z7 figs-activepassive ὤφθη ἡ κιβωτὸς τῆς διαθήκης τοῦ Κυρίου ἐν τῷ ναῷ αὐτοῦ 1 the ark of his covenant was seen within his temple This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I saw the ark of his covenant in his temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) REV 11 19 b6ly ἀστραπαὶ 1 flashes of lightning Use your language’s way of describing what lightning looks like each time it appears. See how you translated this in [Revelation 4:5](../04/05.md). REV 11 19 ap5g φωναὶ, καὶ βρονταὶ 1 rumblings, crashes of thunder These are the loud noises that thunder makes. Use your language’s way of describing the sound of thunder. See how you translated this in [Revelation 4:5](../04/05.md). -REV 12 intro cq7x 0 # Revelation 12 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 10-12.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Serpent
The Book of Revelation uses imagery from the Old Testament. For example, John refers to Satan as the serpent. This image comes from the account of the Garden of Eden when Satan tempted Eve. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “A great sign was seen in heaven”
By using the passive voice here, John does not say who saw this great sign in heaven. The translation may be difficult when the subject is unclear, if your language does not have a passive voice. Many English translations use the past tense here and say “A great sign appeared in heaven.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]]) +REV 12 intro cq7x 0 # Revelation 12 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 10-12.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Serpent

The Book of Revelation uses imagery from the Old Testament. For example, John refers to Satan as the serpent. This image comes from the account of the Garden of Eden when Satan tempted Eve. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “A great sign was seen in heaven”
By using the passive voice here, John does not say who saw this great sign in heaven. The translation may be difficult when the subject is unclear, if your language does not have a passive voice. Many English translations use the past tense here and say “A great sign appeared in heaven.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]]) REV 12 1 n4ii 0 General Information: John begins to describe a woman who appears in his vision. REV 12 1 d7pw figs-activepassive σημεῖον μέγα ὤφθη ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ 1 A great sign appeared in heaven This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “A great sign appeared in heaven” or “I, John, saw a great sign in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) REV 12 1 j9yl figs-activepassive γυνὴ περιβεβλημένη τὸν ἥλιον, καὶ ἡ σελήνη ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτῆς 1 a woman clothed with the sun, and with the moon under her feet This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “A woman who was wearing the sun and had the moon under her feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ REV 12 15 a9wh αὐτὴν ποταμοφόρητον 1 to sweep her away “t REV 12 16 i4u5 figs-personification ἤνοιξεν ἡ γῆ τὸ στόμα αὐτῆς, καὶ κατέπιεν τὸν ποταμὸν, ὃν ἔβαλεν ὁ δράκων ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 The earth opened its mouth and swallowed the river that the dragon was pouring out of his mouth The earth is spoken of as if it were a living thing, and a hole in the earth is spoken of as if it were a mouth that could drink up the water. Alternate translation: “A hole in the ground opened up and the water went down into the hole” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) REV 12 16 lgt7 writing-symlanguage δράκων 1 dragon This was a large, fierce reptile, like a lizard. For Jewish people, it was a symbol of evil and chaos. The dragon is also identified in verse 9 as “the devil or Satan.” See how you translated this in [Revelation 12:3](../12/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) REV 12 17 t6jf ἐχόντων τὴν μαρτυρίαν Ἰησοῦ 1 hold to the testimony about Jesus The word **testimony** can be translated as a verb. Alternate translation: “continue to testify about Jesus” -REV 13 intro c9mw 0 # Revelation 13 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 10, which are from the Old Testament.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Similes
John uses many similes in this chapter. They help to describe the images that he sees in his vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Unknown animals
John uses different animals to try to describe what he saw. Some of these animals may not be known in the target language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +REV 13 intro c9mw 0 # Revelation 13 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 10, which are from the Old Testament.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Similes

John uses many similes in this chapter. They help to describe the images that he sees in his vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Unknown animals

John uses different animals to try to describe what he saw. Some of these animals may not be known in the target language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) REV 13 1 su49 0 General Information: John begins to describe a beast who appears in his vision. The word **I** here refers to John. REV 13 2 k6qh writing-symlanguage δράκων 1 dragon This was a large, fierce reptile, like a lizard. For Jewish people, it was a symbol of evil and chaos. The dragon is also identified as “the devil or Satan.” See how you translated this in [Revelation 12:3](../12/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) REV 13 2 xa3a ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ ὁ δράκων τὴν δύναμιν αὐτοῦ 1 The dragon gave his power to it The dragon made the beast as powerful as he was. He did not lose his power, however, by giving it to the beast. @@ -617,7 +617,7 @@ REV 13 18 uk74 ὧδε ἡ σοφία ἐστίν 1 Here is wisdom “Wisdom is REV 13 18 z8tz figs-abstractnouns ὁ ἔχων νοῦν ψηφισάτω 1 If anyone has understanding The word **insight** can be translated with the verb “understand.” Alternate translation: “If anyone is able to understand things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) REV 13 18 ri1y ψηφισάτω τὸν ἀριθμὸν τοῦ θηρίου 1 let him calculate the number of the beast “he should discern what the number of the beast means” or “he should figure out what the number of the beast means” REV 13 18 bbn2 ἀριθμὸς…ἀνθρώπου ἐστίν 1 is the number of a human being Possible meanings are (1) the number represents one person or (2) the number represents all of humanity. -REV 14 intro q71v 0 # Revelation 14 General Notes
## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Harvest

Harvest is when people go out to gather ripe food from plants. Jesus used this as a metaphor to teach his followers that they need to go and tell other people about him so those people can be part of God’s kingdom. This chapter uses the metaphor of two harvests. Jesus gathers in his people from the whole earth. Then an angel gathers in wicked people whom God will punish. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) +REV 14 intro q71v 0 # Revelation 14 General Notes

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Harvest

Harvest is when people go out to gather ripe food from plants. Jesus used this as a metaphor to teach his followers that they need to go and tell other people about him so those people can be part of God’s kingdom. This chapter uses the metaphor of two harvests. Jesus gathers in his people from the whole earth. Then an angel gathers in wicked people whom God will punish. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) REV 14 1 e7u7 0 General Information: The word **I** refers to John. REV 14 1 ck6y 0 Connecting Statement: John begins to describe the next part of his vision. There are 144,000 believers standing before the Lamb. REV 14 1 a3kz writing-symlanguage τὸ Ἀρνίον 1 the Lamb A **lamb** is a young sheep. Here is it used symbolically to refer to Christ. See how you translated this in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) @@ -669,7 +669,7 @@ REV 14 20 b1bw ληνὸς 1 winepress This is “the great wine vat” of [Rev REV 14 20 xt4z ἄχρι τῶν χαλινῶν τῶν ἵππων 1 up to the height of a horse’s bridle “as high as the bridle in a horse’s mouth” REV 14 20 m2i9 τῶν χαλινῶν 1 bridle a device made of leather straps that goes around a horse’s head and is used for directing the horse REV 14 20 gdl8 translate-numbers σταδίων χιλίων ἑξακοσίων 1 1,600 stadia “one thousand six hundred stadia” or “sixteen hundred stadia.” A “stadium” is 185 meters. In modern measures this would be about “300 kilometers” or “200 miles.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) -REV 15 intro zxt7 0 # Revelation 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, John describes events and pictures that occur in heaven.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 3-4.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Victorious over the beast”

These people are spiritually victorious. While most spiritual battles cannot be seen, the Book of Revelation pictures spiritual battles as openly occurring. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### “The temple having the tent of witness, was open in heaven”
Scripture elsewhere indicates the earthly temple copied God’s perfect dwelling place in heaven. Here John seems to refer to God’s heavenly dwelling place or temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### Songs

The Book of Revelation often describes heaven as a place where people sing. They worship God with songs. This illustrates that heaven is a place where God is always worshiped. +REV 15 intro zxt7 0 # Revelation 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, John describes events and pictures that occur in heaven.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 3-4.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Victorious over the beast”

These people are spiritually victorious. While most spiritual battles cannot be seen, the Book of Revelation pictures spiritual battles as openly occurring. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### “The temple having the tent of witness, was open in heaven”

Scripture elsewhere indicates the earthly temple copied God’s perfect dwelling place in heaven. Here John seems to refer to God’s heavenly dwelling place or temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### Songs

The Book of Revelation often describes heaven as a place where people sing. They worship God with songs. This illustrates that heaven is a place where God is always worshiped. REV 15 1 p98c 0 General Information: This verse is a summary of what will happen in 15:6-16:21. REV 15 1 l345 figs-doublet μέγα καὶ θαυμαστόν 1 great and marvelous These words have similar meanings and are used for emphasis. Alternate translation: “something that greatly amazed me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) REV 15 1 w6lf ἀγγέλους ἑπτὰ ἔχοντας πληγὰς ἑπτὰ 1 seven angels with seven plagues “seven angels who had authority to send seven plagues on the earth” @@ -923,7 +923,7 @@ REV 19 20 ht8g figs-activepassive ζῶντες ἐβλήθησαν οἱ δύο REV 19 20 blr1 τὴν λίμνην τοῦ πυρὸς, τῆς καιομένης ἐν θείῳ 1 the fiery lake of burning sulfur “the lake of fire that burns with sulfur” or “place full of fire that burns with sulfur” REV 19 21 h6ea figs-activepassive οἱ λοιποὶ ἀπεκτάνθησαν ἐν τῇ ῥομφαίᾳ τοῦ καθημένου ἐπὶ τοῦ ἵππου, τῇ ἐξελθούσῃ ἐκ τοῦ στόματος 1 The rest of them were killed by the sword that came out of the mouth of the one who rode on the horse This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “The rider of the horse killed the remainder of the beast’s armies with the sword that extended from his mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) REV 19 21 qk9t τῇ ῥομφαίᾳ…τῇ ἐξελθούσῃ ἐκ τοῦ στόματος 1 the sword that came out of the mouth The sword blade was sticking out of his mouth. The sword itself was not in motion. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Revelation 1:16](../01/16.md). -REV 20 intro c7eh 0 # Revelation 20 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### The thousand-year reign of Christ

In this chapter, Jesus is said to reign for a thousand years, at the same time that Satan is bound. Scholars are divided over whether this refers to a future period of time or to Jesus reigning now from heaven. It is not necessary to understand this passage in order to translate it accurately. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

### Final rebellion

This chapter also describes what happens after the thousand years are ended. During this time, Satan and many people will attempt to rebel against Jesus. This will result in God’s ultimate and final victory over sin and evil. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

### Great white throne

This chapter ends with God judging all people who ever lived. God separates people who believe in Jesus from those who do not believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Book of Life

This is a metaphor for eternal life. Those possessing eternal life are said to have their names written in this Book of Life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Hades and the lake of fire
These appear to be two distinct places. The translator may wish to do further research to determine how to translate these two places differently. They should not be made the same as each other in translation. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]]) +REV 20 intro c7eh 0 # Revelation 20 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The thousand-year reign of Christ

In this chapter, Jesus is said to reign for a thousand years, at the same time that Satan is bound. Scholars are divided over whether this refers to a future period of time or to Jesus reigning now from heaven. It is not necessary to understand this passage in order to translate it accurately. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

### Final rebellion

This chapter also describes what happens after the thousand years are ended. During this time, Satan and many people will attempt to rebel against Jesus. This will result in God’s ultimate and final victory over sin and evil. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

### Great white throne

This chapter ends with God judging all people who ever lived. God separates people who believe in Jesus from those who do not believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Book of Life

This is a metaphor for eternal life. Those possessing eternal life are said to have their names written in this Book of Life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Hades and the lake of fire

These appear to be two distinct places. The translator may wish to do further research to determine how to translate these two places differently. They should not be made the same as each other in translation. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]]) REV 20 1 rkv7 0 General Information: John begins to describe a vision of an angel throwing the devil into the bottomless pit. REV 20 1 n8b8 καὶ εἶδον 1 Then I saw Here, **I** refers to John. REV 20 1 c18c Ἀβύσσου 1 bottomless pit This is an extremely deep narrow hole. Possible meanings are (1) the pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever or (2) the pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom. See how you translated this in [Revelation 9:1](../09/01.md).